Digital PDFs

AA-0916C-TB

August 1977

364 pages

Original

13MB

Document:	DEC10 Operating Systems Command Manual Ver 6 03 Aug77
Order Number:	AA-0916C-TB
Revision:	0
Pages:	364
Original Filename:	AA-0916C-TB_DEC10_Operating_Systems_Command_Manual_Ver_6_03_Aug77.pdf

OCR Text

dec
OPERATING SYSTEM
COMMANDS MANUAL

dec
OI:lERATING SYSTEM
C()M~~ANDS MANUAL
AA-0916C-TB
August 1977
This manual reflects the software of the 6.03 release of the monitor.

~o order ad.ditional. copies of this document, contact the Software Distribution]
L.,::enter, Digital EqUipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts 01754.

digital eCluipment corporation · maynard. massachusetts

First Priinting,
May 1971
Revised:
December 1971
Revised:
June 1972
Revised:
April 1973
Revised:
May 1974
Revised:
July 1975
Revised:
August 1977
The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment
Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility
for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such
license.
Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for the use
or reliability of its software on equipment that is not supplied by
DIGITAL.

The postage prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

DIGITAL
DEC
PDP
DECUS
UNIBUS
COMPUTER LABS
COMTEX
DDT
DECCOMM

DECsystem-lO
DECtape
DIBOL
EDUSYSTEM
FLIP CHIP
FOCAL
INDAC
LAB-8
DECSYSTEM-20

MASSBUS
OMNIBUS
OS/8
PHA
RSTS
RSX
TYPESET-8
TYPESET-IO
TYPESET-II

CONTENTS

Page
vii

PREFACE
CHAPTER

1
INTRODUCTION
1.1
JOBS
1.2
MONITOR MODE AND USER MODE
1.3
COMMAND INTERPRETERS
1.3.1
Monitor Command Language Interpreter
1.3.2
Batch Command Interpreter
1.4
COMMAND FORMATS
1.4.1
Command Names
1.4.2
Command Arguments
1.4.2.1
Project-Programmer Numbers and Passwords
1.4.2.2
Device Names
1.4.2.3
File Structure Names
1.4.2.4
File Specifications
1.4.2.5
Wildcard Constructions
1.4.2.6
Date-Time Arguments
1.4.3
Option Files
1.5
COMPIL-CLASS COMMANDS
1.5.1
Indirect Commands (@ Construction)
1.5.2
The + Construction
1 ..5.3
The = Construction
1.5.4
The < > Construction
1.5.5
Compile Switches
1.5.6
Standard Processor
1.5.7
Processor Switches
1.5.8
Switches To The Linking Loaders
1.5.8.1
Passing LOADER Switches
1.5.9
Passing LINK-I0 Switches

1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-10
1-10
1-12
1-13
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-20
1-26
1-26
1-26

CHAPTER

SYSTEMS COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS

2-1

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

JOB INITIALIZATION COMMANDS
FACILITY ALLOCATION COMMANDS
SOURCE FILE PREPARATION COMMANDS
FILE MANIPULATION COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS
OBjECT PROGRAM PREPARATION COMMANDS
AND PROGRAMS
OBJECT PROGRAM CONTROL COMMANDS
OBJECT PROGRAM EXAMINATION COMMANDS
MULTIPLE JOB CONTROL COMMANDS AND PROGRAM
JOB TERMINATION COMMANDS
SENDING MESSAGES
JOB INFORMATION COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS
SYSTEM INFORMATION COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS
ALCFIL Program
ASSIGN Command
ATTACH Command
BACKSPACE Command
BACKUP Program
COMPILE Command

2-1
2-1
2-3
2-3

2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12

iii

2-5
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-11
2-13
2-15
2-16
2-17

CONTENTS (CONT.)

Page
CONTINUE Command
COpy Command
CORE Command
CPUNCH Command
CREATE Command
CREDIR Program
CREF Command
CSTART Command
CCONTINUE Command
D(eposit) Command
DAYTIME Command
DCORE Command
DDT Command
DEASSIGN Command
DEBUG Command
DELETE Command
DETACH Command
DIRECT Command
DISMOUNT Command
DSK Command
DTCOPY Program
DUMP Command
DUMP Program
E (examine) Command
EDIT Command
EOF Command
EXECUTE Command
FAILSA Program
FILCOM Program
FILE Command
FILEX Program
FINISH Command
FUDGE Command
GET Command
GLOB Program
GRIPE Program
HALT Command
HELP Command
INITIA Command
JCONTINUE Command
KJOB Command
LABEL Command
LIST Command
LOAD Command
LOCATE Command
LOGIN Command
MAKE Command
MOUNT Command
MTCOPY Program
NODE Command
NSAVE Command
NSSAVE Command
OPSER Program
OSAVE Command
OSSAVE Command
PJOB Command
PLEASE Command
PLOT Command

2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-31
2-33
2-34
2-35
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-56
2-61
2-62
2-64
2-65
2-73
2-74
2-75
2-76
2-82
2-87
2-98
2-102
2-105
2-106
2-107
2-108
2-111
2-112
2-113
2-117
2-119
2-120
2-125
2-126
2-127
2-133
2-134
2-143
2-144
2-151
2-152
2-153
2-154
2-155
2-160
2-162
2-163
2-164
2-166

CONTENTS (CONT.)

Page

CHP.~PTER

APPENDIX

PRESERVE Command
PRINT Command
PROTECT Command
QUEUE Command
QUOLST Program
R Command
REASSIGN Command
REATTA Program
REENTER Command
RENAME Command
RESOURCES Command
REWIND Command
RUN Command
SAVE Command
SCHED Command
SEND Command
SET BLOCKSIZE Command
SET BREAK Command
SET CDR Command
SET CPU Command
SET DEFAULT Command
SET DENSITY Command
SET DSKFUL Command
SET DSKPRI Command
SET HPQ Command
SET PHYSICAL Command
SET SPOOL Command
SETSRC Program
SET TIME Command
SET TTY or TTY Command
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command
SET WATCH Command
SKIP Command
START Command
SUBMIT Command
SYSTAT Command
TECO Command
TIME Command
TPUNCH Command
TYPE Command
UNLOAD Command
USESTAT Command
VERSION Command
WHERE Command
ZERO Command

2-168
2-169
2-171
2-173
2-186
2-187
2-188
2-189
2-190
2-191
2-192
2-193
2-194
2-196
2-197
2-198
2-200
2-201
2-204
2-205
2-207
2-208
2-209
2-210
2-211
2-212
2-213
2-214
2-219
2-221
2-227
2-228
2-231
2-232
2-233
2-235
2-239
2-240
2-242
2-244
2-245
2-246
2-247
2-249
2-250

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES

3-1

3.1

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

3-2

STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES

A-I

l~ .1

FILENAME EXTENSIONS
RESERVED PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBERS
RESERVED DEVICE NAMES

A-I
A-5
A-6

CARD CODES

B-1

A.2
l~. 3

APPENDIX B

CONTENTS (CONT.)

Page
APPENDIX C

TEMPORARY FILES

C-1

APPENDIX D

SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES

D-1

INDEX

Index-1

FIGURES
FIGURE

1-1
2-1

Sample Card Deck
DAEMON-written File

1-3
2-36

TABLES
TABLE

1-1
1-2
A-I
A-2
A-3
B-1
B-2
C-1

System Devices
Processor Switches
Filename Extensions
Project-Programmer Numbers
Device Names
ASCII Card Codes
DEC-026 Card Codes
Temporary Files

1-8
1-22
A-I
A-5
A-6
B-1
B-3
C-1

PREFACE

The DECsystem-lO Operating System Commands manual is a complete
reference
document
describing
the
commands available in the
DECsystem-lO Operating System.
Information presented here reflects
the 6.03 release of the monitor and related programs. Commands to the
monitor or command language interpreters are presented in alphabetical
order for easy reference.
DECsystem-lO Operating System Commands does not include reference
material for assembly language programming. This information may be
found in DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls (AA-0974C-TB). The Monitor Calls
manual ii intended for experienced assembly language programmers.
It
includes discussions of monitor programmed operators and the I/O
devices connected to the system.
The Introduction to DECsystem-lO manual
(DEC-lO-MZDC-D)
gives an
oVE~rview
of the DECsystem-lO and its operating system, TOPS-lO. This
manual is written for someone familiar with computers and computing
concepts who wishes to understand the functions of DECsystem-lO
components.
It is not intended to be a programmer's reference manual
and should be read once before reading the preceding documents.
SYNOPSIS OF DECSYSTEM-lO OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS
Chapter 1 presents all available commands and introduces the operating
system components that interface with the user.
Chapter 2 is a
detailed description of commands the monitor
command
language
interpreter processes. Chapter 3 describes the system error messages
and error codes, with correction procedures. The appendices contain
all supplementary reference material and tables.
CONVENTIONS USED IN DECSYSTEM-lO OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS
The following conventions are observed within this document:
dev:

Any logical or physical device name. A colon (:) must
be included when a device is specified as a part of a
file specification.

list

A single file specification or a string of file
specifications, consisting of a file name with or
without a file name extension;
device name if the
file is not on disk;
project-programmer number if the
file is not in your disk area;
protection code.

arg

A letter, a word, or a word abbreviation
the desired function of the command.

jobn

Any job number assigned by the monitor.
vii

specifying

file. ext

Any legal file name and extension.

core

The decimal number of lK
pages of memory.

addr

An octal address.

c(addr)

Contents of an octal address.

blocks

containing

5l2-word

[proj,prog] Project-programmer numbers;
the square brackets ([ ])
must be included in the command string.
fs

Any legal file structure name or abbreviation.

The symbol indicating
ALTmode.

when

you

type

A control character obtained when you press
key and type a character key.

ESCape

the

CTRL

The system program response to a command string.
The monitor's response to a command string.
The symbol used to indicate when you should press the
RETURN key.
You should type a carriage return after
every command to the
monitor
command
language
interpreter. At times you can also terminate commands
with an ESCape, ALTmode, CTRL/L, etc.
Underscoring indicates user input, i.e., the words and
numbers that you are to type.

A decimal number.
An equal sign, which is used in command strings
separate input and output file specifications.

viii

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION

The DECsystem-lO Operating System, called TOPS-IO,
is the
interface
between you and the actual machine.
Some of its functions are listed
below.
1.

Scheduling multiple and simultaneous uses of the system

Protecting system users from one another

Allowing access to
devices

Providing a comprehensive disk file system

Directing data
programs

Controlling non-interactive jobs

Overlapping input/output operations
high system efficiency

flow

system

resources,

between

including

peripheral

with

devices

peripheral

and

your

computations,

for

You communicate with the operating system by means of the monitor
command language. with the command language, you may access available
rE~sources of the computing system and obtain services provided by
the
operating system.

1.1

JOBS

The DECsystem-lO is a multiprogramming system;
the system transfers
control rapidly among a number of jobs, so that all jobs appear to be
running simultaneously. The term job refers to the entire sequence of
steps that you initiate from your
terminal or card deck, or the
operator initiates from a console.
You initiate a
job from your
tE~rminal by using the LOGIN command, and you end your job by using the
KJOB command.
If you initiate a job with a card deck, the job begins
with the $JOB card and ends with the $EOJ (end-of-job) card. Operator
jobs begin when the operator initializes the system, and they end when
the system is taken down.
You may initiate a job at the central computer site or from remote,
telephone-connected,
locations
whether
those
jobs are batch,
timesharing, or real-time. Once you initiate a job,
it is possible
for you to also initiate another job without killing the first.
For
example, you may initiate a timesharing job and,
using the SUBMIT
command,
also submit a second job for batch processing.
(Refer to
Chapter 2.)
You may then wait for the results from the batch job or
have
the results automatically output while you continue your
1-1

INTRODUCTION
timesharing job. When configuring and loading the DECsystem-lO,
the
system administrator sets a maximum number of jobs that the system can
handle. This number may be set to 511 jobs if the system has
sufficient memory, disk storage, processor capacity, and terminals.

1.2

MONITOR MODE AND USER MODE

Your terminal is either in monitor mode or user mode.
In monitor
mode,
each line you type is sent to the monitor command language
interpreter. When you execute certain commands, the system places the
terminal in user mode. When the terminal is in user mode, it simply
becomes an input/output (I/O) device for you. Your programs use the
terminal for two purposes:
1.

To accept command strings from the terminal (user mode)

To use the terminal as a direct I/O device (data mode)

The following is an example of terminal dialogue:
Monitor mode
User mode
Data mode

.R PIP...}

*DSK:PROG.MAC=TTY:~

THIS IS FILE

l~Z

*~C

Monitor mode
User mode

.RMACRO~

* , TTY: =DSK : PROG .-J

Monitor command
User command string
User program using the
terminal
as an input device
CTRL/C
Monitor command
User command string

Data mode
assembly listing

The special control character ~C (produced when you type the CTRL key
and a character key) allows you to stop your program, returning the
terminal to monitor mode.
If your program is waiting for
input from
the terminal, you need to type only one CTRL/C to return the terminal
to monitor mode;
otherwise, you must type two CTRL/Cs.
Because of
this, you know that your program is not waiting for input if the
system does not respond when you type one CTRL/C.
You can type
certain commands that will cause your program to run or continue
(noted in the following chapter), but these commands will leave the
terminal in monitor mode.
When the operator starts the system,
each terminal is placed in
monitor mode, ready for users to LOGIN to them (unless it is slaved or
ASSIGNed by another job). However, if the system becomes fully loaded
(i.e., the maximum number of jobs that the system is set to handle has
been reached) and you try to LOGIN, you will receive the following
error message:
JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED
When you receive this message, wait a few
LOGIN again.

minutes

before

trying

If you are using the system in a batch card environment, you may think
of your cards as being in input spooler mode, monitor mode, or user
1-2

INTRODUCTION
mode. When your card is in input spooler mode, the card deck contains
a control command beginning with a dollar sign ($) and is sent to the
Spooler, SPRINT-IO.
(Refer to the GALAXY-IO Reference Manual.)
SPRINT-IO interprets these commands and performs various actions to
create a control file for the Batch Controller. When your card is in
monitor mode,
it contains a monitor command preceded by a period and
is copied by SPRINT-IO into the control file. When the card is in
user mode,
it contains a user-level program command preceded by an
asterisk (*) or an equal sign (=) and is also copied by SPRINT-IO into
the control file. As each line in the control file is executed, the
Batch Controller passes the monitor-level line to the monitor command
language interpreter, and the user-level line to the user program.
Figure 1-1 illustrates a sample card deck.
SPRINT-l0 COMMAND TO SIGNAL
END OF CARD DECK

INPUT SPOOLER MODE

USER COMMAND STRING

USER MODE
MONITOR MODE

MONITOR COMMAND

MONITOR MODE

MONITOR COMMAND

INPUT SPOOLER MODE

SPRINT-10 CONTROL COMMAND

DATA MODE
SPRINT-l0 CONTROL COMMAND

INPUT SPOOLER MODE

Figure 1-1 Sample Card Deck

1 .' 3

1.,3.1

COMlttAND INTERPRETERS
Monitor Command Language Interpreter

When your terminal is in monitor mode, you communicate with the
monitor command language interpreter. By means of commands to this
interpreter, you may initialize jobs, allocate facilities,
prepare
source files, manipulate files, prepare, control, and examine object
programs, control job sequences and multiple jobs, terminate jobs,
send messages, and obtain job and system information. The interpreter
processes the commands described in Chapter 2.
The system, i.e., interpreter, processes most commands without delay.
However,
the system may momentarily delay a command if your job is
swapped out to the disk and the command requires that your job be
rE~sident
in core memory;
the system executes the command when your
job is swapped into core. The system signals the completion of each
command when it outputs a carriage return/line feed sequence. If the
system leaves your terminal in monitor mode,
the system prints a
period following the carriage return/line feed sequence.
If the
system leaves your terminal in user mode,
the characters that are
typed at the terminal come from your program and not from the
operating system. Most standard system programs print an asterisk (*)
on your terminal,
indicating their readiness to accept your command
strings.
You may use the type-ahead technique if you are an experienced
timesharing terminal user. With the type-ahead technique, you do not
have to wait for the completion of one command before you begin
another.
If you desire two operations from the monitor, you can begin
typing the request for the second operation before you receive the
period that the system types after completing the first operation.

1-3

INTRODUCTION
The command interpreter makes several checks before processing your
commands.
If you have not logged into the system and you have typed a
command that requires that you be logged in, the system responds with
the following error message:
?LOGIN PLEASE
and the system does not execute the command that you typed.
The
commands described in Chapter 2 require that you be logged into the
system unless it is explicitly stated otherwise.
When the system recognizes that you typed a command that requires that
your job have core, and your job has no allocated core, the system
prints the following error message:
?NO CORE ASSIGNED
and the system does not execute the command that you typed.
The monitor command language interpreter recognizes several special
characters that cause specific functions to be performed. A CTRL/C
interrupts your current running program and returns your terminal to
monitor mode. This character causes the input line, back to the last
break character (e.g., carriage return/line feed),
to be deleted.
This action is the equivalent of a CTRL/U. You must type two CTRL/Cs
if your program is not requesting input from your terminal
(i.e.,
if
your program is in the middle of execution).
When you type the DELETE key, the system generates a character that
causes the last character you typed to be deleted. This function
permits you to correct typing errors. When you press the DELETE key n
times,
the system deletes the last n characters that you typed. The
system echoes all deleted characters on your terminal and encloses the
deleted characters in backslashes (\). The system cannot delete any
characters that you typed before the last break character or any
characters already processed by your program.
When you type a CTRL/U, the system deletes your current input line,
back to the last break character. The system responds with a carriage
return/line feed, after which you may retype the line. Once you have
typed a break character, you can no longer use the line-editing
features (e.g., CTRL/U and DELETE) on that line, except when you are
using an editor.
When you type a CTRL/O, the system temporarily suppresses output to
your terminal.
You would find this function useful when a progr~m
begins to output a long message that you are not interested 1n
reading.
If you do not want to wait for the system to finish printing
the message, you can stop the system from outputting the message in
one of two ways. The first way is for you to type two CTRL/Cs, but
this action also stops the execution of your program. The second way,
is fo~ you to type a CTRL/O. When you type a CTRL/O, the system
continues executing your program, but it does not print any output on
your terminal.
The system responds with a carriage return/line feed
sequence. The system reinstates output to the terminal when one of
the following conditions occurs:

Your executing program requests input from your terminal.

Your program terminates and returns control to the monitor.

You type a CTRL/C, which returns control to the monitor.

You type another CTRL/O.

1-4

INTRODUCTION
When you type a CTRL/T,
the system prints status
information
pertaining to your job on your terminal. The information that the
system prints is the same as it prints when you issue the USESTAT
command. This information is listed below.
1.

The incremental day time, which is the time since y?u last
issued a CTRL/T or a USESTAT command or the time Slnce you
logged in if you have not issued a CTRL/T or USESTAT command

The incremental run time, which is the CPU time used since
you last issued a CTRL/T, USESTAT command, LOGIN command, or
TIME command

The increment disk reads, which is the disk blocks read since
you last issued a CTRL/T, USESTAT command, LOGIN command, or
DSK command

The program name

The core size

The job state

The program counter, which is
instruction

the

current

The I/O state of the file, which can be INPUT WAIT or
WAIT

OUTPUT

The name of the file

10.

The block number of the file if the system is performing user
I/O,
or the words (MONITOR I/O) if the system is performing
monitor I/O

11.

The number of pages in the current working
under virtual memory

12.

The number of pages not in the working set

13.

The amount of virtual core currently in use

14.

The page rate

the

address

set,

running

By typing a CTRL/T, you can determine your
job's progress without
interrupting its execution.
Note that when you type a CTRL/T the
CTRL/T character is not passed to the job as an input character.
However,
some programs activate a special interrupt feature when you
type a CTRL/T.
(Refer to DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls.)
When you type
a CTRL/T,
control of such programs automatically transfers to a
routine used to output status information, in addition to the regular
USESTAT printout.
For example, when you type a CTRL/T while using an editor, which is in
the midst of a search,
information concerning the progress of the
search may be printed. Note that CTRL/T output is typed even if you
have suppressed output by use of CTRL/O.

1-5

INTRODUCTION
When you type a CTRL/R (n R), the system types the current input line,
after it has processed all DELETEs. If you type a line incorrectly,
then make corrections using the DELETE key, the system will print the
corrected line when you type a CTRL/R. An example of this function is
shown below.
SET TTQ\Q\Y NO\O\O FILE\E\L
SET TTY NO FILL

When you type a CTRL/R, the system issues a carriage return/line feed
sequence before printing the corrected input line and leaves the input
position indicator at its previous location.

1.3.2

Batch Command Interpreter

All monitor commands that you use via the batch system use the monitor
command language interpreter. In addition to monitor commands, batch
users can issue commands that are used only by the batch programs:
the Input Spooler (SPRINT-IO), and the Batch Controller (BATCON). The
Input Spooler processes the control commands.
(Refer to the GALAXY-IO
Reference Manual.)
By means of these commands, you can create a control file, a log file,
and data files:
you can enter jobs into the batch input queue:
you
can insert monitor commands into the control file.
The Batch
Controller performs an additional interpretation. When the system
executes your job, the Batch Controller processes the control file to
pass monitor commands to the monitor command language interpreter and
it passes user-level commands to the appropriate programs.

1.4

COMMAND FORMATS

You type each command as a line of ASCII characters in uppercase or
lowercase, or a mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters.
If you
type spaces or TABs before a command name, the system ignores them.
You can type comments on the same line as a command by preceding the
comment with a semicolon. The monitor and batch command language
interpreters do not interpret or execute a line of comments. You
should terminate every command to the monitor command language
interpreter by pressing the RETURN key.
In this manual, the ~
symbol indicates when you should press the RETURN key.
If you should
type an unrecognizable command,
the system types the entire line
again, preceding and following the line with a question mark.
The
system leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
You can continue command lines to several system programs
(e.g.,
DIRECT, DUMP, QUEUE, and LINK-IO) by placing a hyphen (-) as the last
nonblank, noncomment character before the carriage return/line feed
sequence
(i.e., before pressing the RETURN key). The system treats
continuation lines as part of the current command line, which it does
not consider as being terminated until it sees a carriage return/line
feed sequence that is not preceded by a hyphen. This feature allows
you to type indefinitely long command lines.

1-6

INTRODUCTION
1.4.1

Command Names

The commands you type to the monitor command language interpreter are
one to six characters long.
If you type any character past the sixth
character, the system ignores it.
You need only type
enough
characters to uniquely identify the command. However, when you are
entering a batch job, you should use the command's full name, because
the number of unique characters may change when new commands are added
to the operating system.
If this were the case, your card decks or
control files containing abbreviated command names may no longer
function properly if new commands were added to the monitor.
Installations that implement additional commands should preserve
uniqueness of the first three letters of all existing commands.

the

When you issue control commands to the Stacker in the multiprogramming
batch system, you must issue a dollar sign ($) in the first column of
the card or line and an alphabetic character in the second column.
You can abbreviate the command name, as long as the specified command
name is unique. The first three characters of the command generally
denote uniqueness.

1.4.2

Command Arguments

Specify arguments to a command after the command name and separate
them from the command name by a space or a TAB.
If the monitor
command interpreter recognizes a command name, but cannot find a
necessary argument,
the monitor responds with the following error
message:
?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
After the system prints the error message, your terminal
monitor mode. You can then retype the command.

left

1,,4.2.1 Project-Programmer Numbers and Passwords - Only authorized
users have access to the DECsystem-lO. Your installation's system
administrator provides each authorized user with a project number, a
pl:ogrammer number, and a password. The project numbers range from 1
to 377777 (octal).
(Note that numbers 1 through 10 are reserved for
Digital.)
The programmer numbers range from 1 to 777777 (octal).
(Note that numbers 1 through 7 are reserved for Digital and numbers
400000 through 777777 are reserved for special purposes.)
NOTE
When the project number is in the 1 to
10 range,
all programmer numbers are
reserved
for
Digital.
When
the
programmer number is in the 1 to 7
range, all project numbers are reserved
for Digital.
These numbers identify each user and his corresponding area on file
structures. When you specify a project-programmer number in a command
string, the project and programmer numbers are separated by a comma
and are enclosed in square brackets (e.g., [27,4072]).

1-7

INTRODUCTION
Your password is one to six characters long and is used only when you
log in to the system. To maintain password secrecy, the monitor does
not echo the password when you type it. When you are using a terminal
with local copy, the monitor types a mask when you type your password,
thereby making the password unreadable.
(Refer to DECsystem-lO
Monitor Calls.)

1.4.2.2 Device Names - A physical device name is associated with each
system device controlled by the system.
A physical device name
consists of three letters, zero or two digits specifying the node
name,
zero to three digits specifying the unit number, and a colon.
Table 1-1 lists the generic ~hysical devices names associated with the
various system devices.
(Refer to Appendix A for the list of special
disk devices that are predefined in the DECsystem-lO.)
You can associate a logical device name with a particular physical
device.
A logical device name can be one to six characters long,
followed by a colon. When you refer to the device, you can refer to
it by logical name or physical name.
Logical device names allow you,
when writing programs, to use arbitrarily selected device names and to
assign a physical device to the logical name at execution time.
However, you should use care when assigning logical device names,
because they have priority over physical device names.
If you
assigned the logical name DSK to a DECtape, every time you attempted
to use the disk via the name DSK, you would use the DEC tape instead,
because of the logical name assignment.
Except for disk devices, you can assign only one logical device name
to a physical device at one time. You can use the name for another
device by disassociating the name from the first device and then
associating it with the second device, via the ASSIGN command. You
disassociate logical names from physical devices by using the DEASSIGN
command.
(Refer to Chapter 2.)
Each time you issue a subsequent
ASSIGN command , the system replaces the old logical name with the
newly specified logical name.

Table 1-1
System Devices
Device

Generic Physical
3-letter

Card punch
Card reader
Console TTY
DEC tape
Disk
Packs
Fixed head
Display
Line printer
lowercase/uppercase
uppercase
Magnetic tape
7-track
9-track

CDP:
CDR:
CTY:
DTx:
DSK:
DPx:
FHx:
DIS:
LPT:

----MTx:
-----

1-8

Device Name
2-letter
CP:
CR:

---

DT:
DS:
DP:
FH:

--LP:
LL:
LU:

---

M7:
M9:

INTRODUCTION
Table 1-1 (Cant.)
System Devices
Generic Physical
3-letter

Device

Operator terminal
Paper-tape punch
Paper-tape reader
Plotter
Pseudo-TTY
System library
Terminal

.ASSIGN DTA:

ABC:

---

OPR:
PTP:
PTR:
PLT:
PTY:
SYS:
TTY:

The following examples illustrate the
device names:

use

Device Name
2-letter

PP:
PR:

-----

SY:
TT:
of

physical

You request a DECtape
the logical name ABC.

and

logical

drive

with

DTA260 ASSIGNED

The monitor
gives
you
device
DTA260.
You then mount a DECtape
on drive DTA260.

.ASSIGN PTP:

You request the paper-tape
with the logical name ABC.

ABC:

punch

%LOGICAL NAME WAS IN USE, PTP260 ASSIGNED
The monitor types an error message,
telling you that the paper-tape
punch is reserved.
The logical name ABC now refers
the paper-tape punch.

• R PIP

You request the system program PIP .

*ABC:=DTA260:FILEA

You issue a command string to PIP
asking
that
file
FILEA
be
transferred from device DTA260 to
physical
device
ABC
(physical
device PTP:).

.ASSIGN DTA:

DEF:

You type a CTRL/C,
returning
terminal to monitor mode.

,your

You request another DECtape
with the logical name DEF.

drive

ASSIGNED TO JOB Nl,N2, •.•

The monitor
issues
a
message
telling you that all drives are in
use by the specified jobs.
The
monitor does not assign a DECtape
drive or a logical name.

.ASSIGN DTA6:

You request drive DTA6
(which you
already have assigned to you) with
the logical name DEF.
The system
clears the copy of the directory
currently in core.

DEF:

1-9

INTRODUCTION
DTA261 ASSIGNED

You mount a new DEC tape on the
previously
assigned drive.
The
system reads in the new DEC tape
directory into core when you next
access the DECtape.

.DEASSIGN PTP:

You deassign the paper tape punch,
thereby clearing the logical name
ABC.

. R PIP

You request the PIP system program .

*ABC:=DEF:FILEB

You request that the file FILEB
transferred
from device DEF
device ABC.

?DEVICE ABC DOES NOT EXIST

The system prints an error message
indicating that the logical device
name ABC is no longer assigned.
You type a CTRL/C,
returning
terminal to monitor mode.

.ASSIGN DTA260:

XYZ:

DTA261 ASSIGNED

be
to

your

You request drive DTA260 again with
the logical name XYZ. The system
disassociates the logical name DEF
from
DTA260
and
clears
the
directory from core.
You mount a new DECtape.
The
system reads the new directory into
core when you next access
the
DECtape.

1.4.2.3 File Structure Names - In the system, disk devices are
grouped according to file structures. File structures are logical
arrangements of l28-word blocks on one or more disk units of the same
type.
A file structure can exist on one disk unit:
or, it can be
distributed over several disk units of the same type and designated by
a single name. However, two file structures cannot exist on the same
unit. The operator assigns a SIXBIT name to every file structure when
the operator defines the system's file structures. This name is one
to five characters long, and cannot duplicate a physical device name,
a unit name, or an existing file structure name. The recommended
names for public file structures are DSKA, DSKB, ... , DSKn in order of
decreasing speed.

1.4.2.4 File Specifications - The system stores all information (both
programs and data)
as named files.
Each named file has a file
specification associated with it. The file specification consists of
the following infnrmation:
1.

The physical device name or file structure name

The file name

The file name extension

1-10

INTRODUCTION
4.

The ordered list of directory names

The access protection code

The first four items of the file specification are necessary to
identify a disk file uniquely.
If you issue a file specification for
devices other than DECtape or disk, the system ignores them. DECtapes
and disks are the only directory-oriented devices. Note that item 4
in the list above does not apply to DECtapes.
ThE~

physical device name used for DECtape or the file structure name
used for disk may be any legal device name described in the previous
sections of this manual. You should always type a colon following the
device name (e.g., DTA3:).

A file name is one to six characters long;
the system ignores all
characters past the sixth. The file name extension is a period (.)
followed by zero to three characters.
It is used to indicate the type
of information in the file.
(Refer to Appendix A for a list of
standard file name extensions.)
You should use only standard file
name extensions, though other extensions may be valid. Note that most
programs recognize only file names and extensions consisting of
letters and digits.
The ordered list of directory names identifies the disk area where the
file is stored.
This list may be a user file directory (UFO)
represented by the owner's project-programmer number, or a user file
directory followed by one or more sub-file directories (SFDs). You
must enclose a directory name in square brackets.
The access
protection code of a file is a 3-digit octal code designating the
users who can read or write the file.
The code must be enclosed in
angle brackets « », and you specify it only for output files.
For a
given file, users are divided into three groups: owner of the file,
users with the same project number as the owner, all other users. The
standard protection code is 057, allowing users in the owner's project
to read and execute the file, and prevent access by all other users.
(For a complete description of
access
protection,
refer
to
DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls.)
Note that the standard protection code
can be redefined by your installation.
Also, you can issue the SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command. The argument
you specify in this command overrides the standard protection code
when you create subsequent files.
The following information is needed in command strings when
to a file:

referring

The file name

The device name, if the file is not on disk

The directory name, if the file is not in your disk area

The following information is optional in a file specification:
1.

The file name extension

The device name, if the file is on disk

The directory name, if the file is in your disk area

The protection code

1-11

INTRODUCTION
The following are examples of file specifications:
TEXT.MAC

File name and file name extension

DTA3:FILEA

Device name and file name

DSK:PROG2.CBL[10,16]

Device name, file name,
file
extension and directory name

DSKA:MAIN.F4[27,235]<057>

A complete
file
specification:
device name,
file name, file name
extension, directory
name,
and
protection code.

name

1.4.2.5 Wildcard Constructions - You can use wildcard constructions
with many command strings.
A wildcard exists when you type an
asterisk to specify a file specification field or a question mark to
replace a character in a file specification field. You use the
asterisk (*) as a wildcard to designate the entire file specification
field.
For example:
filename.*

All files
extension

*.ext

All files with this
name

*.*

All files

*.*[project,*]

All files in directories with this
number and any programmer number

with

this

file

extension

name

and

any

and

any

file

project

You can use the question mark as a wildcard to designate a part of a
file specification field.
You type a question mark for each character
that is to be matched. For example, PR?? matches on four characters
or less.
filename.M??

All files with this file
extension beginning with M

TES??ext

All files with this extension and any file
name up to five characters, beginning with TES

?????

All files with file names of two characters or
less
and
file
name extension of three
characters or less.

[25,5??]

All files in directories with the project
number 25 and a programmer number 500 through
577

name

and

any

You can specify the asterisk and the question mark in the same command
construction:
??*

All files with file names of two characters or less

1-12

INTRODUCTION
Also, you can specify a directory name with the project number,
the
programmer number, or both numbers missing from the specification.
ThE~ following examples represent directory specifications.
[15,23]

The UFD [15,23]

[,30]

The UFD that has the your project number and
the specified programmer number (i.e., 30)

[36,]

The UFD that has the specified project
(i.e., 36) and your programmer number

[ ,]

Your UFD

[-]

Your default directory which may be different
from
Your
UFD.
(Refer to the SETSRC
description in DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls)

["SUBl,SUB2]

The sub-file directory SUB2 under the sub-file
directory SUBI in your UFD

number

The DUMP, DIRECT, and QUEUE programs recognize the number sign as
described below.
(Refer to the PIP Programmer's Reference Manual for
PIP's interpretation of the number sign.)
You can use a number sign
to represent a file name or extension that contains characters that
cannot be typed because they have special meanings in the system. For
example,
if you were to type *.MAC in a command string, you would be
referencing all files with the .MAC extension. You can use the number
sign followed by the octal representation of the file name or
extension in SIXBIT code to allow a file name or extension composed of
special characters to be typed.
For example, 120000000000 represents
the file named *.
If letters or digits are part of the file name or
the extension containing the special characters, you must also type
the octal representation of the letters or digits following the number
sign.
Therefore, you must type the number sign at the beginning of
the file name and all characters following it must be represented in
SIXBIT. Appendix F contains a table of SIXBIT character codes.

1.4.2.6 Date-Time Arguments - Certain switches require
arguments
specifying a date or time.
Date and time arguments can be either
relative or absolute. A relative argument specifies a certain length
of time from the current date or time;
an absolute argument specifies
a particular date or time. The format of a relative argument is shown
below:
number-of-daysD:hours:minutes:seconds
where:

number-of-days is optional.
D is required if you specify number of days.
hours is optional if you specify number of
letter D). Otherwise, hours are required.

days

(with

the

minutes are optional.
seconds are optional.
However,
if you specify seconds,
minutes must also be given or seconds will be interpreted as
the minutes argument.

1-13

INTRODUCTION
You must type the colon to separate one field from the other. You can
precede a relative argument with an optional plus (+) or minus (-)
sign.
If you do specify a sign, the sign implies either past
(-)
or
future
(+). When you do not specify number of days, you must precede
the time with a plus sign or a minus sign.
For example:
-3D:4:27:2l
means three
Similarly:

days,

four

hours,

minutes,

and

seconds

ago.

means four hours from now.
An absolute argument is written in the following format:
weekday or date:hours:minutes:seconds
where:

weekday is the day of the week and it is optional.
date is optional and has one of the following formats:
day of month-month-year (2l-0CT-76)
month-day of month-year (OCT-2l-76)
numeric month-day of month-year (10-21-76)
The month can be truncated to a unique abbreviation.
The
year
(and its preceding hyphen) is optional and, if given,
can be one, two, or four digits.
hours is based on a 24-hour clock and it is required
minutes is optional
seconds is optional

For example, the following specifies before or since last Wednesday at
9:15:6 A.M.
WED:09:15:6
Because the date is known to be past or future from either the switch
used (e.g., BEFORE and SINCE imply past: AFTER implies the future) or
by the plus or minus sign, an unspecified field is filled in so that
the result is the next or last occurrence of the specified date.
Therefore, if you omit the time argument,
the time defaults to
00:00:00
(midnight) if past and 23:59:59 (11 o'clock, 59 minutes, and
59 second P.M.) if future. Therefore:
/AFTER:SAT is after 23:59:59 next Saturday
/BEFORE:25-FEB is before last February 25th
/SINCE:JUL-3-76 is since July 3, 1976 at noon

1-14

INTRODUCTION
1.4.3

Option Files

You can create files in your disk area into which you can put switches
for the DIRECT, DUMP, LINK-lO, LOGIN, INITIA, and QUEUE programs.
These files allow you to automatically override system defaults for
the individual programs.
This file is called DSK:SWITCH.INI and it must reside in your disk
area.
It can contain two types of lines. The first type is written
in the following format.
program-name/switch/switch/ ..• /switch
where:

program-name is either DIRECT or DUMP.
/switch is a valid switch for
/DIRECT, /DETAIL, /NOSUMMARY).

the

named

program

(i.e.,

You can place only one line per program in the file.
However,
this
line may be as long as you wish by putting the hyphen continuation
character before the carriage return. When you run the named program,
the switches in SWITCH.INI will be llsed as the defaults instead of any
system-defined defaults. When the system calls in the program,
it
searches for your file called SWITCH.INI. If the system does not find
the file, the system uses any system defaults for that program.
If
the system finds the file, but does not find a line for the specified
program, the system uses any system-defined defaults. When the system
finds your SWITCH.INI file and it contains a line for the specified
program, the system uses the switch values that you have specified in
the SWITCH.INI file instead of any system-defined default values.
You can override any switch in your SWITCH.INI file by issuing a
command string to the specified program containing a complement of the
switch in SWITCH.INI.
The second type of line that can appear in
written in the following format:

your

SWITCH.INI

file

program-name:option-name/switch/switch ••. /switch
where:

program-name is a program name such as DIRECT, DUMP,
LOGIN, INITIA, or QUEUE.

LINK-lO,

option-name is the same as used for
the /OPTION switch.
(Refer to the DIRECT and DUMP command descriptions in Chapter
2. )
You use the second type of line to override both system defaults and
any defaults that you may have previously specified. You reference
this type of line in SWITCH.INI by including the /OPTION:option switch
in a command string to a program.
If you specify an option name in
the command string that does not appear in SWITCH.INI,
the program
outputs a warning message and uses the system defaults for that
program.
Assume that you create a file called SWITCH.INI that contains:
DIRECT/FAST/UNITS/SUMMARY
DIRECT:THIS RUN/WORDS/ACCESS:25
If you then type the DIRECT command, the system will print a fast
listing showing both the actual unit names (instead of the structure
names) and the summary line. When you desire the system to print a
normal directory listing, you must type a command string to DIRECT
1-15

INTRODUCTION
that includes the /NORMAL switch. Note that disk unit names,
not
structure names, and the summary line will still be output. You can
type the following command string to automatically list the length of
the files in words, instead of blocks, and to update the access date
of files with 25 words or less:
DIRECT/OPTION:THIS RUN

1.5

COMPIL-CLASS COMMANDS

You can type short, concise command strings that cause a series of
options to be performed.
These commands are known as COMPIL-class
commands;
they are described in detail in Chapter 2. These commands
cause the monitor to run the COMPIL program, which deciphers the
command and constructs new commands strings for -the system program
(e.g., TECO, PIP, LINED, sos, FORTRAN)
that actually process the
command. Each time you execute the CREATE, MAKE, EDIT, or TECO
commands,
the command with its arguments is written as a temporary
file in core or on the disk. Therefore, the system can recall the
file specification last edited for the next edit without your having
to specify the arguments again. Note that this is an exception to the
requirement that the file name must always be specified.
For example
if you type:
.CREATE PROGX.MAC
You may then later type the following:
.EDIT
instead of the following command line:
.EDIT PROGX.MAC
assuming that you have not issued another EDIT-class command
the file name in the interim.

changing

The system also writes the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands,
with their arguments,
in a temporary file, allowing your last file
specification to be recalled without again specifying the arguments.
The temporary files containing these file
names written in the following format:

specifications

have

file

nnn is your job number in decimal, with leading zeros to
three digits.

make

nnnxxx.TMP
where:

xxx specifies the use of the file.
(Refer to Appendix C for a list of the temporary files.)

1.5.1

Indirect Commands (@ Construction)

When you have to input many program names and switches, you can put
these into a file, eliminating the need for you to retype the names
and switches for each compilation. You do this by using the @ file
construction, which you can combine with any COMPIL-class command.
1-16

INTRODUCTION
You can specify an @ file at any point in a command line after the
first word in the command.
In this construction, the word file must
be a file name, followed by an optional file name extension and
project-programmer number.
If you omit the extension, the system
searches for a command file with a .CMD file name extension. If that
file is not found,
it then searches for a command file with a null
extension. Then, when the system finds the specified file, it places
the information in the file into the command string, replacing the
@filename.
For example, if you have a file called @FLIST containing the following
command string:
FILEB,FILEC/LIST,FILED
then, the following command line:
.COMPILE, FILEA,FILEB,FILEC/LIST,FILED,FILEZ
could be replaced by the following command line:
.COMPILE FILEA,@FLIST,FILEZ
You may have command files containing the @ file construction to a
depth of 17 levels.
If this process of indirection results in files
pointing in a loop, the maximum depth is rapidly exceeded, and the
system prints an error message.
The following rules apply in handling format characters in
file.

1.5.2

command

Spaces are used to delimit words, but otherwise are ignored.
Similarly, a TAB, a vertical TAB, and form feed characters
are treated as spaces.

To allow long command strings, command terminators
(i.e.,
carriage return, line feed, ESCAPE) are ignored if the first
nonblank character after a sequence of command terminators is
a comma. Otherwise, they are treated either as commas by the
COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands, or as command
terminators by all other COMPIL-class commands.

Blank lines are ignored completely.

Comments can be included in command files by preceding the
comment with a semicolon;
text from the semicolon to the end
of the line is ignored.

If command files are
ignored.

sequenced,

the

sequence

numbers

are

The + Construction

When you use the + construction,
the system produces a single
relocatable binary file from a collection of input source files.
If
you wish to construct a single program from several input files,
you
can name one input file FIRST.MAC, another MIDDLE.MAC, and a third
LAST. MAC. You can then specify the following command line:
.COMPILE FIRST+MIDDLE+LAST

1-17

INTRODUCTION
After this, the system produces one binary file produced from the
three source files, FIRST, MIDDLE, and LAST. This construction allows
you to use one input file as part of several different compilations.
For example, you could later use the FIRST.MAC file with SECOND.MAC
and THIRD.MAC to obtain a different binary file. The + construction
permits you to maintain material in a single file that is common to
more than one compilation.
The system gives the name of the last input file in the string to any
output file
(i.e.,
.REL,
.CRF,
.LST). Therefore, in the previous
examples,
the output files would be called
LAST
and
THIRD,
respectively. Note that you can include device names, extensions, and
project-programmer numbers in any + construction.
Therefore,
the
following is a valid command string:
.COMPILE FIRST.MAC[27,4072]+SECOND.MAC+THIRD.MAC[35,234]

1.5.3

The = Construction

Usually the system makes the name of the relocatable binary file the
same as that of the source file, with the extension specifying the
difference. You can override this action by using the = construction.
The = construction allows you to specify the name of the output files.
For example, if you need a binary file called BINARY.REL from a source
program called SOURCE.MAC, you could issue the following command line:
.COMPILE BINARY=SOURCE
You can also use this construction to specify an output name for a
file produced by the use of the + construction. To give the name
WHOLE.REL to the binary file the system produces with PARTl.MAC and
PART2.MAC, you could issue the following command line:
.COMPILE WHOLE=PARTI + PART2
To change the file name of the output file is the most common use of
the = construction. However, you may also use it to change any other
default condition. The default condition for processor output is
DSK:source.REL[your ppn].
If you would like output on DTA3 with the
file name FILEX instead of the defaults, you could issue the following
command line:
.EXECUTE DTA3:FILEX=FILEl.F4

1.5.4

The

< > Construction

The < > construction can be used in COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG
commands only.
You use it to cause programs listed within the angle
brackets to be assembled with the same parameter file.
If you also
use the + construction, it must appear before the < > construction.
To assemble LPTSER.MAC, PTPSER.MAC, and PTRSER.MAC with the PAR. MAC
parameter file, you could type the following command 1ine:
.COMPILE PAR+LPTSER,PAR+PTPSER,PAR+PTRSER
However, using the
following line:

< >

construction

you

.COMPILE PAR + <LPTSER, PTPSER, PTRSER>
1-18

could

merely

type

the

INTRODUCTION
The following command string construction is invalid:
.COMPILE <LPTSER, PTRSER, PTPSER> + PAR

1.5.5

Compile Switches

You can modify the COMPILE, LOAD,
EXECUTE,
and DEBUG commands by
including switches in the command string. The switches can be used to
perform the following:
1.

Indicate the processor to be used

Force a compilation

Generate listings

Create libraries

Search user libraries

Obtain loader maps

You precede each switch with a slash and terminate it
non-alphanumeric character,
usually a space or a comma.
abbreviate the switch if the name remains unique.

with a
You can

The switches used are either temporary or permanent.
A temporary
You cannot
switch applies only to the immediately preceding file.
place an incervening space or comma between the file name and the
switch.
In the command construction:
· COI~PILE PROG ,TEST/MACRO, SUBLET
the /MACRO switch applies only to the file named TEST.
A permanl~nt switch applies to all files following it, until you modify
it by a subsequent switch.
You separate the switch from the file name
by spaces,
commas,
or a combination of both.
In the command
construction:
.COMPILE PROG/MACRO TEST,SUBLET
· COI~PILE PROG,/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET
· COI~PILE PROG,/MACRO TEST,SUBLET
.COMPILE PROG/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET

itemporary switch that
iaffects PROG
ipermanent switch that
iaffects TEST and SUBLET
ipermanent switch that
iaffects TEST and SUBLET
itemporary switch that
iaffects PROG

The COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG command descriptions in
2 list their applicable switches.

1.5.6

Chapter

Standard Processor

The system always translates files with recognizable extensions
implied by the extension (i.e., .MAC, .CBL, .F4, .ALG) , even if you
type a switch diiecting otherwise. The COBOL compiler will process a
file called DATPRO.CBL.
Files without a recognizable processor
e>~tension
are compiled or assembled according to the
standard
processor, normally FORTRAN, at the beginning of the command string.
1-19

INTRODUCTION
You can control the setting of the standard processor by including
switches in the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command string. The
descriptions of the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands in
Chapter 2 include descriptions of the switches used to change the
standard processor.
In the following examples, the installation has chosen FORTRAN as
standard processor. If you issue the following command:

the

.COMPILE NO EXT
the file named NOEXT will
command:

compiled

FORTRAN.

The

following

.COMPILE FILEZ.MIN
causes the file named FILEZ to be compiled by FORTRAN because MIN
not a recognizable processor extension. The following command:

.COMPILE APART,DATA/COBOL,TEST
causes the files APART and TEST to be compiled by FORTRAN and the file
DATA to be compiled by COBOL.
NOTE
By setting the appropriate
assembly
switches, SNOBOL, BLISS, and MACYll will
be recognized as processors.
However,
these
assembly
switches
are
not
supported.
The switches used to change the standard processor can be temporary or
permanent.
(Refer to Section 1.5.5.) The command construction:
.COMPILE APART,/COBOL DATA,TEST
causes APART to be compiled by
compiled by COBOL.

FORTRAN,

and

DATA

and

TEST

If you specify source files with appropriate extensions, you can
disregard the subject of the standard processor.
Any files you
specify with a processor extension are always translated by the
specified processor, even if you type the switch name.

1.5.7

Processor Switches

It is occasionally necessary for you to pass switches to the assembler
or compiler in a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command. For each
translation (assembly or compilation),
the COMPIL program sends a
command string to the translator, containing three parts:
1.

Binary output file

Listing file

Source file

1-20

INTRODUCTION
To include switches with these files, you must do the following:
1.

Group the switches according to each related source
you use the + construction.

Group the switches according to the three types of files for
each source file;
the order of the groups of switches is
a.

binary

listing

source

Separate the groups of switches by
file.

Enclose all switches for each source file within one
parentheses.

set

Place each parenthetical string immediately after the
file to which it refers.

source

groups

for

switches,

each

The COMPIL program interprets the
rules:

commas

file

source

using

right

these

parenthesis

The switches immediately before a closing
are source (SSSS) •

The switches before the first comma are binary (BBBB, , ) •

The switches before the second comma are listing (LLLL, ) .

The order of the switches is BBBB, LLLL, SSSS.

The individual switches are separated by spaces.

The following are examples:
(SSSS)
(BBBB, ,)
(BBBB,LLLL,SSSS)
(, ,SSSS)
( ,LLLL, )
(BBBB, ,SSSS)
(BBBB, LLLL,)
( ,LLLL,SSSS)

source switch
binary switch
binary, list, and source switches
source switch(es)
listing switch(es)
binary and source switches
binary and list switches
list and source switches

The processor switches are listed in Table 1-2,
and the types of files to which they apply.

with

their

meanings

The following are examples of the use of processor switches:
message

.DEBUG TEST (,N,)

Suppresses
error
during assembly .

. CO~iprLE OUTPUT=MTAO: (S, M, W) /L

Rewinds
the
magtape
(W) ,
compiles
the
first
file,
produces binary output for the
KIlO
(S),
and includes the

1-21

INTRODUCTION
MACRO coding in the output
listing
file
(M) •
Output
files are given the
names
OUTPUT.REL and OUTPUT.LST .
• COMPILE/MACRO A=MTAO: (,Q,W)/L

Rewinds
the
magtape
(W) ,
compiles the first file, and
suppresses Q
(questionable)
error
indications
in
the
listing. When a binary switch
is not present, the delimiting
comma must appear .

. COMPILE/MACRO A=MTAO: (,Q,)/L

Compiles the file
at
the
current position of the tape
and
suppresses
Q
error
indications on the listing.
Note that when the source and
binary
switches
are
not
present, the delimitng commas
must appear •

. COMPILE FOO (NOWARN DEBUG)
Compiles the file named Faa
using the FlO source switches
NOWARN and DEBUG.

Table 1-2
Processor Switches
Processor Binary
ALGOL

Listing

Source

Set dynamic storage region
for your own array ( knwon as
the heap) .
E The source
file
in
has line number
columns 73 to 80.
List the source program.

L
N

COBOL

Suppress error
the terminal.

message

Delimit the words in quotes.

Suppress the listing of
source program.

the

Allow the listing
generated.

code

Produce a cross-referenced
listing of all user-defined
items in the source program.

Meaning

for
Check
the
program
errors,
but do not generate
code.

1-22

INTRODUCTION
Table 1-2 (Cont.)
Processor Switches
Processor Binary

Listing

Source

Suppress generation of the
starting address of a main
program.

Force a starting address
be
generated
for
subprogram.

to
a

Use
the
preceding
file
descriptor as a library file
whenever the COpy verb is
encountered.

Print a map showing
parameters
of
user-defined item.

the
the

Suppress output of source
errors on the terminal.

FORTRAN

Meaning

Do not generate trace
and symbols.

calls

Produce a two-segment object
The high segment
program.
the
resident
contains
sections of the Procedure
the low segment
division;
everything else.
contains
When the object program is
loaded, LIBOL is added to
the high segment.

The source file has sequence
numbers in columns 1 through
6 and comments starting at
column 73.

Rewind the magnetic tape.

Advance the magnetic
reel by one file.

tape

Backspace the magnetic
reel by one file.

tape

Zero the DEC tape directory.

Generate
a
CREF-type
cross-reference listing.

List error
only.

1-23

message

codes

INTRODUCTION
Table 1-2 (Cont.)
Processor Switches
Processor Binary

Listing

Source

Meaning

------------+--------~--------~--------1_--------------------------------~

Print an octal listing of
the
binary
program
in
addition to the
symbolic
listing.
This switch must
be accompanied by the
M
switch.

Translate the letter D in
column 1 as a space, and
treat the line as a normal
FORTRAN statement.

Include MACRO
output listing.

Suppress output of
error
messages on the terminal.

coding

Produce code for execution
on the KAlO
if running on
the KIlO, and vice versa.

Skip to the logical
the magnetic tape.

Rewind the magnetic tape.

FORTRAN-10

end

Zero the DECtape directory.
Generate a file that can be
input to the CREF program.

Include the octal-formatted
version of the object file
in the listing.

Translate the letter D in
column 1 as a space, and
treat the line as a normal
FORTRAN statement.

Compile
the
program,
producing code to execute on
the KAlO processor.

Compile
the
program,
producing code to execute on
the KIlO processor.
Add the mnemonic translation
of the object code to the
listing file.

NOE

Suppress output of
error
messages to the terminal.

NOW

Suppress output of warning
messages to the terminal.

1-24

INTRODUCTION
Table 1-2 (Cont.)
Processor Switches
--,---

Processor Binary

Listing

Source

of
optimiz ation
Perform
symbo Is
when
global
producing process or code.

Perform
checking
only.

MIACRO

Meaning

c ompilation,
sy ntax errors

for

Advance the mag netic
reel by one file.

tape

Backspace the mag netic
reel by one file.

tape

Produce listing file in a
format acceptabl e as input
to CREF.

List the macro ex pansions.

Byte sizes match the
of the instructio n.

format

Byte sizes
fields.

two

18-bit

(used
Reinstate
listi ng
after list suppr ession by S
switch) .

Suppress ASCII te st in macro
and
repeat the expansion
(SALL) .

Suppress error
the terminal.

messages

Allow literals
only one file.

Increase the si ze
pushdown list.

P
Q

occupy
of

the

Suppress questio nable
error
indicatio ns on
listing.

(Q)
the

Skip to the logic al
the magnetic tape

Suppress
expansions.

Suppress the list ing.

S
T

are

all

end

macro

·Zero the DEC tape directory.

1-2~

INTRODUCTION
1.5.8

Switches To The Linking Loaders

Two linking loaders are available to you on the DECsystem-lO:
the
LOADER program and the LINK-IO program.
(Refer to the LOADER
Programmer's Reference Manual and the LINK-IO Programmer's Reference
Manual for complete information.)
In complex loading procedures, it
may be necessary to pass switches to one of the linking loaders to
direct its operation.
The percent sign (%) character accomplishes
this passing of switches.

1.5.8.1 Passing LOADER Switches The % character takes an optional
leading sign (+ or -) and one letter (or a sequence of digits and one
letter) following it. To set a program origin of 6000 for file PROG3,
you can type the following:
.LOAD PROGl,PROG2,%60000PROG3,PROG4
The %60000 switch, with the % character replaced with the / character,
is passsed to the LOADER. The COMPIL program allows more than one
LOADER switch to be specified:
.LOAD PROG %F/MAP
(For a description of the /MAP
description in Chapter 2.)

1.5.9

switch,

refer

the

LOAD

command

Passing LINK-IO Switches

The LINK-IO switch specification, preceded and followed
by
a
delimiter,
follows the % character.
The delimiter can be any
character; however, you must be careful that the character you use
does not have a specific meaning to COMPIL. The @ character indicates
an indirect command file, and the semicolon causes the remainder of
the line to be treated as a comment and, therefore, is ignored. The
recommended delimiter is a single or double quotation mark.
The
beginning and ending delimiter must be the same character.
A LINK-IO specification consists of the switch name and, optionally, a
keyword and a value. The items in the specifications are separated by
colons. To set a program origin of 6000 for file FILEB, you could
type the following command:
.LOAD/LINK FILEA, %'SET:.LOW.:666'FILEB,FILEC
(For a description of the /LINK switch,
description in Chapter 2.)

1-26

refer

the

LOAD

command

CHAPTER 2
SYSTEMS COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS

Although there is one operating system for all configurations of the
DECsystem-lO, some commands may not be included in every DECsystem-lO.
Some installations delete certain features from their operating
systems because of a constraint on core. Your system administrator
can delete commands from the operating system by setting feature test
switches when defininq the system configuration via MONGEN.
In many cases, you can type one of two commands to run a program.
For
example,
the indirect co~mand MAKE and the direct command R TECO both
rup _t_he TBCO program. Atl some installations, the system administrator
may have turned off the indirect command switch, but the switch
implementing the direct c~mmand is always set.
Therefore, you may
always run a program with the R (or RUN) command, even if the switch
implementing the corresponding indirect command has been turned off.
Although commands are arranged in alphabetical order in Chapter 2 for
ease of reference, they can be divided into functional groups for ease
of learning.

2.1

JOB INITIALIZATION COMMANDS

Because the system limits access to authorized persons, the
commands protect the system from unauthorized use.

2.2

INITIA

Performs standard
terminal.

Gives you, the user, access to the system.

system

initialization

following
for

your

FACILITY ALLOCATION COMMANDS

The monitor allocates peripheral devices, file structure storage, and
core memory to user jobs when they request these things. The monitor
also protects these allocated facilities from interference by other
users.
The monitor incorporates software provisions to differentiate
the central nodes from the remote nodes.
Certain commands
(e.g.,
ASSIGN, PLEASE)
include node identification arguments to allow both
user access and allocation of system resources at any node.
This
feature allows you considerable flexibility in allocating system
facilities and directing input and output to a specific node.
By specifying a node number, you can assign devices and input data
from a peripheral device at a node other than your own.
In addition,
by using the LOCATE command, you can logically establish your job at a
node other than your physical node.
If you do not include a node
2-1

SYSTEMS COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS
identification argument in your command line, the system automatically
directs input and output to your logical node. Your logical node is
the same as your physical node, if you have not issued the LOCATE
command.
When the system assigns a nonsharable device to your job, the system
removes that device from the monitor's pool of available resources.
If another user attempts to reference or assign that device,
the
attempt fails.
You should never leave the system without first
returning your allocated facilities to the monitor pool.
Allocated
facilities are automatically returned to the monitor's pool of
available resources when you deassign the resources or you kill your
job. Until you return these facilities (resources), no other user can
utilize them except through operator intervention.
Assignable devices (i.e., nondisk and nonspooled devices)
in the
monitor's pool of available resources are either unrestricted or
restricted devices. Any user can assign an unrestricted device by
using the ASSIGN command. Only privileged jobs (i.e., jobs logged in
under [1,2] or running with the JACCT bit set) can assign restricted
devices.
However, nonprivileged users can have a restricted device
assigned to them via the MOUNT command.
The MOUNT command allows
operator intervention for the selection or denial of a particular
device:
therefore, the operator controls the use of the assignab~e
devices.
This is particularly useful when there are multiprogramming
batch and interactive jobs competing for the same devices and
resources.
The operator sets or removes the restricted status of a
device via the OPSER commands :RESTRICT and :UNRESTRICT.
The facility allocation commands are listed below.
ASSIGN

Allocates an I/O device to your job
intervention.

Terminates I/O in progress on a specified device,
does not release the device.

but

CORE

Types or modifies the amount of core assigned to
job.

your

DEASSIGN

Returns devices assigned to your job to the
pool of available devices.

DISMOUNT

Returns, via the operator, devices assigned to
job to the monitor's pool of available devices.

FINISH

Terminates I/O in progress on the specified device and
performs the RELEASE monitor call or the DEASSIGN
command.

LOCATE

Establishes your job at a specified node.

MOUNT

Allocates an I/O device to your job via the operator.

NODE

Associates a node name with a particular device.

REASSIGN

Gives the specified device to the designated job.

SET
BLOCKSIZE

Sets the default block size for the specified magnetic
tape unit.

SET CDR

Sets the file name for the next card
interrupt.

2-2

without

reader

operator

monitor's
your

spooling

SYSTEMS COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS
SET CPU

Sets the CPU specification (i.e., CPxn, NO CPxn,
ONLY CPxn) for your job.

SET
DENSITY

Sets the default
tape unit.

density for

the specified

ALL,

magnetic

SET DSKPRI Sets the priority for your job's disk operations (data
transfers and head positionings).
SET HOST

Sets the central node for your job.

SET HPQ

Sets the high priority scheduler run
job.

queue

for

your

SET PHYSIC Sets the maximum current physical
guideline on a virtual memory system.

page

limit

SET RETRY

Enables or disables
magnetic tape unit.

SET SPOOL

Adds devices to or deletes devices from
spooled devices for your job.

SET ~rTY

Sets properties to be associated with your terminal.

SET VIRTUA Sets the current
memory system.

2.3

error

virtual

retry

page

limit

specified

the

list

virtual

SOURCE FILE PREPARATION COMMANDS

These commands call the system editing programs to create or edit a
spE~cified
text file. The system editing programs available are LINED
(a line-oriented editor) and TECO (a character-oriented editor).
In
general,
the editor that you use to create a file should also be used
whE~n you edit the file, since LINED requires
line-blocked files and
TEeo does not.

2.4

CREA~rE

Opens a new file on disk for creation with LINED.

EDIT

Opens the specified file, already
for editing with LINED.

MAKE

Opens a new file on disk for creation with TECO.

TECO

Opens a specified file that already exists for editing
with TECO.

existing

disk,

FILE MANIPULATION COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS

The commands and programs in this group allow you to manipulate files
to
any
extent
desired.
You can list source files,
DECtape
directories, and disk directories on your terminal or the line
printer, possibly via the spooling mechanism.
You can delete or
rename files from disk and DECtape.
You can also transfer files
between standard I/O devices, perform conversion between various core
image formats, and read and write various directory files.
You can
allocate disk space for a new file or you can reallocate disk space
fOlC an existing file.
Finally, you can place files in the system
queues and obtain listings of entries in these queues.

2-3

SYSTEMS COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS
ALCFIL

Allocates space for a new file
for an existing file.

reallocates

space

BACKSPACE

Spaces a magnetic tape backward the
of files or records.

specified

number

BACKUP

Saves and restores disk files.

COpy

Transfers files from one device to another.

CPUNCH

Places entries into the
queue.

DELETE

Deletes files from DECtape or disk.

DIRECT

Lists the
arguments.

DTCOPY

Copies the contents of one DECtape to another.

EOF

Writes an end-of-file mark on the
tape.

FAILSA

Saves and restores disk files.

FILCOM

Compares two
differences.

outputs

any

FILE

Provides remote control
via
the
operator
DECtape-to-disk and disk-to-DECtape transfers.

for

GLOB

Reads multiple binary files to produce an alphabetical
cross-referenced
listing
of
all global symbols
encountered.

LABEL

Writes an identifier on a DECtape.

LIST

Writes the specified files on the line printer.

MTCOPY

Copies entire contents of selected files from magnetic
tapes.

PLOT

Places entries into the plotter output spooling queue.

PRESERVE

Renames the specified files
with
protection inclusively ORed with 100.

the

standard

Places entries into the line printer
queue.

output

spooling

PROTECT

Renames the
protections.

the

requested

QUEUE

Enters items into the specified system queue.

RENAME

Changes one or more items of the file specification of
files on DECtape or disk.

REWIND

Rewinds a magnetic tape or a DECtape.

SET
DEFAULT

Sets the default protection of a file.

CATEGORY

mnemonic for
name of
category. Can be
JOB,
CONFIGURATION,
DDB, CORE, or
FEATURES

DUMP or D

Selects the category of
the DAEMON dump file to be
used. Addressing
begins
with 0 at the beginning of
each
category.
The
default category is CORE.
If the input file is not a
DAEMON file,
this switch
has no effect. Note that
the DUMP program does not
display
the
category
header nor does it allow
you to read past the end
of one category into the
next category.
Closes the output file.
After
this
command is
given, another OUT command
must be given before the
next command which does
any
output, or else a
fatal error message will
result.

dump restrictor,
dump descriptor ....

Dumps the specified bytes
in the current modes.

EJECT

Starts a new page
output file.

the

EXIT

Closes
all
files
returns
control to
monitor
(CTRL/Z has
same effect).

and
the
the

HELP or H

Types the help text on
your terminal.
To list
all
the
the names of
type
switches,
you
HELP:SWITCHES.

INPUT or I

file descriptor

2-66

Specifies the input file.
The
defaults
are:
DSK:nnnDAE.TMP where nnn
is the job number; your
directory.
If the file
name
is
specified,
it
determines the extension
from the set .TMP, .DAE,
. SHR,
• SAV ,
. HGH ,
. LOW,
.XPN, and .DMP in that
order.
If an extension is
specified
with no file
name,
the
extension
determines the file name.

DUMP Program (Cont.)
Command

Argument

Meaning

lRADIX

decimal number

Specifies
radix
for
numbers for
input. This
command uses decimal to
compute the argument. The
default is 10 for decimal.
The
argument
must
be
numeric.
If the argument
is 0 and is missing, the
input radix is set back to
its default value.

JUSTIFY

LEFT, CENTER,
or CENTER

Specifies
the
justification of the output in
the output field.
If the
output
overflows
the
output field,
the entire
output appears;
it is not
truncated. This switch is
used
in
a
one-to-one
relationship with the MODE
and WIDTH commands.
If
there
are
more
MODE
commands, an argument of
LEFT is used.
If there
are more JUSTIFY commands,
they are ignored.

LEFT~IARGIN

expression

Sets the left margin of
The
the
output
file.
default is o.

LINEPAGE

expression

Specifies the number of
lines
per output page.
This counts
all
lines
including blank lines and
titles.
The default is
50.

MODES or M

ALL, ASCII, DECIMAL,
NULL, NUMERIC,
OCTAL, RADIX50,
SIXBIT, SOCTAL, or

Selects
the
type
of
output.
All dumps in all
modes.
ASCII dumps the
word as a single right
justified
character
if
bits 0-28 are zero or as 5
left
justified
ASCII
characters if bits 0-28
are nonzero. Non-printing
characters print
as
a
space. DECIMAL dumps as a
signed
decimal
number.
NULL declares that nothing
is to be dumped.
NUMERIC
dumps as a signed number
in the
current
output
radix.
OCTAL dumps as
half-words separated by a
comma
(default) and takes
13
positions.
RADIX50
dumps in RADIX 50. SIXBIT
dumps
as
one
right
justified SIXBIT character
if bits 0-29 are zero, or

2-67

DUMP Program (Cont.)
Command

Argument

Meaning
6 SIXBIT characters
if
bits
0-29 are nonzero.
SOCTAL dumps as
signed
octal
and
suppresses
leading zeroes.
SYMBOLIC
dumps
as
a
symbolic
instruction.
Any mode specification can
appear more than once in
the command string.
The
output
is in the same
order as the MODE list.

NUMPAGE

expression

Specifies that pages are
to
be
numbered.
If
expression is
0,
page
numbering is turned off.
If expression is not 0,
page numbering begins at
page =
[expression].
If
command
is
omitted,
numbering starts at the
first page.

OPTION

: name

Reads your option
file
(DSK:SWITCH.INI[.]
/PHYSICAL)
to
determine
your
specified
switch
defaults for this program.
The option name appearing
as the value of the switch
is the pointer to the line
to read in the file.
For
example,
if
the
file
contains the line
DUMP:OCT/lRADIX:8/0RADIX:8
then you reference this
line by typing to DUMP
/OPTION:OCT
If SWITCH.INI has
of the form

line

DUMP/switch/switch
then
the
specified
switches
override
the
normal DUMP defaults.
For
example,
if you do not
want the address dumped,
you can place the line
DUMP/ADDRESS:OFF

2-68

DUMP Program (Cont.)
Command

Argument

Meaning
in the file.
If you want
the addresses dumped for a
particular dump, you must
by
override
the
file
giving the command
/ADDRESS:ON
to DUMP.

ORADIX

decimal number

Specifies
radix
for
numbers for output. The
default is 10 for decimal.
If
number
is
0,
the
standard is used.
The
argument to this command
is decimal and must not be
an expression.

OUTPUT or 0

file descriptor

Specifies the output file.
The defaults are: LPT:,
the file name of the input
file;
the extension .LSD;
the user's directory.
If
a file name is given, the
device DSK:
is assumed.

RIGHTMARGIN

expression

Sets the right margin of
the output file. A field
may overflow the
right
margin if it will not fit
between the left and right
margins.
If ADDRESS is
ON, the new line will have
an address typed.
If a
page overflow occurs,
a
title line may also be
printed.

RUN

program

Runs
the
specified
program.
This command is
equivalent
to
the
R
monitor command.

SUPERSEDE

SYFI:LE

Specifies that the output
is
to
supersede
an
existing file of the same
name,
if there is one.
The complement of
this
command is APPEND, which
is the default.
file descriptor

2-69

Specifies the file to take
symbols
from if XTRACT
command
is
specified.
DSK: , the
Defaults are:
file name of the input
file;
one of the saved
file
extensions;
your
directory area.

DUMP Program (Cont.)
Command

Argument

Meaning

TDUMP or T

dump descriptor,
dump descriptor, ...

Dumps specified bytes to
both output file and TTY.

TITLE

string of characters

Specifies a title to be
included in the subsequent
page headings.
If
no
argument
is
specified,
titling is turned off.
After this command,
an
EJECT command should be
given to skip to a new
page.

WIDTH

DAE, DAT, HGH,
LOW, SAV, SHR,
XPN, EXE

Specifies the format of
the input or symbol file.
DAE specifies the file is
generated by DAEMON. DAT
specifies file is a data
file
(i.e., no special
format;
therefore,
no
special
processing
is
done). HGH specifies file
in .HGH format;
LOW in
.LOW format; SAV in .SAV
format;
SHR
in
.SHR
format;
XPN
in
.XPN
format;
EXE
in
.EXE
format.

expression

Selects the width of each
output mode (see the MODE
and JUSTIFY commands).
If
a
MODE
command
is
specified
without
a
corresponding WIDTH,
the
byte is dumped in exactly
the number of positions
required followed by
3
blanks.
If
a
WIDTH
command is specified,
no
free blanks are output.
If a MODE specification
overflows
its
WIDTH
specification, the entire
output is given without
justification.
If
expression
is
omitted,
justification is
turned
off.

XTRACT

Uses the file specified in
the last SYFILE command as
a core image and extracts
the symbol table.

1. If TYPE is not specified, the extension of the input file is used
to determine the type of file being produced.
If the extension is not
one recognized in the TYPE command, TYPE DAE is assumed.
2-70

DUMP Program (Cont.)
An expression is an octal/decimal number,
an arithmetic operation.
(+,
,
*, /, I , or ,.. grouped within parentheses), contents operator.
([, \, and @), or a symbol.

$
%

(the last byte typed out).
(the address of the last word dumped), and
(the last expression evaluated).

A dump descriptor is any of the following:
1.

A text string enclosed in single quotes which contains
alphanumeric characters and special patterns. The following
patterns represent nongraphic characters and are replaced in
the output by the action represented.
<EL>
<VT>
<FF>
<AL>
<HT>
"'<letter>
\<letter>

end line, CR/LF
vertical tab
form feed
altmode
horizontal tab
control character
lower case character

To override special patterns, a double quote indicates that
the next character is to be represented as is, without
including it as part of a special pattern.
2.

A byte descriptor describing the byte in the input file to be
dumped. The format is:
word <pos.size>
where:
word

= the address of the word desired.

pos = the position of the byte
specifies the bit number of
byte.

within the word.
It
the leftmost bit in the

size
the number of bits in the byte.
It may
size and can cross word or block boundaries.
3.

any

A byte descriptor limit specifying everything from the first
byte descriptor to the second. The format is as follows:
<FROM byte descriptor> & <TO byte descriptor>

A file descriptor consists of a device name, a file name with
extension, and a directory name.
Characteristics
The R DUMP command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Is used with disk monitors only.
Runs the DUMP program, thereby destroying your core image.

2-71

DUMP Program (Cont.)
Example
• DCORE-.J
+F~ DUMP....)

IXTr-\:ACT .-J

o symbols eXTRACTed
IMODE SYM,OCT,DEC-.J
IWIDTH :~O, :l5, 15:7
IJUSTIFY L,li,Fhl=i:,R..)
lOUT TTY:,...)
IR r GHTMAI:~G r N '70,.J
IIF~ADIX

8.-1

IDUMP [140&144:1--l

1401
1.411
:1,421
14~51

ADDI
CAMGE
.JRST
PUSH

1.441

MOVEI

Z
IEXIT

1,,2
1,3'70
401640
:1.7,6
6,13

271040,000002
3:L5040,000370
254000,40:L640
26:1. 740,000006
201 :3()0 , 000013
OOOOOO,OO()()OO

EXIT

2-72

24838668290
2'752302:'5096
2:3()85581216
238B2:~66982

17364418571

E (examine) Command

Function
The E command examines a core location in your area (high or
segment).

low

Whem running under a virtual memory system, DAEMON will be called
on execution of the E command, if the page in question is paged
out..
Command Format
E a.ddr
addr is required the first time the E or D command is used.
If addr is specified, the contents of the location are typed
out in half-word octal mode.
If addr is not specified,
the contents of the location
following the previously specified E addr or the location of
the previous D addr (whichever was last) are typed out.
Characteristics
The E command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.
Example
• E 140..}
0001401 OOOO()O ()()OOO()
0001411 312000 400033
0001421 000000 000000

2-73

EDIT Command 1

Function
The EDIT command opens an already existing line sequence-numbered
file on disk for editing with LINED (Line Editor for disk).
Refer to the LINED writeup in the
DECsystem-lO
Software
Notebooks.
Command Format
EDIT file.ext
file.ext = a file name and file name extension of an
existing file.
This argument is optional if a CREATE or
EDIT command has been given since the initialization of the
job, because the arguments of the EDIT-class commands are
remembered in temporary files on the disk or in core if the
monitor has the TMPCOR feature.
Characteristics
The EDIT command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the LINED program, thereby destroying your core image.
Example
.EDIT [lCORE~

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
before running LINED.
2-74

command

EOFCommand 1

Function
The EOF command writes an end-of-file mark on the specified
magnetic tape.
This command is equivalent to the following PIP
command string:
MTAn:

(MF)

Command l~ormat
EOF MTAn:
More than one magnetic tape can be specified in the command
string by separating the tape specifications with commas.
Characte:( istics
The EOF command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying your core image.
EJcamples
• [OF MTAOO:3 :..J
?DEVICE MTA003 NOT AVAILABLE

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
before running the PIP program.
2-75

command

EXECUTE Command 1

Function
The EXECUTE command translates the source files you specify if
necessary
(function of COMPILE command),
loads the REL files
generated into a core image
(function of LOAD command), and
begins execution of the program.
The system determines the
proper language translator to use from the source file extensions
or from switches you specify in the command string.
(Refer to
the COMPILE command.) If a REL file already exists with a newer
date than that of the source file, the system does not compile
the file unless you request this explicitly via a switch.
This command is equal to a LOAD and START sequence of commands.
Each time you issue a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command,
the system remembers the command with its arguments in a
temporary file on disk, on in core if the monitor has the TMPCOR
feature. Therefore, when you issue one of these commands without
specifying any arguments, the system uses the arguments that it
saved in the temporary file (refer to Section 1.5).
The EXECUTE command accepts several command constructions:
the @
construction
(indirect commands),
the + construction,
the =
construction, and the < > construction. Refer to Section 1.5 for
a complete description of each of these constructions.
Command Format
EXECUTE list
list is a single file specification or a string of file
specifications separated by commas. A file specification
consists of a device name, a file name with or without an
extension,
and
a directory name.
(Refer to Section
1.4.2.4.)
You can use the following switches to modify the command
string.
These switches can be temporary or permanent
(Refer to Section 1.5.5.)
switches unless otherwise stated.
Switch

Meaning

/ALGOL

Compile the file with ALGOL.
Assumed
files with the extension of .ALG.

for

/BIN

Generate a binary file
for
each
file
compiled.
The file name for the binary file
follows
the
standard
conventions
for
determining the name of the output file.
(Refer to
Sections
1.5.2
and
1.5.3.)
extension is .REL.
This is the default
action.

/BLISS

Compile the file with BLISIO.
Assumed for
files with the extension of .BlO or .BLI.

/COBOL

Compile the file with COBOL.
Assumed
files with the extension of .CBL.

for

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command
before running the appropriate language translator for the LOADER.
2-76

EXECUTE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Meaning

/COMPILE

Force a compilation on this file even if a
binary file exists with a newer date and time
than the source file.
You can use this
switch to obtain an extra compilation (e.g.,
in order to obtain a
listing
of
the
compilation) because, normally,
the system
does not perform compilation if the binary
file is· newer than the source file.

/CREF

Produce a cross-reference listing file on the
disk
for
each file compiled for later
processing by the CREF program.
The file
name
for
the listing file follows the
standard conventions for determining the name
of the output file.
(Refer to Sections 1.5.2
and 1.5.3.) The extension is .CRF.
You can
then list the files using the CREF command.
However, with COBOL files, the system appends
the cross-referenced listing to the listing
file.
You need not issue another command to
obtain the listing.

/FOROTS

Load the file with FOROTS,
object-time system.

the

new

FORTRAN

/FORSE

Load the file with FORSE,
object-time system.

the

old

FORTRAN

/FORTRAN

Compile the file with a FORTRAN compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension of .F4
and .FOR and all files with nonrecognizable
translator
extensions if FORTRAN is the
standard translator.
You need to specify
this switch if the file has a nonrecognizable
translator extension and FORTRAN is not the
standard translator or is not the current
default
(e.g.,
EXE/ALGOL
FILl,
-FIL2,
FIL3/FORTRAN) .

/FUDGE

Create a disk file containing the names of
the
.REL files produced by the command
string. When you issue the FUDGE command,
PIP reads this file in order to generate a
library .RELfile.
(Refer to the
FUDGE2
program
description.)
Arguments to this
switch are:
/FUDGE:dev:file.ext[proj,prog]
dev:
is the device on which to write
the file.
If you omit the device, the
system assumes DSK.
file.ext is the name of the library
file.
The file name is required.
If
you omit the extension,
the
system
assumes .REL.
[proj,prog] is the directory in which to
place
the file.
Your directory is
assumed if you do
not
specify
a
directory.
2-77

EXECUTE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Meaning
This switch is permanent in the sense that it
pertains to all REL files generated by the
command string.

/FIO

Use the FORTRAN-IO compiler when compiling
the associated FORTRAN file.
This should be
used as a permanent switch because it is not
possible to load F4D and FORTRAN-IO binary
files together~

/F40

Use the F40 compiler when compiling the
associated FORTRAN file.
This should be used
as a permanent switch because it is not
possible to load F40 and FORTRAN-IO binary
files together.

/KAIO
/KIIO

Designate the machine on which the program
will execute once it has been loaded.
These
switches are needed for FORTRAN-IO programs
because the compiler generates different code
for
the KAIO and KIlO processors.
The
default is the processor on the computer
executing the command.

/LIBRARY

Load the files in library search mode.
This
mode causes a program file in a special
library file to be loaded only if one or more
of its declared entry symbols satisfies an
undefined global request in the source file.
The system libraries are always searched.
(Refer
to
the
LOADER
and
LINK-IO
documentation.)

/LINK

Cause the file to be loaded by the LINK-IO
linking loader.
If you use this switch, you
should
place
it
before
any
file
specifications because the COMPIL program may
have to generate load-control switches. This
is the current default action.

/LIST

Generate a disk listing file for each file
compiled. The file name for the listing file
follows
the
standard
conventions
for
determining the name of the output file.
(Refer to Sections 1.5.2 and 1.5.3.) The
extension is .LST. You can later list these
files using the LIST command.
If the line
printer is being spooled for your job, the
system writes the listing files o~ device LPT
and automatically spools them at LOGOUT time.
Unless you specify this switch,
the system
does not generate the listing files.

/LMAP

Produce a loader map during the loading
process
(same action as /MAP) containing the
local symbols.

/LOADER

Cause the file to be loaded by the LOADER.

/MACRO

Assemble the file with MACRO.
files with extensions of .MAC.

2-78

Assumed

for

EXECUTE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Meaning

/MACYll 1

Assemble the file with MACYll.
files with extensions of .Pll.

/MANTIS 2

Compile the file with the MANTIS debugging
information.
This switch affects F40 files
only.

/MAP

Produce loader maps during
the
loading
process.
When this switch is encountered, a
loader map is requested from the loader.
After
the library search of the system
libraries, the map is written in your disk
area with either the file name specified by
you (e.g., /MAP:file)
or the default file
name MAP.MAP if loading is performed by
LOADER or the default name nnnLNK.MAP if it
is performed by LINK-IO. This switch is an
exception to the permanent switch rule in
that it causes only one map to be produced
even though it appears as a permanent switch.

/NEW

Run the appropriate language translator from
the experimental system library (device NEW:)
area [1,5].
If the translator does not exist
on device NEW:, try to obtain it from device
SYS:.
(Refer to the following NOTE.)

/NOBIN

Do not generate binary files.
Unless you
issue
this switch,
the system does not
generate binary files.
This switch, when
combined with the /CREF or /LIST switch, is
useful when compiling programs solely for the
purpose of generating listings.

/NOCOMPILE

Complement the /COMPILE switch by not forcing
a compilation on a source file whose date is
not as recent as the date on the binary file.
Note that this switch is not the same as the
/REL switch, which turns off all compilation,
even if the source file is newer than the REL
file.
/NOCOMPILE is the default action.

/NOLIST

Do not generate listing files.
default action.

/NOMANTIS 2

Compile the file without the MANTIS debugging
information.
This
switch
affects
F40
programs only.

/NOSEARCH

Assumed

This

for

the

1
MACYll,
the PDP-II assembler for the DECsystem-lO, will
be
recognized as a translator only if the appropriate assembly switch is
set. However, this assembly switch setting is not supported.
2

MANTIS will be recognized as a debugging program only if the
appropriate assembly switch is set. However, this switch setting is
not supported.
2-79

EXECUTE Command (Cont.)
Meaning

Switch

LOADER switch,
that does
1 ibr ar ies;
the /NOSEARCH
system libraries.

not search any
switch scans the

/OLD

Run the appropriate language translator from
the system library of old programs (device
OLD:) which resides on the disk area
[1,3].
If the translator does not exist on device
OLD:, try to obtain it from device SYS:.
(Refer to the following NOTE.)

/REL

Use the existing REL files
source files may be present.

/SEARCH

The action is identical
/LIBRARY switch.

/SELF

Run the appropriate language translator from
device DSK:
instead of from the system
library (device SYS:). This switch is useful
for an individual who keeps a private copy of
a translator in his own disk area.
System
programmers occasionally keep experimental
versions of standard translators in their
disk areas to test new features.
(Refer to
the NOTE below.)

/SNOBOL 1

Compile the file with SNOBOL.
Assumed
files with an extension of .SNO.

/SYS

Run the appropriate language translator from
the system library (device SYS:) area [1,4].
This is the default action.

although
to

that

newer
of

the

for

NOTE
A processor appearing more than once
within a single command string cannot
specify more than one disk area.
For
example, the following is illegal:
.EXECUTE PARTA.F40/NEW,PARTB.F40/0LD
However, the following is valid:
.COMPILE PARTA.F40/NEW
.COMPILE PARTB.F40/0LD
.EXECUTE/REL PARTA, PARTB

SNOBOL will be recognized as a language translator only if the
appropriate assembly switch is set. However, this assembly switch
setting is not supported.
2-80

EXECUTE Command (Cont.)
Characteristics
The EXECUTE command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Runs the appropriate language translator and linking-loader,
thereby destroying your original core image.
Starts the execution of the compiled and loaded program.
Examples
~ EXECUTE
FOF~TAN

TESTEI:~..)

TESTEI:~

LOADING
L I NI< 21< COI:~E
EXECUTION

2-81

FAILSA Program

Function
The FAILSA program is used by operators and users alike to save
disk files on magnetic tape and to later place all or some of
these saved files back onto the disk. Although this program is
normally used by the system operator, you, as the console user,
can execute a subset of the FAILSA operations for your disk area.
You can save your disk area on your own magnetic tape and later
restore all your files or a subset of your files back to your
area. Or you may need to restore from the system FAILSA tape one
of your files that you unintentionally deleted from your area.
You can also use the program for moving your files from one
system to another.
(Complete documentation on the FAILSA program
is contained in the FAILSA specification in the DECsystem-10
Software Notebooks.)
NOTE
Crucial to FAILSA's operation is the
fact that the magnetic tape used must be
assigned the logical name FAILSA.
Command Format
.R FAILSA
*/switch
FAILSA switches with their explanations are as
carriage return is used to terminate all switches.
Switch

follows.

Explanation

Advances the magnetic tape one physical file.

Backspaces the magnetic tape one physical file.

Causes FAILSA to continue.
1.

On disk-to-tape transfers, if the end of tape
is reached before all disk files have been
saved, FAILSA requests that you mount a new
tape and type /C after the tape has been
mounted to direct FAILSA to continue.

On tape-to-disk transfers,
after FAILSA has
typed out the number of the mounted tape and
its creation time and date, you type /C if
this information is correct and you wish all
files on the tape to be restored on disk.
This feature aids in preventing accidental
restoration of files from the wrong tape.

Transfers control of DDT if it is loaded.

Sets creation date and time word so old files can
be eliminated by not being transferred in either
direction. The format is as follows:
*/Emm/dd/yy,tttt<carriage return>

2-82

FAILSA Program (Cont.)
Switch

Explanation
where mm is the numerical month, dd is the day of
the month, yy is the last two digits of the year,
and tttt is the time expressed in 24-hour time.
If this switch is not specified, Jan.
1, 1964,
0000 hours is used.

Sets access date word. This switch is used to
transfer,
in either direction, only recently
accessed files or to save on tape and then delete
from disk not recently accessed files (/K before
/S or JUl. The format is as follows:
*/Fmm/dd/yy/<carriage return>
where mm is the numerical month, dd is the day of
the month,
and yy is the last two digits of the
year.
If this switch is not specified, Jan.
1,
1964 is used.

Enables you to save and restore files from a
user's area other than your own.
This switch sets
the source project, programmer number to the
specified number. The format is as follows:
*/Gmmm,nnn<carriage return>
This changes the single, user project, programmer
number switch from that of the FAILSA user to
mmm,nnn. The new value is retained until the next
/G switch.
If you do not issue this switch, your
project, programmer number is used.

Prints a summary of FAILSA operating procedures on
your terminal.

Sets the magnetic tape density to the installation
standard.

Looks for the next trailer record (which marks the
end of a save set) and points to the beginning of
the next save set on the tape or to the logical
end of tape,
if there is no save set.
In the
first case, the tape is positioned in such a way
that a tape read command will execute prope~ly or
a tape write command will overwrite the existing
save set.
If there is no save set on the tape,
the tape is positioned between the two end of file
marks designating the logcal end of tape, so that
a succeeding tape write (/S or /U)
will execute
properly.
Use the /A switch to position the tape
after MAGRIM and/or SAVE and SSAVE header files.

Deletes not-recently accessed files from disk and
copies them to a magnetic tape.
(This is known as
the skim operation because, in one pass, the disk
is being skimmed of certain files and at the same
time these files are placed on the tape.)
Used in
conjunction with /S or /U.
Note that certain
project, programmer numbers may be exempted from
this process.

2-83

FAILSA Program (Cont.)
Switch

Explanation

Types on your terminal a directory of all your
files on the tape.
FAILSA checks your project,
programmer number and uses it to find the correct
area of the tape.
Only the file names and
extensions are typed.
This switch is similar to
the /F switch in PIP.

Initiates multiple saves. Saves are taken every
SLPMIN
minutes, where SLPMIN is an assembly
parameter initially set to 60 (decimal) minutes.

Inhibits checking of creation dates of tape and
disk files of same name when restoring from tape.
Therefore, FAILSA restores a file from tape over
the file of the same name on the disk without
regard to creation date. This switch remains in
effect until the line of input is terminated by a
carriage return/line feed.

Enables you to save and restore files to another
user's area.
This switch sets the destination
project,
programmer number to
the
specified
number. The format is as follows:

*/0 xxx,yyy <carriage return>
This changes the single-user project-programmer
number switch from that of the FAILSA user to
xxx,yyy. The new value is retained until the next
/0 switch. If you do not issue this switch, your
project, programmer number is used.
/P

Prints a directory of all files on the tape on
logical device LST.
The directory is listed by
project-programmer number and includes the number
of blocks allocated per file, a running total for
each
area,
and
creation
time/access
date
information.
If
the logical device LST is
assigned to the disk or a DECtape, the file name
FAILSA.DIR is given to the directory file.

Disables the detailed progress reports given by
FAILSA on a single-user restore.
Complement of
/T. This is assumed unless changed by a /T
switch.

Restores all files from the tape to the disk.
This switch does not accept an argument because it
transfers the entire tape. You must be logged in
under [1,2] to use this feature.

Saves disk files on the magnetic tape.
Up to 16
arguments can follow this switch, separated by
spaces and/or tabs.
These arguments are names of
file structures or disk devices from which files
are to be taken.
If you specify no arguments, the
system saves the entire disk:
in this case, you
must be logged in under [1,2].

2-84

FAILSA Program (Cont.)
Switch

Explanation
Tells you, on a single-user restore, the user area
that has been found on the tape, the file that has
been selected for transfer to the disk, when the
transfer is begun, and when the transfer
is
completed. An example of this progress report is
shown below:
LOCATED ON TAKE DSKC 27,235
FOUND ON TAPE DSKC:FILNAME.EXT

< >
There may be a possible pause between the time the
angle brackets are typed at the beginning and the
end of transfer. The /T switch takes effect on
the file for which it appears and ends when a /Q
switch is given.
/U

Saves, on the magnetic tape, the disk files in the
UFD of the user last named in a /G switch, or if
no /G switch has been given, of whomever
is
currently
logged
in.
Up to 16 arguments,
separated by spaces and/or tabs, can follow this
switch.
These
arguments are names of file
structures or disk devices from which the files
are to be taken,
and, when used,
only those
structures mentioned that have files for the
specified user are saved.
If no arguments are
given, all your files on all the structures are
saved.
You are informed if no files are saved
from a specified structure.

Generates a request to lock your job in core or
resets the request. Note that locking may not be
accomplished even though the request is given.
FAILSA acknowledges if the lock is successful and
does not acknowledge if the lock is unsuccessful.
This switch is a toggle switch in the sense that
its executions alternately set and
reset
a
request.
The operator can consult SYSTAT or
SYSDPY to determine the state of the switch.

Rewinds the magnetic tape with
FAILSA to load point.

Extracts the project-programmer numbers from the
tape and reproduces output similar to the original
TTY output generated by FAILSA during a save. The
output
contains
the
names
and
the
project-programmer numbers on the tape.
It is
placed on logical device LST,
and if LST is
assigned to the disk or DECtape,
the file name
FAILSA.DIR is given to the output.

Debugs new features.

Sets the magnetic tape density to 200 bits/inch.

Sets the magnetic tape density to 556 bits/inch.

Sets the magnetic tape density to 800 bits/inch.
2-85

the

logical

name

FAILSA Program (Cont.)
You can be selective as to the files you save or restore.
Files
are specified either explicitly by g1v1ng the file name and
extension or implicitly by giving the wildcard construction.
Characteristics
The R FAILSA command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Runs the FAILSA program, destroying your core image.
Examples
Saving your disk area
+ MOUNT MTA: IF~EEI...ID: FAILSAFE ~
RE(1UEST QUEUED
NO OPER. JOB FOR REQUESTS
WAITING++~2 ~C/S TO EXIT
OPERATOR NOTIFIED
WAITING.+.
FAILSAFE (MTAOOO:) MOUNTED

• F~ FAIL.SAFE..-J
REWINDS ARE NOT AUTOMATIC.
FAILSAFE VERSION 10100,47~ FOR HELP~ READ SYS:FAIL.SA.HL.Pv OR TYPE IH
*/W~

*/U~

:LO:47:!50
TAPE t 01 @ 9 CH 800 BPI
NO FILES SAVED FOR 20,1547
DSKC
20 ~ :I. ~.:;4 '7
NO FILES SAVED FOR 20v1547

,JUNE: 77
DSKA
DSKB

SSAVE COMPLETED WITH TAPE I 01
:LO:47:!Y7

2-86

22 ,JUNE 77

FILCOM Program

Function
The FILCOM program is used to compare two versions of a file and
to output any differences. Generally, this comparison is line by
line for ASCII files or word by word for binary files.
FILCOM
detE~rmines
the type of comparison to use by examining either the
switches specified in the command string or the extensions of the
files.
Switches always take precedence over file extensions.
Command ~Porma t
. R E'ILCOM
*output dev:file.ext [directory] = input dev(l) :file.ext [directory]
input dev(2):file.ext [directory]
output dev:

the device on which the differences are to be
output.

input dev:

the device on which an input file resides.

Defaults
1.

If the entire output specification is omitted,
the output
device is assumed to be TTY. However, the equal sign must be
given to separate the input and output specifications of the
command string.

If an output file
device is DSK.

If the output file name is omitted,
the second input file
name is used, unless it is nUll.
In this case, the file name
FILCOM is used.

If the output extension is omitted, .SCM is used on a
compare and .BCM is used on a binary compare.

If the [directory] is omitted (input or
default directory is assumed.

If an input device is omitted, it is assumed to be DSK.

If the file name and/or extension of the second input file is
omitted, it is taken from the first input file.

A dot following the file name of the second input is
necessary to explicitly indicate a null extension, if the
extension of the first input file is not null.
For example,
to compare FILE.MAC and FILE.
(i.e., with null extension),
use the following command string:

name

specified,

the

default

output

side),

output

source
your

.R FILCOM
*=FILE.MAC,FILE.
9.

The second input file specification cannot be null unless a
binary compare is being performed.
In a binary compare, if
the first input file is not followed by a comma and a second
input file descriptor, the input file is compared to a zero
file and is output in its entirety. This gives you a method
of listing a binary file.
(Refer to Example 4.)

2-87

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
The following switches can appear in the command
string,
depending on whether a source compare or a binary source compare
is being performed.
Switches

Binary Compare

Type list of switches available
device HLP:).

/nL

Specify the lower limit for a partial binary
compare (n is an octal number). This switch, when
used with the /nU switch, allows a binary file to
be compared only within the specified limits.

When the files are different, print the message
?FILES
ARE
DIFFERENT, but do not list the
differences. This switch is useful when batch
control files want to test for differences but do
not want the log
file
filled
with
these
differences.

/nU

Specify the upper limit for a partial binary
compare (n is an octal number). This switch, when
used with the /nL switch, allows a binary file to
be compared only within the specified limits.

Compare files in binary mode without expanding the
files first.
(Refer to Appendix D.) This switch
is used to compare two binary files with ASCII
extensions.

Expand SAV files before comparing them in binary
mode.
This action removes differences resulting
from zero compression.
(Refer to Appendix D.)

Switches

(help

text

from

Source Compare

Compare files in ASCII mode. This switch is used
to force a source compare on two ASCII files.

Compare blank lines.
lines are ignored.

Ignore comments (all text on a line following a
semicolon) and spacing
(spaces and tabs). This
switch does not cause a line consisting entirely
of a comment to become a blank line, which is
normally ignored.

Type list of switches available
device HLP:).

/nL

Specify the number of lines that determine a match
(n is an octal number).
A match means that n
successive lines in each input file have been
found identical.
When a match is found, all
differences occurring before the match and after
the previous match are output.
In addition, the
first line of the current match is output after
the differences to aid in locating the place
within each file at
which
the
differences
occurred. The default value for n is 3.

2-88

Without this

switch,

(help

text

blank

from

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
Source Compare

Switches

Print the message ?FILES ARE DIFFERENT,
files
are
different,
but do not
differences.

Ignore spaces and tabs.

Compare in update ~ode.
This means that the
output file consists of the second input file with
vertical bars
(or backslashes for 64-character
printers)
next to the lines that differ from the
first input file.
This feature is useful when
updating a document because the changes made to
the latest edition are flagged with change bars in
the left margin.
The latest edition of the
document is the second input file.

when
list

the
the

If switches are not specified in the command string,
the files
are compared in the mode implied by the extension. The following
extensions are recognized as binary and cause a binary compare if
one or both of the input files have one of the extensions •
.BAC
.BIN
.BUG
.CAL
.CHN
.DAE
.DCR
.DMP
.EXE

• HGH
• LOW
.MSB
.OVR
.QUE
.QUF
.REL
.RIM

.RMT
.RTB
.SAV
.SFD
.SHR
.SVE
.SYS
.UFD
.XPN

Binary files are compared word by word,
except for the following three cases:

starting

word

Files with extensions .SHR and .HGH are assumed to be
high-segment files.
Because the word count starts at 400000,
upper and lower limits, if used, must be greater than
(or
equal to in the case of the lower limit) 400000.

Files with extensions .SAV, .LOW, and .SVE are assumed to be
compressed
core
image
files and are expanded before
comparing.

Files with the extension .EXE
program format.

are

assumed

.EXE

Conflicts are resolved by switches or defaults.
If a conflict
arises in the absence of switches, the files are assumed to be
ordinary binary files.
Output
In most cases, headers consisting of the device,
file name,
extension, and creation date of each input file are listed before
the differences are output. However, headers do not appear on
output from the /U switch (update mode on source compare).

2-89

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
Source compare output
After the headers are listed,
following notation appears in the left column of the output

the

n)m
where:
n is the number of the input file, and
m is the page number of the input file (see examples)
The right column lists the differences occurring between matches
in the input files.
Following the list of differences, a line
identical to each file is output for reference purposes.
The output from the IU switch differs from the above-described
output in that the output file created is the second input file
with vertical bars in the left column next to the lines that are
different from the first input file.
Binary compare output - When a difference is encountered between
the two input files, a line in the following format appears on
the output device:
octal loco
words

first file-word second

file-word

XOR

both

If the exclusive OR (XOR) of the two words differs only in the
right half,
the third word output is the absolute value of the
difference of the two right halves. This usually indicates an
address that changed.
If one input file is shorter than the other, after the end of
file is encountered on the shorter file, the remainder of the
longer file is output.
Characteristics
The R FILCOM command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Runs the FILCOM program, thereby destroying your core image.
Examples
1.

You have the following two ASCII files on disk:

• TYPE FII...EA.F~NO.J

A
H
("

,0,

I.. J
0

H
I
J
1\
I...
i1
t-I
[)

Fe!
r~

2-90

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
T
U

V
W
Z
Y
Z

.TYPE FI/"'EB~F~NO.J
A
B
f'

G
H
I

,J
:1,

,',
rh·;.

"X
.....

o
..'''

I",
",

U
'v'
4
I",

X
Y
l

To compare the two files and output the
terminal, the following sequence is used:
+F~

FII...COM.,/

differences

your

Run the FILCOM program.

*~::FILEA+RNO~FIU:::B~r\NO...J

Compare the two files on disk and
output
the differences on your
terminal.
By
default,
three
consecutive
identical
lines
determine a match.
File 1) DSKC:FII...EAoRNO[27v4072] created! 0825 15-AUG-1977
File 2) DSKC:FI/"'EB+RNO[27~4072] created! 0826 15-AUG-1977
1)1
1)
1)

D
E
F

:I.)

****
2):l.

**************
:I. ) 1

1)
1)
1)

/...
M
N

****

2-91

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
2)1
2)
2)

2
3

:I.

**************
1)1
W
:I.)

1)
1)

Y
Z

****
2):1.

:n
:n

2)
2)

X
Y

~:5

**************
%file5 are different

To compare the two files and output the differences on the line
printer,
the following commands are used. Note that in this
example the number of successive lines that determines a match
has been set to four with the /4L switch.
*/41... ::::

FII...EA.r~NO~FILEB+F~NO-.J

File 1) DSKC:FILEA.RNO[27,4072] created: 0825 :l.5-AUG-:l.977
File 2) DSKC:FILEB.RNO[27~4072] created: 0826 15-AUG-1977
:1.)1
:I.)

1)
1)

F
G

****
2):1.
G
**************
1. ) 1
1\
:I.)

:1.)

****
2):1.

2
:3

;~)

**************
1
W
:1.)

1)
1)
1)

****

Z
Y
Z

2) 1
2)

2)
2)
2)

X
Y
Z

**************
%files are different

2-92

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
To compare the two files so that the second input file is output
with vertical bars in the left column next to the lines that
differ from the first input file,
use the following command
sequence.

*/LJ :::: F I I... EA ~ I~N(J y F I LEB ~ I;~NO.J
A
B
C
G
H
I
J
:L

X
Y

%file5 are different

2-93

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
2.

To compare two binary
differences on your
sequence.

files on
terminal,

the
use

disk and output the
the following command

*TTY: ~::DATE~)A + r~EL.. ~ GETDAT. r~EI",.-J

File 1) DSKC:DATESA.REL..C27,4072J
File 2) DSKC:GETDAT.REL..[27~4072]
000002
()0000~5

000011
000013
000014
000015
000016
00001'7
000020
00002:1.
OOO()22

0002 :1,:3
0002L'5
000000
00000:1.
410000
OOOOO:L
420000
000002
42~5:1.64

62:'526:'5
O()()O():I.

4~7j~5'7 6~3
4~j~;'765

00 :l50'7
100300
000000
10030'7
000000
1.002:1. '7
:326045
454300
100316
OO()()OO
10034:'5
664441
000000
:1. 00325
O()O()OO
400011,

00002~5

4~50000

0()()024

000002

0()()02~'5

4~5!:';'7~:j6

000026
OO()02'7
000030

644!:';OO
00000 :1,
4400()()
OOOO()3
444:L 64 4~5326:3
000000 001 !:'i3()
5~':;5:L 64 ~:5()~52~56
6~5~5~500 000000
OOOOO:L :L()()3'70
444:L'7:1. 000000
OOO()O:l, :1. OO:L 61
444:1. '7:1, 644:1,42
000002 40()()4:L
446:3~5f.) 3245'70
~:516400 000000
000002 :L 004:33
46625'7 ~:,)5:3264
71604~) 000000
000001 4000 1 ~5

()OOO~51

000032
00003~5

OO()036
00003'7
000040
O()0041
000042
000043
OOO()44
00004~j

000046
00004'7
00 () () ~5 ()
00005:L
0000~52

0:1,5212
015212
000000
000002
4:1.4:143
:'5241 ~56
0000()3
444164

00:31 '72
4000:1.5
456064
6:30000
400055
45:3246

6257~:'i~j

~526165

4:1.6264
000002
444:1. 71
4:'55744
00000:1.
4441'7:1.
000001

412~:i2f.)

41.2~.'i26

4~)6263

created: 1456 17-MAY-:l.97'7
created: :1.333 08-JUNE-:l.9'77
()1~500:l.

04724:3

o1 ~:5()O:l. 04724:3
OO()()0:3
004:34:1
324157
42000:1
444166
20063:J,
23500'7
00000:1
0'74:L '7t
4~5~:57 46

001463
5003:L 5
4!56064
'7:~0:307

4000~55

553051.
OOO:L20
002163
~)0():357

45~5644

40()041
:'524445
450()OO
1,00161
630000
:L OO~500
322100
:L00026
444:1. 7:1,
00:12:1. 3
:1.00226
~:j57:L 32
450000
400()45
32444:1.

'7:L3244

4~)43~:j7

;3~:.'i7;3~55

444~~iOO O()OOOO
OO()()02 400021
465:1.62 6364~52
45~i664 62710()
000002 100352
544541 60:'5246
~j441 '"'()

4~.'i~::;666

'7275~53

46f.)2~5~:;

4~:.'i:31. :'56
6()3246

4445~:;4

00000:1.
446~:j~5~,)

O()OO()()
000()02
446!::i~)5

444164
OOOO():3

%files are different

2-94

43~57~:;7

:'~2444~::i
~:i~:.'j()~~43

'764~.'i20

2004'7 :1, 6:3()O()()
00002!5
()()4~,)~:j4 :'522:1. 00
0()O()02 !:5000~57
O()24~~:L ():L '7:H 2
001.46:3
:=:j~,)!) 166 4():3()'70
2:L ~5()!:-;~.'; ~.'i~::;'7 1 ~52
444:1. 6~:i !550:3'70
444172 400()4~7j
4~5~,)64~)

224~i20

2:L ()2 :1, ~j
444!:-i02 40004 :1,
446~5~:=;4 '?24!:,j~) 1
1 '7:'5~.'i62 6:364~52

252~j04

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
3.

To compare two high-segment files, the command sequence below
is used. Note that the locations begin at 400000.

*TTY: ::.-:PAT + SHI:;: v XMH. sl··m..J
File 1) DSKC:PAT~SHR[27v4072]
File 2) DSKC:XMH.SHR[27,4072J
4()OOOO
4()OOO2
400003
400004
40000~)

400007
40()():l.O
4()()Ol :L
40001.2
%f i ], (~~~:~

035064 4t73:L6
0:'55063 O:'5~5777
O:L 7~):32 000000
000000 000000
b()41.64 OO()OOO
O()()OO() O()OOO()
()51t40 4012!56
2540()O 400027
274640 OOO()O2
aT'(o?

O() 1 7~54
O()O137
0031 cd.
00020:1.
7 0 ~):5 ::5 ()
O()0400
2::.)4040
047()OO
:3:34740

created: 0000 23-JAN-1976
created: 0836 28-AUG-1976

400010
OO:L '777
000000
000000
000000
()()OO()()
4()OO:t. :I.
OO()OO()
4 () () 0 Lr' ()

d :i. ff(~~ Y'(:~nt

2-95

()347:30 O:I.730b
0:3 :::j :1. ~::j 4 034000
0:1. 4 4~~j:'5 000000
O()0201. 000000
1<>1.434 000000
0OO40() OOO()O()
2()!5:I.OO OO:l247
21 :'5000 4()()027

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
4.

To list a binary file, use the following command sequence.

*"'C
~R

FILCOM..}

*TTY: ::::XMH + BI"IF~~
400000
4()()O() :L
400002
400003
400004
40000~)

400006
400007
4()()O10
400011
400012
4000:L3
4000:1,4
40()O:L ~5
400016
4000:L7
400020
40002:1,
4()0022
4()002;3
4()()O24
400025
400026
40002'7
40()O;'50
4 ()()O:'H
40()032
40003;'~
4()OO:~4

4000;'5:::;
4()00;'56
40003'7
4()()O4()
4()0041
400042

00 1 '7~54 4()OO10
2~7j42()0 O()()OOO
000 1 ~~'7 OO:L7'7'7
()0~~16:1. 000000
00020:L OOO()OO
705!550 000000
000000 000000
000400 000000
2~7j4040 4000:1,1
04'7000 000000
3~J4'740 4000:t. ;'5
776422 OOO:L40
200640 OO()O:l, '7
2()1600 O()OO()()
201,700 4():l ~:;;3~5
2():l.70() 4 () :1, ~,:j 3:3
260740 4()2:314
26~:)040

4027~56

00004:1. OO()04 :1,
5~557~5'7 !:5()!:5460
20:1.040 000001
20:l.10() ()2():~2 :I,
!5 () !:) :I. 0 0 42~5453
260740 40232:3
2020!:,)~j O()()()O2
20:l.04() O()O()O:l.
2() 1:1,00 020~52:1.
::,:jO:5:L 00 42::,)453
260'74() 402:32:'5
202()~,)~; OOO()O1
2004::.):::; OOO()()l
~)O~)440 44:1. 200
40201:::; O()O()()~:;
201040 O()()()O:l.
202 () ~:j ~.'j 00"'0

2-96

FILCOM Program (Cont.)
5.

To compare
(octal).

two

binary

files

between

locations

150-160

~ F~ F IL.COM.,.}

*TTY: 11 ~.:;()L./16()U::~nAT~::SA ~ REI.., GETDAT + REt.,.}

File 1)
File 2)
() () () 1 ~:.)()
O()():l.51
0()01 :52
000:1. !:j~5
O()O:L~.)6

OOOj,57
OOO:L60
%f:ilf.o~~5

nSKC:GETDAT~REL.[27,4072J

created: 1456 17-MAY-1977
created: 1333 08-JUNE-1977

4j,62()() 000000
OOOOOj, 40()O4~5
6~·5t.)!544 4:1.644::5
000000 0016:34
000002 4000!:S 1
6:36!::;44 4:1.644~S
324570 ~:;:I. 6400

O()()()O()
277:::;6:3
04:'5226 125664
OO:L 46:3
2'7'7524
04:3226 :L2!:5604
642670 !:.:; :1. 64 () 0

DSKC:DATESA~REt[27Y4()72J

620()OO
OOOOOj,
675762
O()OOOO
000002
67!:j762

000000
1 0026:~
::53322:1.
0033:1.7
:1.0032!5
:::;3:324:1.

!:566~500

O()O()OO

a Y'(·:~ ('.f:i. fi"(~~ rE'nt

2-97

2:~620()

FILE Command

Function
The FILE command provides remote control of DECtape-to-disk
disk-to-DECtape transfers on operator-handled DECtapes.

and

Command Formats
1.

FILE C
Checks the queue of FILE requests to determine if any of your
requests
are still pending.
No argument is required.
Pending requests for your job will be listed.

FILE 0, id, file.ext, file.ext,

.•.

Deletes the specified files from DECtape.
Requires tape-ID
and list of file names as arguments. The tape-ID is a 1- to
6-character alphanumeric name that is used to identify the
tape.
After the files are deleted, an automatic FILE L is
performed.
3.

FILE F, tape-ID,dev:file.ext[proj,prog],dev:file.ext[proj,prog] ..•
Files information onto a DECtape. Requires tape-ID and list
of file specifications as arguments. The file specifications
may include an explicit file structure name and project,
programmer number so that you can copy files from a disk area
other than your own.
The device and project, programmer
number
need
not
be
specified
for
subsequent file
specifications if they do not change.
That is, only the
programmer number
(e.g.,
[,104])
need be specified if the
file to be copied has the same project number as yours and
only the project number [41,] need be specified if you have
files from another project that you wish to copy.
The
protection of the disk file is checked to see if the file can
be read.
In addition,
the protection of the
DECtape
directory file
(tape-ID.DIR) is checked to see if it can be
updated.
If there is not enough room on the DEC tape to copy
an entire file, that portion (if any) that has been written
so far is deleted and an error message is placed in the
directory
file.
When the files have been copied, an
automatic FILE L is performed.

FILE L, id
Reads the directory of a DEC tape and places it in your disk
area as an ASCII file with the file name tape-ID.DIR. The
file is placed on the first writable file structure in your
search list provided that that structure contains your UFO.
Tape-ID is a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric name that is used
to identify the tape.
It is the only argument. You may then
print the directory with a monitor command.
The format of
the DEC tape directory is similar to the directory file
written by the monitor command DIRECT.
If errors occur while
the FILE command is being processed, error messages are
written into the directory file tape-ID.DIR.

File R,

tape-ID,dev:fi~e.ext,dev:file.ext .••

Retrieves (transfers) information from your DECtape to the
disk.
Requires tape-ID and list of file names as arguments.
2-98

FILE Command (Cont.)
If the specified files already exist,
they are superseded
only if their protection allows it.
If the specified files
do not exist, they are created on the first file structure in
your job's search list for which creation is permitted.
After files are transferred,
an automatic FILE
L
is
performed.
6.

PILE W
~vaits

until all of your pending requests are processed before
allowing
your
job to continue.
If there are pending
requests, the message "Waiting ... Type 2 ~C's to Exit" is
typed to you.
Control returns when all requests have been
processed. You may type two CTRL/Cs (~C~C) if you decide not
to wait.

FILE Z, TAPE-ID,dev:file.ext[ppn],dev:file.ext[ppn] ...
Zeroes the directory of the DEC tape before the files are
copied and then performs the same operations as the FILE F
command. Requires tape-ID and may have a list of directory
specifications arguments.
After the files are copied, an
automatic FILE L is performed.

The C and W functions are the only requests that are performed
whenever possible.
Your terminal and job are free to proceed
before the request is completed except for batch jobs, which
always wait. The function argument is optional.
If the function
argument is not specified, a brief dialogue is performed.
In most cases you do not need to specify which file structures
the files are on because UMOUNT determines this (with LOOKUPs)
and passes the information to OMOUNT. with the FILE F and FILE Z
functions,
if a file structure is not specified and the named
file exists on more than one structure, the first one in your
search list is copied.
For the FILE R function, when no file
structure is specified, the files are copied onto the first file
structure in your search list on which you are allowed to create
files.
(Refer to the description of the SETSRC program.) When a
file structure name is typed or implied, it becomes the new
default.
The wildcard (*) and wild-character
(?) constructions may be
used,
but care should be taken when generic DSK:
is typed (or
implied) for FILE R commands.
Because DSK: may define many file
structures, the single file structure is chosen as follows:
When the wildcard or wild-character. construction is used for the
file name or extension, the first structure in your search list
on which you may create files and has a UFD is used.
This is
called your standard file structure.
If the wildcard or wild-character construction is not used and
the file exists, the first file structure in the search list then
contains the specified file is used,
unless overridden by a
default.
(See Examples.)
If the file does not exist, the
standard structure is used.

2-99

FILE Command (Cont.)

WARNING
If you have a search list with multiple
file
structures,
the
asterisk
construction (when used with the FILE R
command)
can cause files to be created,
rather than superseded.
When the wild or wild-character construction is used with the
FILE F and FILE Z commands, your job1s entire search list is
used. That is, all files matching the wild construction are
transferred from all structures in the search list.
A project, programmer number (either explicit or implicit) may
only be specified in file descriptors for the FILE F and FILE Z
commands.
In the examples below, your search list is as follows:
SORT:, DSKA:

/NOCREATE, DSKB:, DSKB:, DSKC:

You have UFDs on DSKA, DSKB, and DSKC, and the file EX.l exists
on each of these three structures. User 10,4072 has the file
EX.2 in that area on DSKB and on DSKC .

• FIL.E F y TAPEl y EX.:L ,[::X + 2[ 10, 4072J./
F~E(~UEST

C~UEUE[I

1. F JOB30 TTY111 10,4072 TAPEI DSKB:,DSKAO:EX.l,DSKBO:
EX.2[1(),4072:J
1 COMMAND IN QUEUE
This command requests that the DECtape TAPEI be mounted, that the
file EX.l in your area be copied onto it,
that the file
EX.2[10,4072] also be copied onto the DECtape, that a directory
of the DECtape be written in your area, and that the DECtape then
be dismounted.
The directory is written on the first structure encountered in
the search list which is both writable and on which you have a
UFD.
In the above example, you do not have a UFD on the first
structure in your search list (SORT), you cannot create new files
on the second structure in your search list (DSKA) and so,
the
directory is written on the third structure in your search list
(DSKB) •
The file EX.l on DSKA only will be copied onto the DEC tape
because the copy on DSKA was encountered first.
The file
DSKB:EX.2[10,4072] will be copied onto the DECtape because the
copy on DSKB was encountered fi~st .
• FILE F, TAPE2, DSKe: EX. :l ,,[, 4072:JEX + 2..J
r::EQUEST

(~UEUED

2. F JOB30 TTYll1 10,4072 TAPE2 DSKB:,DSKCO:EX.l,,[lSKCO:EX.2[lQ,4072J
2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE

2-100

FILE Command (Cont.)
In this example, you specified the explicit device DSKC for
copying from both area.
DSKC was typed only once because a
device given in a file specification remains in effect for
subsequent
file
specifications
unless
another device is
specified. Note the omission of the project number in the
command string. Also note that the p,pn can be specified either
before the file name (as in this example) or after the file name
(as in the preceding example).
*FIl..E C...)
lv F JOB30

TTY111 10,4072 TAPEI DSKB:DSKAO:EX~l,
DSKBO:EX.2[IOv4072J
2. F JOB30 TTY1:l.1 :LO,4072 TAPE2 DSKB: vDBKCO:EX.lv
DSKCO:EX.2[10,4072J
2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
The response from the FILE C command indicates to you which of
your requests have not yet been processed.
In this case, both of
your requests are still pending.
~ FILE F~ F TAPEl ~ EX + 1..)
F~E(~UEST

(~UEUED

I. R JOB24 TTY111 10,4072
1 COMMAND IN QUEUE

TAPEl DSKB:,DSKB:EX.l

The FILE R command uses the same algorithm as the FILE F (and Z)
command for determining the device on which to write the
directory. The file EX.l is written on the first writable file
structure in your search list. Note that the file EX.l already
exists on DSKA, DSKB, and DSKC. DSKA is NOCREATE,
so the file
EX.l is written onto DSKB, superseding the EX.l already on DSKB.
,. FILE F, TAPE:3 v E? *..)
r<E(~UEBT

(~UEUED

2. F JOB24 TTY:l.l1 10,4072 TAPE3 DSKB: SORT:E?*,
DBKC: E'l> + »:
2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
In cases where a wild-character and/or wildcard construction is
used, UMOUNT uses the entire search list to determine what files
to copy for FILE F and FILE Z commands; whether or not you have
a UFD on a particular structure.
UMOUNT passes the wild
construction, along with each structure in the search list,
to
aMOUNT.

2-101

FILEX Program

Function
The FILEX program is a general file transfer program used to
convert between various core image formats, and to read and write
various DECtape formats.
Files are transferred as 36-bit data.
The only processing on the data is that necessary to convert
between various core image representations.
Command Format
.R FILEX
*dev:ofile.ext[directory]<nnn>/switches
file.ext[directory]/switches

dev:

If the project-programmer and/or the switches appear after
the device name, they apply to all the following files.
If
they appear after the file name, the specifiers apply only
to the preceding file.
The input file name or extension may
be *,
in which case the usual processing of the *,
construction occurs.
(Refer to the TYPE command.) The
output file name and extension may be *, in which case the
file name and extension of the input file is copied.
If the
output file name or extension is missing, the same procedure
occurs as with the * construction, except that all core
image files are written with the default extension and
format appropriate to the output device (unless overridden
by swi tches) .
If a protection <nnn> is not specified,
files are written
with the system standard protection unless the files are
being written on SYS.
On SYS,
files are written with
protection <155>, except for files with extension .SYS.
These files have the default protection of <157>.
Meaning of Switches:
Help text
/H

to obtain an explanation of the command string and
individual switches.

DECtape Format Specifiers
/F

PDP-IS DECtape format

MIT project MAC PDP-6/l0 DEC tape format

Old DEC PDP-6 DEC tape format

Normal PDP-lO directory format

PDP-II DEC tape format.

File Format Specifiers
/A

ASCII processing;
PDP-IS tapes.

binary processing; overrides default extension.
Files read from a PDP-II format tape with this
switch contain four 8-bit bytes in each 36-bit
word
(1st byte in bits 10-17, 2nd byte in bits
2-102

meaningful only for PDP-II

and

FILEX Program (Cont.)
2-9, 3rd byte in bits 28-35, and 4th byte in bits
20-27).
Files written on a PDP-II format tape
with this switch are assumed to have the same
format.

compressed; save file format.
This format is
assumed for files with extensions .SAV, .LOW,
.SVE. The default output extension is .SAV unless
the input extension is .LOW or .SVE, in which case
the extension remains unchanged.

dump format.
This format
with extension .DMP.

expanded core image files (used by FILDDT).
This
format is assumed for files with extension .XPN.
The default output extension is .XPN.

image processing;
PDP-IS tapes.

simple block
(SBLK)
format,
project
MAC's
equivalent of .SAV format.
The default output
extension is .BIN.

assumed

for

files

meaningful only for PDP-II

and

DECtape Processing Specifiers

(go on), ignores read errors on input device.
FILEX checks the always-bad-checksum bit in the
5-series monitor, so this switch is not needed for
files with .RPABC on (e.g., CRASH.SAV).

(list), causes a directory on an input DECtape
file to be typed on your terminal or causes a
directory listing of the output DECtape at the end
(i.e., after the output).

(preserved), causes quick processing
(/Q)
and
preserves the scratch file after processing for
use by another command.

(quick), causes an input or output DECtape to be
processed quickly by creating a scratch file on
the disk. This file is deleted after processing
is completed.

(reuse), reuses a scratch file preserved by
in a previous command.

(zero), causes the appropriate format of a zeroed
directory to be written on a DECtape output file.
(Zeroing a DECtape directory is equivalent to
deleting all the files on the tape.)
If TAPEID
appears in the output specifier,
then TAPEID is
written as the tape identifier in the directory.
TAPEID is preceded by a circumflex (~) and may be
6 characters on a DECsystem-lO tape, 3 characters
on a project MAC tape, and is not present on a
PDP-6 tape.

Characteristics
The R FILEX command:
Runs the FILEX program, thereby destroying your core image.
2-103

FILEX Program (Cont.)
Examples
~ R FILEX..}

The dump format file is
written as TEST.SAV.

compressed

and

*[181<: ::~nA\A\ TAll (): TEST. I:H1P/C..}

.F~ FII... EX..)

Copy CRASH.SAV to an expanded
file for FILDDT to examine.

*D~:)I<: SEI:::O 1 ~::; + XPN[:I. 0,1 J ::::DSI<C: CI:~ABH + SAVe:L ,4 ]..J

2-104

format

FINISH Command

Fumction
The FINISH command terminates any input or output currently in
pro9ress on the specified device and automatically performs the
RELEASE UUO (which CLOSES the files) and DEASSIGN command,
thus
making the device available to another user.
This command is
preferred over the DEASSIGN command because it
completely
disassociates an INITed device from your job, thereby preventing
you from continuing your program.
If you wish to continue your
program, you should use the DEASSIGN command.
Command oF'orma t
FINISH dev
dev is the logical or physical name of the device on
I/O is to be terminated.
This argument is optional.

which

If dev is omitted, I/O is terminated on all devices,
except
your
job's controlling terminal and the logical name of the
controlling terminal is cleared.
Characteristics
The FINISH command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.
Re~str ictions

You cannot continue your program if the device
you can start at the beginning or enter DDT.
EJC:amples

.FINISH CnR:~

.FINISH DTAO:l."7:~

.FINISH LF'T:~

2-105

was

INITed,

but

FUDGE Command 1

Function
The FUDGE command creates a library REL file from a temporary
file generated by a previous COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
command string containing the /FUDGE switch.
The library is
created with the REL files in the same order in which they were
specified in the command string.
(Refer to the MAKLIB program
writeup and to LOADER and LINK-IO documentation for descriptions
of library REL files.)
NOTE
Because the COMPIL program sorts out
files by compilers, mixed FORTRAN and
MACRO programs are sorted so that all
FORTRAN programs are compiled first and
MACRO programs second.
However,
the
/FUDGE switch combines them in the order
in which the COMPIL program encountered
them.
When the /FUDGE switch is used, you must issue the FUDGE command
before issuing any other COMPIL-class command that runs PIP
(e.g., TYPE, COPY). The reason for this is that there is only
one
temporary
file
containing
information
generated by
COMPIL-class commands that run PIP. Therefore,
the information
generated by the /FUDGE switch will be superseded by the
information generated by any other COMPIL-class command which
runs PIP. By issuing the FUDGE command, the library REL file can
be generated before the contents of the temporary file are
overwritten by another COMPIL-class command.
Command Format
FUDGE
Characteristics
The FUDGE command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying your core image.
Examples
+

COMF'II... E/FUDGE: LIBF~ARY /MACRO TEST + MAT, DATAF'F~O + CElL, SCIENCE + F4..J

~FUnGE...)

Create a disk file named LIBRAR that contains the
all the REL files produced.
Create the library file
contains the following:
SCIENC.REL.

names

and call it LIBRAR.
This file
TEST.REL, MATH.REL, DATPRO.REL, and

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command
before running the PIP program.
2-106

GET Command

Function
The GET command loads a core image from
device but does not begin execution.

retrievable

storage

This command clears all of your core. However, programs should
not count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas
of core that are expected to contain zeros (i.e., programs should
be
self-initializing).
This action allows programs to be
restarted by a nc, start sequence without having to do another
GET command.
On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing, a null
record is output before the EOF for the missing segment so that
two EOFs cannot occur consecutively.
Therefore, a saved null
segment does not appear as a logical EOT (2 EOFs in a row).
Command }i'ormat
GET dev:file.ext[proj,prog] core
The arguments and the defaults are the same as
command.

the

RUN

Characteristics
The GET command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Does not operate when the device is currently
data.
EJC:ample
.GET SY~HF'IP.../
..JOIt SETUP

• GET TEST.,./
..JOB SETUP

2-107

transmitting

GLOB Program

Function
The GLOB program reads multiple binary program files and produces
an alphabetical cross-referenced list of all the global symbols
(symbols accessible to other programs) encountered. This program
also searches files in library search mode, checking for globals,
if the program file was loaded' by the LOADER in library search
mode.
(Refer to the LOADER documentation.)
The GLOB program has two phases of operation:
the first phase is
to scan the input files and build an internal symbol table, and
the second, to produce output based on the symbol table. Because
of these phases, you can input commands to GLOB in one of two
ways. The first way is to specify one command string containing
both the output and input specifications.
(This is the command
string format most system programs accept.) The second is to
separate the command string into a series of input commands and
output commands.
Command Formats
1.

R GLOB
outputdev:file.ext[directory] = input dev:file.ext[directory],
file.ext, ••. ,dev:file.ext[directory] $

R GLOB
followed by one or more input commands in the form
dev:file.ext[directory],file.ext[directory], .•• ,
dev:file.ext[directory], ...
and then one or more output commands in the form
outdev:file.ext[directory]

When you separate your input to GLOB into input commands and
output commands
(Command Format #2), the input commands contain
only input specifications and the output commands, only output
specifications.
Each output command causes a listing to be
generated; any number of listings can be printed from the symbol
table generated from the current input files as long as no input
commands occur after the first output command.
When an input
command is encountered after output has been generated, the
current symbol table is destroyed and a new one begun.
Defaults
1.

If the device is omitted, it is assumed to be DSK.
However,
if the entire output specification is omitted, the output
device is TTY.

If the output file name is omitted, it is the name of the
last input file on the line (Command Format #1) or is GLOB if
the line contains only output commands (Command Format #2).
The input file names are required.

2-108

GLOB Program (Cont.)
3.

If the output extension is omitted, .GLB is used.
If the
input extension is omitted, it is assumed to be .REL unless
the null extension is explicitly specified by a dot following
the file name.

If the project-programmer number [proj,prog] is omitted, your
default directory is used.

An ALTmode terminates the command input and signals GLOB to
output the cross-referenced listing.
In other words, a
listing is not output until GLOB encounters an ALTmode.
The
ALTmode appears at the end of the command string shown in
Command Format #1 or at the end of each output command shown
in Command Format #2.

Switches
Switches control the types of global listings to be output.
Each
switch can be preceded by a slash, or several switches can be
enclosed in parentheses. Only the most recently specified switch
(except for L, M, P, Q, and X, which are always in effect) is in
effect at any given time.
If no switches are specified, all
global symbols are output. The following switches are available.

Output all global symbols.
switches are specified.

List only erroneous
symbols.

List nonrelocatable (fixed) symbols only.

List the
switches
HLP:GLOB:HLP.

Scan programs only if they contain globals previously
defined and not yet satisfied (library search mode).

Turn off library search mode scanning resulting from
IL switch.

List only symbols which are never referenced.

List all routines that define a symbol to have the same
value.
The routine that defines the symbol first is
listed,
followed by a plus
(+)
sign.
Subsequent
routines that define the symbol are listed, preceded by
a plus sign.

Suppress the listing of subsequent definers that result
from the IP switch.

IR
IS

List only relocatable symbols.

This is the default

(multiply

available

defined

(help

List symbols with non-conflicting
defined in more than one program.

undefined)

text)

values

that

from

are

Do not print listing header when output device is not
your terminal, and include listing header when it is
your terminal. Without this switch,
the header is
printed on all devices except your terminal. The
listing header is in the following format:
flags symbol octal value defined in referenced in
2-109

GLOB Program (Cont.)
Symbols listed are in alphabetical order according to
their ASCII code values. The octal value is followed
by a prime (I) if the symbol is relocatable. The value
is then relative to the beginning of the program in
which the symbol is defined.
Flags preceding the
symbol are shown below.
M

Multiply
shown) •

defined

symbol

(all

values

are

Never referred to
(i.e., was not declared
external in any of the binary prog~ams).

Multiply specified symbol (i.e., defined in
more
than
one
program
but
with
non-conflicting values).
The name of the
first program in which the symbol encountered
is followed by a plus sign.

Undefined symbol.

Characteristics
The R GLOB command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Runs the GLOB program, destroying your core image.
Examples
.,:~

GLOB-.J

*'<EBe>
. . PT:

::~MAIN + DTAO:l. 2: BUB40. BUB~:jOO

Run the GLOB program.
All global symbols in the program
MAIN (on DSK), SUB40, and SUB50 (on
DTA2)
are listed on
the
line
printer.
Along with the symbol is
listed its value,
the program in
which it is defined, all programs
in which it is referenced, and any
error flags.

*DTAO:l.4: BATCH + J:~El.. y [ITA" DTA006: NUMBEF~. HEL" CLABS-.J
*DSJ\: MATH. J:;:EL. ~·l..:r:F.mAr~Y ~

The programs to be scanned are
BATCH.REL,
DATA.REL
on
DTA4;
NUMBER.REL, CLASS.REL on DTA6;
and
MATH.REL, LIBRARY.null on DSK.

*LF'T: ::::/F4 <EBe>

List only nonrelocatable symbols on
the line printer.

*DSK:SYMBOL=/H<EBC>

List only relocatable symbols in
the
file named SYMBOL in your
default directory.

*TTY: ::::/E
U EXTSYM

Print all erroneous symbols on the
terminal. EXTSYM is an undefined
symbol appearing in the program
SUBRTE.

>!< ..·"c;

~::Ese>

SUBTr~E

Return to monitor mode.

2-110

GRIPE Program

Function
The GRIPE program accepts text from you and records it in a disk
file,
thereby enabling other users to record comments and
complaints to be read at a later time by the operations staff.
Command Format
R GRIPE
When the GRIPE program responds with a YES?, type the text,
using as many lines as necessary, terminated with an ESCAPE.
The text is written as a file with <157> protection and
includes
a
header
with
the
date,
time,
and your
project-programmer number. Therefore, you do not need to
identify yourself.
Cha.racter istics
The R GRIPE command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Runs the GRIPE program, thereby destroying your core image.
ExaliDple
F·, (., F·' I I"' EN.
-_._-

t·\

J.\

Yes?

- ;...........J

(Depress ESCape kehl when throuSh)

THIS CONSOLE IS ALMOST nUT OF PAPER AND IT NEEIH3 A NEW RIBBON •.)
THANK
YOU
------

2-111

HALT Command

Function
The HALT (~C) command transmits a HALT command to the monitor
command interpreter.
It stops your job and stores the program
counter in the job data area (.JBPC). CTRL/C, unlike HALT, can
be issued at user level.
(Refer to the DECsystem-lO Monitor
Calls for a description of the job data area.)
Command Format
HALT (~C)
Characteristics
The HALT (~C) command:
Places the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.
Example
.'"'C

2-112

HELP Command

Function
The HELP command is used to obtain useful information on various
system features.
You can select this information from the
following special disk devices: Htp:, NEW:, OLD:, and SYS:.
Command F'ormats
1.

HELP
Outputs the instructions for receiving information.

HELP dev:*
Outputs both the names of features that have available
documentation contained on the specified device and the names
of monitor commands, including the SET commands.

HELP dev:name
Outputs the information on the named feature contained on the
specified device.

Only the first six characters of the name argument are scanned.
These characters must be A through Z, 0 through 9, or asterisk
(*) •

If the requested file is not found on the specified device, or if
the device argument is omitted, the devices are searched in the
following order: HLP:, SYS:, NEW:, and OLD:.
However,
if you
have device NEW:
enabled in this search list (refer to the
SETSRC program writeup) when using Command Format #3,
it is
searched before device SYS:. Both logical and physical names are
searched for each device.
Characteristics
The HELP command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.

HELP i fa avai 1 i:1t.) 1 C-? for the following:
AI... L.OT
ALQUII< APL
BACKUP
BLI<TRN BLS36C BOOT11 BOOTGT BOX
COBRG
COF'YED CPL.
COBDDT COBOL
DBMEND DCl2
DC76
CSPlO
DDT
DSKF"\AT DTADII~ DTELDR ERSATZ FAIU~A
FILEX
FILE
FIND
FNDBLD FORDDT
GLOB
FUDGE2 GALAXY GAL NEW GASP
..JQ
INITIA ISAM
HYPHEN INI
LOGOUT LPTSPD
LINK
LOGIN
LINED
MAKLIB MAI<VFU MATCH
MAIL
MATHLA
MOUNT
MTCOPY NETl.DR NETOPF~ OLD
PL.EASE PLTSPL PMI~KER PPNLST PTPSPL..
DUOLST t\EDUCE RERUN
F~EV
F~SXFMT
seDep SENGEN SETSRC SIMCOM BIMDDT
S()I~TC
SOS
SOUP
SOf~T
SPACE
SUBSYS SY
SPY
~~UBNEW
SYSDPY
TECOH
TECD
TRACK
TTT3D
TTYTST
:f.()84
XTEN
AL..C[)~1P

2-113

BABIC
CDPSPL
CREDIF~

DELFIL
FGEN

BATCH
CDRSTK
CREF
DIRECT
FILCOM

BLIS10
CHANGE
CSORT
DISMOU
FIL..DAE

FORD~1L

FOt~TRA

Fr~s

GRIPE
KILL
LPTSPl.
MCBGEN
OMOUNT
CHIMP

HELP
LDVT20
MACRO
MIMIC
OPSER

t~UNINP

I~UNOFF
SIMF~TS
SP~~INT

HERMES
L..IBARY
MACY:ll
MODUNV
PIP
QUEUE
SAFEIO
SIMULA
SPROUT
TAPE
WHEEL

SIMDIR
SPELL
SYSERR
UFDREN

t~nUMP

SYSTAT
UMOUNT

HELP Command (Cont.)
The lTJonit.or has thc:~ followins commands:
ACCOUN ALI... DCA ASSIGN ATTACH BACI<SP
CORE
COJOB
COMPIL CONTIN COPY
[lAYTIM
CSI-IIFT CSTAI:;:T CTEST
D
DEBUG
DELETE DETACH DIRECT DISMOU
EXECUT
EDIT
EOF
EF~ROF"<
E
FUDGE
GET
GOTO
HELP
HALT
LIST
L.ABEL
LET
"'CONTI KJOB
MAKE
NOERRO
Mle
MOUNT
NODE
OSSAVE P,)DB
ON
OPERAT OSAVE
QUEUE
PROTEC PUNCH
R
F'F"n NT
SAVE
I~ESOUR
f~EVIVE
REWIND RUN
SILENC SI< IP
SET
SSAVE
sos
TYPE
TPUNCH TTY
TEeo
TIME
XCHNGE ZERO
WHENEV WHERE

BACK TO
CPUNCH
DCOr';:E
DO
FILE
I
LOAD
NOOPER
PLEASE
REASSI
SCHEDU
START
UNLOAD

The lYIonl. tOT' has t.hf.~ followins SET cOlTlmand~;) :
BLOCKS BREAK
CDR
COI:;:MAX CORMIN CPU
DENSIT DSKFUL DSKPRI
IIAYTIM DEFAUL DEFEI:;:
PHYSIC RETRY
MEMOF",Y NODEFE NOMESS OPR
WATCH
VIRTUA VMt1AX
TTY
TIME

DDT
DSK
FINISH
IF
LOCATE
NSAVE
PLOT
REENTE
SEND
SUBMIT
USESTA

CLOSE
CREF
DEASSI
DUMP
FREE
INITIA
LOGIN
NSSAVE
F'RESER
RENAME
SESSIO
SYSTAT
VERSIO

CTEST
HOSTES
SCHEDU

DATE
HF'Q
SPOOL

CCONTI
Cf~EATE

TtH~ lTIoni tOT' has the followin~~ SET TTY commands:
[tEBREA ECHO
ELEMEN
CRLF
ALTMOD BLANKS COPY
PAGE
For,M
IGNORE LC
NO
GAG
HOLD
WIDTH
TABS
TIDY
UC
SPEED
TAPE
SL.AVE

FILL
RTCOMP

The ITI()n i t (J T' has t.he follc)wing SET WATCH cOITIITtands:

WAIT

WRITES

BACK TO
CPUNCH
DCORE
DO
FILE
I
LOAD
NOOPER
PLEASE
REASSI
SCHE[lU
START
UNLOAD

CCONTI
CREATE
DDT
DSK
FINISH
IF
l.OCATE
NSAVE
PL.OT
REENTE
SEND
SUBMIT
USESTA

CLOSE
CREF
DEASSI
DUMP
FREE
INITIA
LOGIN
NSSAVE
F'RESER
RENAME
SESSIO
SYSTAT
VERSIO

ThE' 1Tt0ni tOT' has the following SET commands:
COr';:MAX COHMIN CPU
BLOCKS BI~EAJ<
CDR
IJAYTIM DEFAUL DEFER
DENSIT DSKFlJL [lSI<PRI
PHYSIC F"<ETRY
MEMORY NODEFE NOMESS OPR
WATCH
VIRTUA VMMAX
TTY
TIME

CTEST
HOSTES
SCHEDU

DATE
HPQ
SPOOL

The lTIonitor ha~5 the following SET TTY cOlTIlTlands:
CRLF
DEDREA ECHO
ELEMEN
ALTMOD BLANKS COPY
PAGE
NO
GAG
HOLD
IGNORE LC
FORM
TABS
TAPE
TIDY
UC
WIDTH
SLAVE
SPEED

FILL
RTCOMP

DAY

READS

MTA

RUN

VE~~SIO

.HELP NEW:*~
The lTIoni tc:> T' has t.he followin~~ cC)lTIlTIands:
f,\CCOUN ALL.OCA ASSIGN ATTACH BACKSP
CORE
CO,JOB
COMPIL CONTIN COPY
[I
[lAYTIM
CSHIFT CST ART CTEST
DEBUG
DELETE DETACH DI F",ECT DISMOU
EXECUT
EOF
EFn~OR
EDIT
F
GOTO
HALT
HELP
FUDGE
GET
LIST
,JCONTI J<JOB
LABEL
LET
MOUNT
NOERRO
MIC
NODE
MAI<E
OSSAVE P,JOB
OPEr<AT OSAVE
ON
F",
QUEUE
Pf,INT
PROTl:::C PUNCH
SAVE
RESDUR F~EVIVE m:::WIND RUN
SSAVE
SII...ENC SKIP
SOS
SET
TPUNCH TTY
TYPE
TECO
TIME
XCHNGE ZERO
WHENEV WHERE

Th(~

ITIcmi tor

DAY

MTA

has the following SET WATCH cOlTIlTtar,ds:
READS
VERSIO WAIT
WRITES
RUN

2-114

HELP Command (Cont.)
• HELP DII~ECT..J
T~pe out::::input,input,.+.
IACCESS:n :::: access all listed files under n blocks lon~
IALLOCATED :::: sive allocated len~ths
IAUTHOR :::: output author of file
IBEFORE:DATE:TIME :::: Just files created before this date-time
/BLOCKS :::: ~ive len~ths in blocks (default)
ICHECKSUM :::: compute checksum of each file
IDETAIL :::: everwthinS from extended LOOKUP
IF :::: fast mC)lje
IFDTA :::: set DTA directorw from core
11-1 .- th i s tf.~xt
It :::: out to I...F'T
IN :::: no rmc~ 1 m(Jde
INOAUTHOR :::: don't output author (default)
/NOCHECKSUM :::: omit checksums (default)
/NODETAIL :::: don't use detail mode (default)
/NOFDTA :::: don't set DTA directorw from core (default)
INOPRDEVICE :::: never print device
INOF'RDIRECTORV :::: never print directorw
/NOSORT :::: omit sort options (default)
/NOSUMMARY :::: don't use ISUMMARV mode (default)
/NOTITLES :::: omit titles (default if TTV:)
/NOUNITS :::: don't use IUNITS mode (default)
IPRDEVICE :::: alwaws print device
IPRDIRECTORY :::: always print directorw
IS ~~ slow mod€·~
ISINCE:DATE:TIME :::: Just files created since this date-time
ISORT :::: output in format amenable to sartin.
ISUMMARV :::: Just print summarw line
ITITLES :::: include titles (default if not TTY:)
IUNITS ::::~ive actual units for structures
/W:n :::: tr~ to fill paper width of n columns
IWORDS :::: sive len.ths in words
IWRITTEN :::: stve len~ths written (default)

* is wild namey etc.
? is wild letter of namey etc.
-out::::- maw be omitted
default is TTY:.DIR=DSK:*.*Cmw directorwJ
on masnetic tape,
IDENSITV:200 or 556 or 800 :::: select the densitw
IEOTS :::: stop at double file mark (DEFAULT)
IFILES:n :::: stop after doin~ n files (tape marks)
IMARKS :::: note each end of file mark
INOEOTS :::: don't stop at double file mark
/NOMARKS :::: don't annotate file marks (default)
/NOREWINDS :::: don't rewind tape
IPARITV:EVEN :::: read tape in even mode
IPARITY:ODD :::: read tape in odd mode (default)
IREWINDS :::: rewind tape before and after (default)

2-115

HELP Command (Cont.)
.HELF' INITIA.-J
The INITIA command can be followed bw one or more keywords:

BATCH
HELP
KSYS
NAME
NORUN
NOTICE
SET TTY
STr~UCTlmES

TERMINET
TEXT
TTY

indicate which, if any, batch system is runnin~
type th i s te~·ct,
indicate when time-sharin~ will cease
(default) twpe swstem name
suppress runnin~ any operator pro~ram
type ~eneral operator notice
(default unless lo~sed in) setup terminal
type any operator notes about mounted structures
set tabs for a terminet-300

TYPE QUICK OPERATOR NOTICE
twpe tty mode settinss for this terminal

NO may preceed any of the above to override default settin~s

2-116

INITIA Command

Function
The INITIA command performs standard system initialization for
the terminal lssulng the command.
This command is issued
automatically at system startup and at the 400 series restart at
certain designated terminals,
you may reissue it at any time.
This command is used to initiate specific system programs,
such
as the operator service program, OPSER, on a particular console.
When INITIA runs, it finds the file with the name TTY.INI, which
is
an
ASCII
file
created
by
you.
TTY.INI contains
installation-specified options indicating the characteristics of
the terminal(s)
to be initialized.
If TTY.INI cannot be found,
INITIA cannot initialize any devices and a start-up message
is
printed.
Command Format
INITIA or INITIA arg
The command word INITIA can
keywords:

followed

one

BATCH

Types out the name of the batch that
running on the system (e.g., GALAXY).

HELP

Types a list of available keywords and
meanings.

KSYS

Indicates when timesharing will cease.

NAME

Types the system name

NONAME

Suppresses the typing of the system name.

NORUN

Suppresses
program.

NOTICE

Types the general operator notice.

SET TTY

Set up your
terminal
(default
condition
unless you have already logged in).

STRUCTURES

Types any operator
structures.

TERMINET

Sets tab spacing identical to a TERMINET-300.

TEXT

Type quick operator notice.

TTY

Types the
terminal.

the

TTY

Characteristics
The INITIA command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs a specific system program.
Does not require LOGIN.

2-117

their

(default).

execution

mode

notes

any

operator

about

settings

mounted

for

this

INITIA Command (Cont.)
Examples
~ INITIA---'

RK3A1A KL10 SYSt1026 14:52:34 TTY373 swsteffi 1026
Connected to Node NOVA(31) Line t 41
Job 35
User COSTLEY,B
[27,5110J
DSKB:
Green DSKB
DSKC:
Green DSKC
DSKN:
Swsteffi 1026
VELB:
Yellow DSKB
YELC:
Yellow DSKC
.INITIA BATCH..)
RK3A1A KL10 SYSi1026 14:52:51 TTY373 swstem 1026
Connected to Node NOVA(31) Line t 41
Job 35
User COSTLEY,B
[27,5110J
GALAXY SPOOLING AND BATCH SYSTEM
DSKB:
Green DSKB
[lSKC:
Green {lSKC
DSKN:
S~~stf?'" 1026
YELII:
Yellow DSKB
YELC:
Y(~llow DSKC
+

INITIA STI~UCTUI~ES..J

RK3A1A KL10 SYSi1026 14:53:12 TTY373 swstem 1026
Connected to Node NOVA(31) Line t 41
Job 35
User COSTLEY,S
[27,5110J
DSKS:
Green {lSKB
DSKe:
Green DSKC
DSKN:
S~stem 1026
YELB:
Yellow DSKB
YELC:
Yellow DSKC
• "'C

2-118

JCONTINUE Command

Function
The JCONTINUE command forces a continue of the specified job if
the
job was in a ~C state because of a call to the device error
message routine (HNGSTP).
Command Format
JCONTINUE n
n is the number of the job to be continued.
is required.
Characte.r istics
The JCONTINUE command:
Places your terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.
E:ltample
(. ,..ICONT :1.4.,,/

2-119

This

argument

KJOB Command

Function
The KJOB command:
Stops all assigned I/O devices and returns them
monitor pool.
Returns all allocated core to the monitor pool.
Returns the job number to the pool.
Leaves the console in monitor mode.

the

Command Formats
KJOB/switch
When you issue the KJOB command, the system checks to see if
GALAXY is running.
If it is not, refer to the second command
format description below.
If it is, the system runs the LOGOUT
program, which accepts four switches. These switches are listed
and described below. The switches are /FAST, /NOMESSAGE, /BATCH,
and /HELP.
FAST

to log out immediately and save
all
files
(including temporary files)
as they are. This
command is equal to an R LOGOUT command or a RUN
monitor call to LOGOUT.
Unpreserved temporary
files (e.g., nnn???TMP) are deleted where nnn is
your job number and the files reside in your disk
area. This is the default action of the KJOB
command.

BATCH

to delete no files except when you are over the
logged-out quota,
then delete enough files to be
below quota.
The files are deleted in
the
following order:
1) unprotected files according
to the category of the file;
2) spooled files not
previously
queued;
and
3) protected files
according to the category of the file.
The
categories of files are as follows:
1) temporary
files, 2) relocatable files, 3) backup files,
4)
save files, and 5) all other files.

HELP

to list the KJOB options and their meanings.

NOMESSAGE this switch causes the same action as the /FAST
switch, except that no output is printed at the
terminal;
i.e., all output is suppressed.
This
action is the default action for a detached job.
The second format (described here)
for the KJOB
command is used when your system does not include
GALAXY.
The command responds with
CONFIRM:
you may type CTRL/C to abort the logout, or you
may type one of the following letters (optionally
followed by a space and a list of file structure
names):

2-120

KJOB Command (Cont.)
F

to logout immediately and save all files
(including
temporary files) as they are.
This command is equal to
an R LOGOUT command or a RUN monitor call to LOGOUT.

to delete all files on the specified file structures.
It responds with DELETE ALL FILES? Type Y or D for
YES, any other character for NO.

to delete all unprotected files (i.e., files with Oxx
protection codes) on the specified file structures.
If
project 1 or other jobs are logged in with the same
project-programmer number, the K command responds with
DELETE UNPROTECTED FILES? Type Y or K for YES,
any
other character for NO.

to save and protect (i.e., assign a protection code of
in the owner's field) all but temporary files (TMP,
CRF, LST) on the specified file structures.
If project
1
or
other
jobs are logged in with the same
project-programmer number, the P command responds with
DELETE TEMPORARY FILES? Type Y or P for YES, any other
character for NO.
1

to save without protecting all but temporary files on
the specified file structures.
If project 1 or other
jobs are logged in with the same project-programmer
number,
the S command responds with DELETE TEMPORARY
FILES? Type Y or S for YES, any other character for
NO.

to list the
structures.

to individually determine what to do with all files on
the specified file structure. After each file name is
listed type:

to protect the file.
S to save the file.
K to delete the file.
Q to learn if over logged-out quota on this
structure.
If not over quota, nothing is typed,
and the same file name is repeated.
E to skip to the next file structure and save this
file if below logged-out quota for
this file
structure.
If not below logged-out quota,
the
message ?file structure name LOGGED OUT QUOTA n
EXCEEDED BY m BLOCKS is typed and the same file
name is repeated.
to list responses and meanings.

directories

the

specified

file

to individually determine what to do with all but
protected files.
Protected files are always preserved.
After each file name is listed, type one of the letters
associated with the I command above.

to delete no files except when user is over the logged
out quota, then delete enough files to be below quota.

to learn if over logged out quota on the specified file
structure.

to list the KJOB options and their meanings.

2-121

KJOB Command (Cont.)
W

to list the names of the files that are deleted.

to turn off the listing of names of the files that
deleted.
Complement of w.

are

If no file structure names are specified, the responses are for
all file structure names in the job search list.
If file
structure names are specified, the responses apply to those file
structures, and CONFIRM is retyped. The KJOB command ignoes all
logical assignments.
You have the option of going through the CONFIRM dialogue, even
if other jobs are logged-in under the same project-programmer
number or if you are logged in under project 1.
(However,
if
sufficient responses are included on the KJOB command line or in
a tempora~y file entered through an alternate entry point,
CONFIRM 1S not typed). By responding to a CONFIRM message, you
have an opportunity to organize this disk area by deleting or
preserving specific files.
The KJOB program calls the QUEUE program to perform the queueing
of files which have been deferred to logout time. This includes
all spooled output not previously queued.
Queuing may be
suppressed with the /Z response (see below).
KJOB
CONFIRM:
When the CONFIRM:
response is typed, you may type anyone
of the above-described letters followed by a space, and an
optional file structure name or a list of file structure
names separated by commas.
KJOB log file descriptor

= /letter list

the log file descriptor has the following format:
dev:file.ext[proj,prog]
If the log file is not a disk or spooled device, TTY is
used,
and the message %LOG FILE DEVICE IS NOT DSK OR
SPOOLED: WILL USE TTY is typed.
letter is any letter from the above-described list.
In
addition,
the following options are available to jobs using
this command format:
/Z:n specifies the degree of queueing desired:
n = 0 suppresses all normal queuing done at LOGOUT
time.
n = 1 queues only the log file.
n = 2 queues the log file and spooled output.
n = 3 queues the log file, spooled output, and *.LST.
n
4 queues the log file, spooled output,
*.LST, and
requests deferred to LOGOUT time (deferred requests are
not yet implemented).
If Z is given without a value or if there are no spool
bits set for this job, z:o is assumed. Otherwise, /Z:2
is assumed if /z is not typed.

2-122

KJOB Command (Cont.)
/VL:n specifies that the limit of pages for
is to be n (decimal) .

LPT

files

/VC:n specifies that the limit of cards for
is to be n (dec imal) .

CDP

files

/VT:n specifies that the limit of feet
for PTP files is to be n (dec imal) .

paper

tape

/VP:n specifies that the limit of minutes for PLT files
is to be n (decimal).
/VR:n specifies that the priority of the queue request
is to be ni n is from 0 through 62 (decimal). /VR:lO
is the standard or default.
VS:n specifies that the sequence number for
request is to be n (decimal).
VD:n specifies that the file
file is to be v.

queue

the

log

P preserves the log file after printing.
R renames the log file before printing to
queue area and deletes it after printing.

the

v
v
v

disposition

the

= D deletes the log file after printing.

The default is /VD:D.
The letters must appear on the input side of the
command string.
If the log file is specified, all TTY
output is appended to the log file.
If no log file is
specified or if the log file is not a disk or a spooled
device, the default is TTY.
In addition, if responses
to CONFIRM are required and are not specified on the
KJOB command line, these responses will then be read
from TTY.
Therefore,
users should be careful when
employing this command format.
Any CONFIRM option that would ask fro re-confirmation
(D always, and sometimes K, S, and P) must be repeated
if it is on the KJOB command line).
The KJOB program may be entered at the CCL entry point
through the RUN monitor call.
When this is done,
TMPCOR file KJO or disk file nnnKJO.TMP where nnn is
your job number in decimal, is used instead of the TTY
input.
Characteristics
The KJOB command:
Deassigns your terminal.
Stops all assigned I/O devices because it does
when a device is currently transmitting data.
Runs the KJOB and LOGOUT programs.

2-123

not

operate

KJOB Command (Cont.)
Examples

... c
.KJOB.J

..'CIt. . 21

COSTLEY"B [2'7,,51:1.0]
TTY41 at 16:57:08 en 29-Jul-7'7
Runtime: 0:00:04p KCS:62, Connect time: 4:03:26
Disk Reads:701, Writes:29, Blocks saved:25
USfH'

Lo~~ed-off

.K/F~

..Job :54

CUSTEF~, L + [27,4072:1
TTY34 at 8:43:55 on 9-Au~-77
Runtime: 0:00:01, KeS:19, Connect time: 0:13:39
Disk Reads:62v Writes:11, Blocks saved:4840
U!5(i:\ Y'

Lo~~ed-off

2-124

LABEL Command 1

Function
The LABEL command allows you to write an identifier onto a
DECtape.
This command is implemented for your convenience. The
identifier is stored on the tape itself and is displayed when you
list a directory of the tape with the DIRECT command. The PIP
and FILEX programs can also read and write DEC tape labels. As a
user you should assign a unique label to each DEC tape in order to
avoid confusing one tape with another.
Command Format
LABEL dev:

~name

dev:
is a physical
DECtape.

logical

name

which

represents

~ is the delimiter of the DEC tape identifier, which
any non-alphanumeric character.

may

name is a 1- to 6-character SIXBIT name to be used as
identifier.
Any
characters
can be used except
delimiter.

the
the

If the identifier consists
entirely
of
characters, the delimiters can be omitted.

alphanumeric

The DEC tape must be assigned to you before this
executed.

command

Characteristics
The LABEL command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying your core image.
E.xamples
LABEl...

DTI~()O)': COBOl... : 1 ~

<.I...I~,BE/'"

LOGNA'''!: "'TAP:rD"'~

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command
before running PIP.
2-125

LIST Command 1

Function
The LIST command directs PIP to list the contents of named source
file(s) on the line printer (LPT). The output goes either to LPT
immediately or to the disk to be spooled to LPT if it is being
spooled for this job.
(Refer to the QUEUE and PRINT commands.)
If the LPT is being spooled, the QUEUE program should be used
instead of the LIST command since it saves time and disk
accesses.
Command Format
LIST list
list is a single file specification or a string of file
specifications separated by commas. A file specification
consists of a device name, a file name and extension, and a
directory
name.
This argument is required.
When a
directory name precedes the file name,
it becomes the
default for all succeeding files.
Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them
in
parentheses
in the LIST command string.
When COMPIL
interprets the command string, it passes the switches on to
PIP.
Characteristics
The LIST command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying your core image.
Examples

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command
before running PIP.
2-126

LOAD Corilmand 1

Function
The LOAD command translates the specified source files if
necessary (function of COMPILE command), runs the linking loader,
and loads the .REL files generated. The language translator used
is determined by the source file extension or by switches in the
command string.
(Refer to the COMPILE command.) If a REL file
already exists with a more recent date than that of the source
file, compilation is not performed
(unless requested via a
switch) .
This command generates a core image but does not begin execution.
At this point, you can start your program or save the core image
for future execution.
Each time the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command is
executed,
the command with its arguments is remembered in a
temporary file on disk, or in core if the monitor has the TMPCOR
feature.
Therefore,
issuing one of these commands without any
arguments causes the arguments saved in the temporary file to be
reusc~d.
(Refer to Section 1.5.)
The LOAD command accepts several command constructions:
the @
construction
(indirect commands),
the + construction,
the
construction, and the < > construction.
(Refer to Section 1.5
for a complete description of each of these constructions.)
CODlmand F()rmat
LOAD list
list is a single file specification or a string of file
specifications separated by commas. A file specification
consists of a device name, a file name with or without an
extension,
and
a directory name.
(Refer to Section
1.4.2.4.)
The following switches can be used to modify the command
string.
These switches can be temporary or permanent
(Refer to Section 1.5.5.)
switches unless stated otherwise.
Switch

Meaning

IALGOL

Compile the file with ALGOL.
Assumed
files with the extension of .ALG.

for

IBIN

file
Generate a binary file
for
each
compiled.
The name for the binary file
for
follows
standard
conventions
the
determining the name of the output file.
(Refer to Sections 1.5.2 and 1.5.3.) The
extension is .REL.
This is the default
action.

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command
before running the appropriate language translator and linking loader.
2-127

LOAD Command (Cont.)
Switch

Meaning

/BLISS 1

Compile the file with BLISIO.
Assumed for
files with the extension of .BIO and .BLI.

/COBOL

Compile the file with COBOL.
Assumed
files with the extension of .CBL.

/COMPILE

Force a compilation of this file even if a
binary file exists with a newer date and time
than the source file. This switch is used to
obtain an extra compilation (e.g., in order
to obtain a listing of the compilation)
because,
normally,
compilation
is .not
performed if the binary file is newer than
the source file.

/CREF

Produce a cross-reference listing file on the
disk
for
each file compiled for later
processing by the CREF program.
The file
name
for
the listing file follows the
standard conventions for determining the name
of the output file.
(Refer to Sections 1.5.2
and 1.5.3.) The extension is .CRF. The files
can then be listed with the CREF command.
However,
with
COBOL
files,
the
cross-referenced listing is always appended
to the listing file. No additional command
need be given to obtain the listing.

/FOROTS

Load the file with FOROTS
object-time system).

(the

new

FORTRAN

/FORSE

Load the file with FORSE
object-time system).

(the

old

FORTRAN

/FORTRAN

Compile the file with a FORTRAN compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension of .F4
and .FOR and all files with nonrecognizable
translator
extensions if FORTRAN is the
standard translator. This switch is needed
if the file has a nonrecognizable translator
extension and FORTRAN is not the standard
translator or is not the current default
(e.g., LOAD/COBOL, TEXTl, TEXT2, TEXT3/FOR).

/FUDGE

Create a disk file containing the names of
the
.REL files produced by the command
string. When the FUDGE command is given, PIP
reads this file in order to generate a
library REL file.
(Refer to the MAKLIB
Program
description.) Arguments
to
the
switch are:

for

/FUDGE:dev:file.ext[proj,prog]
dev: - the device on which to write the
file.
If the device is omitted, DSK:
is assumed.

BLISIO will be recognized as a language translator only if the
appropriate assembly switch is set. However, this assembly switch
setting is not supported.
2-128

LOAD Command (Cont.)
Switch

Meaning
file.ext - the name of the library file.
The file name is required.
If the
extension is omitted, it is assumed to
be .REL.
[proj,prog] - the directory in which
place
the file.
Your directory
assumed if none is given.

to
is

This switch is permanent in the sense that it
pertains to all REL files generated by the
command string.
/FIO

Use the FORTRAN-IO compiler when compiling
the associated FORTRAN file.
This should be
used as a permanent switch because it is not
possible to load F40 and FORTRAN-IO binary
files together.

/F40

Use the F40 compiler when compiling the
associated FORTRAN file.
This is current
default action. This should be used as a
permanent switch because it is not possible
to load F40 and FORTRAN-IO binary files
together.

/KAIO
/KIIO

Designate the machine on which the program
will execute once it has been loaded.
These
switches are needed for FORTRAN-IO programs
because the compiler generates different code
for
the KAlO and KIlO processors.
The
default is the processor on the computer
executing the command.

/LIBRARY

Load the files in library search mode.
This
mode causes a program file in a special
library file to be loaded only if one or more
of its declared entry symbols satisfies an
undefined global request in the source file.
The default libraries are always searched.
(Refer
to
the
LOADER
and
LINK-IO
documentation.)

/LINK

Cause the file to be loaded by the LINK-IO
linking loader.
If used, this switch should
be placed before any file specifications
because
the COMPIL program may have to
generate load-control switches. This is the
current default action.

/LIST

Generate a disk listing file for each file
compiled. The file name for the listing file
follows
the
standard
conventions
for
determining the name of the output file.
(Refer to Sections 1.5.2 and 1.5.3.) The
extension is .LST. These files can be listed
later with the LST command.
If the line
printer is being spooled for this job, the
listing files are written on device LPT and
are automatically spooled at LOGOUT time.
Unless this switch is specified, listing
files are not generated.
2-129

LOAD Command (Cont.)
Switch

Meaning

/LMAP

Produce a loader map during the loading
process
(same action as /MAP) containing the
local symbols.

/LOADER

Cause the file to be loaded by the LOADER.

/MACRO

Assemble the file with MACRO.
files with extension of .MAC.

Assumed

for

/MACYll

Assemble the file with MACYll.
Assumed
files with an extension of .Pll.

for

/MANTIS

Compile the file with MANTIS.
This
affects F40 FORTRAN programs only.

/MAP

Produce a loader map during the loading
process.
When this switch is encountered, a
loader map is requested from the loader.
After the library search of the default
libraries, the map is written in your disk
area with either the file name specified by
you (e.g., /MAP:file)
or with the default
file name MAP.MAP if loading is performed by
LOADER or the file name nnnLNK.MAP if loading
is performed by LINK-IO. This switch is an
exception to the permanent compile switch
rule in that it causes only one ~ap to be
produced although it may
appear
as
a
permanent switch.

/NEW

/NOBIN

Do not generate binary files.
Unless this
switch is given, binary files are generated.
This switch, when combined with the /CREF or
/LIST
switch,
is useful when compiling
programs solely for the purpose of generating
listings.

/NOCOMPILE

Complement the /COMPILE switch by not forcing
a compilation on a source file whose date is
not as recent as the date on the binary file.
Note that this switch is not the same as the
/REL switch which turns off all compilation,
even if the source file is newer than the REL
file.
/NOCOMPILE is the default action.

/NOLIST

Do not generate listing files.
default action.

2-130

This

switch

the

LOAD Comnland (Cont.)
Switch

Meaning

/NOMANTIS

Compile the file without the MANTIS debugging
information.
This
switch
affects
F40
programs only.

/NOSEARCH

Load all routines of the file whether the
routines are referenced or not. Since this
is the default action, this switch is used
only
to
turn
off
libary search mode
(/LIBRARY). This is not equivalent to the /P
LOADER switch because /P does not search any
libraries where /NOSEARCH will scan
the
default libraries.

/OLD

Run the uppropriate language translator from
the system library of old programs (device
OLD:) that resides on the disk area
[1,3].
If the translator does not exist on device
OLD:, try to obtain it from device SYS:.
(Refer to the following NOTE, after /SYS.)

/REL

Ode the existing .REL files although a
source file may be present.

/SEARCH

The action is identical
/LIBRARY switch.

/SELF

Run the appropriate language translator from
device DSK:
instead of from the system
library (device SYS:). This switch is useful
for anyone who keeps a private copy of a
translator in his own disk area.
System
programmers occasionally keep experimental
versions of standard translators in their
disk area in order to test new features.
(Refer to the following NOTE, after /SYS.)

/SNOBOL 1

Compile the file with SNOBOL.
Assumed
files with an extension of .SNO.

/SYS

Run the appropriate language translator from
the system library (device SYS:) area [1,4].
This is the default action.

that

newer
of

the

for

NOTE
Once a language translator has been
specified from a particular area (e.g.,
/SELF),
it cannot be called from a
different area within the same command
string. The following is illegal:
.LOAD ITEM.CBL/SYS.ITEM02.CBL/SELF
However, the following is valid:
.COMPIL ITEM.CBL/SYS
.COMPIL ITEM02.CBL/SELF
.LOAD /REL ITEM, ITEM02
SNOBOL will be recognized as a language translator only if the
appropriate switch is set. However, this assembly switch setting is
not supported.
2-131

LOAD Command (Cont.)
Characteristics
The LOAD command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the appropriate language translator and linking loader,
thereby destroying your original core image.
Examples
.1...0(\1:1 TEnT..)
t"j(\CF;~O Z

TEST

I...O()DING
I...OI~DEr~

21\

COI:~E

EXIT

2-132

LOCATE Command

Function
The LOCATE command logically establishes your job at a specified
network node.
When your job is initiated, your logical station
corresponds to your physical location. Therefore,
this command
is needed only if you wish to change your logical node/station.
The main use of this command is to change the default device list
of the job.
For example,
if you wish to have the devices at
remote station CHRIS perform all I/O, you can issue the following
command:
.LOCATE CHRIS
and the default I/O devices will be those on node CHRIS.
Command Format
LOCATE node-id
node-id is the logical identifier of the node upon which you
wish to be located.
An argument of 0 locates the job at the node where the job's
command
decoder
is.
A
null
argument implies the
node/station of
your
terminal,
i.e.,
his
physical
node/station.
Characteristics
The LOCATE command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Is valid only in networks or in systems
station.

with

Restricti.ons
The LOCATE command must specify a node/station that is
in contact with the command decoder node/station.
Examples
.. LOCATE 2..)
.I...OC~../

2-133

remote

currently

Function
The LOGIN command is used to gain access to the system.
LOGIN
loads a Monitor Support program that accepts your project and
programmer numbers followed by your password.
To LOGIN,
type
these numbers, then wait for the system to print PASSWORD:.
Then
type your password, which is not echoed.
The numbe~s and
password that you type must match those stored in the system
accounting file (SYS:ACCT.SYS).
LOGIN waits two minutes for your
response to PASSWORD:
before printing an error message, killing
your job, and asking you to start over.
Command Format
LOGIN "proj,prog" /switch or
LOGIN [proj,prog] /switchl/switch2
The notation proj,prog stands for your project-programmer
numbers.
These may be separated by either a comma or a
slash.
If you use a slash, you do not receive the daily
message
unless
the
date of the file containing it
(NOTICE.TXT) is later than the last date that you logged in.
If it is later, the system prints the daily message on the
first login only.
If you use a comma, you receive the
message regardless of your last login time. The notation
[path spec] represents your default path for disk I/O when
you are logged in.
If it is the same as your proj,prog
numbers, you may omit it. One example of a path spec is
[35,3572,FOOBAR,STUFF]. You may type the proj,prog argument
on the same line as the LOGIN command:
if, however, you
type a carriage return after LOGIN, you may type the
argument on the next line after the system prints the number
sign (#).
The following switches can be used to modify the
string. These switches may also be in SWITCH.INI.

command

Most parameters set by these switches can be changed after
login by the appropriate monitor commands.
(See for example
the SET commands and R SETSRC.)
Switch

Meaning

/ALTMODE

converts the ALTmode codes of 175 and
176
(sent by some terminals to the
system) to 033, the ASCII standard code
for
the ESCape character.
(Normally,
however, your terminal is initially set
to send the 033 code.)

/NOALTMODE

restores the individual identity of
codes 175 and 176.

/BLANK

restores your terminal's characteristic
(usually part of its initial setting) of
printing carriage return/line feeds and
form feeds at specified points in a
program (before and after a DIR list,
for example).

2-134

the

Meaning

/NOBLANK

suppresses blank
lines
(consecutive
carriage return/line feeds after the
first)
and outputs form
feeds
and
vertical
tabs
as
two
carriage
return/line feeds.
If your terminal is
a video type, you can use this switch to
increase the screen's
capacity
for
output.

/CORE:nP

tells the system that the job may use
maximum of n 512-word pages.

/CORE:nK

tells the system that the job may use
maximum of n l024-word blocks.

/CRLF

restores the execution
of
a
free
carriage
return/line
feed
at
the
terminal's right margin. Normally,
the
/CRLF condition is an initial setting.

/NOCRLF

suppresses the execution of a carriage
return/line feed at the terminal's right
margin.

/DEBREAK

tells the system that your terminal has
a feature that allows the computer to
lock the keyboard.
(This feature exists
only in Model 2741 terminals.)

/NODEBREAK

turns off the DEBREAK switch.

/DSKFUL:ERROR

causes a full disk to stop output and
passes
an
error
condition to the
program.
Most programs respond to this
condition by issuing an error message
and returning the job to monitor level
without giving you a chance to continue.
The default setting is ERROR unless
specified as PAUSE.

/DSKFUL:PAUSE

causes a full disk to stop output and
suspends execution of the program. The
system prints an error message on your
terminal and returns control of the job
to the monitor. To request assistance
from the operator, you may issue the
SEND command.
To resume
execution,
however, you may issue a CONTINUE. The
program will resume as long as you do
not issue a command that destroys the
interrupted program's core image.
The
program will be stopped again, however,
if the problem of insufficient disk
space, or of an exceeded quota, has not
been corrected in the interim.
The
default
setting
is
ERROR
unless
specified as PAUSE.

2-135

Meaning

/DSKPRI:n

allows a privileged user to set the
priority for his job's disk operations
(data transfers and head positionings).
Because the normal timesharing priority
is 0, and permissible values range from
3 to +3, the priority n can be higher or
lower than standard.
The
specified
priority
applies
to
all disk I/O
channels opened whose priority is not
explicitly set with a DISK monitor call.
(See
DECsystem-lO
Monitor
Calls
Manual.)
The
priority
specified in
DSKPRI remains in effect until 1) a SET
DSKPRI command with a different priority
is issued, 2) a KJOB command is issued,
or 3) your program overrides the /DSKPRI
switch by issuing a DISK monitor call
with a different priority. Restrictions
are as follows:
the privileges required
for using this switch are determined by
bits 1 and 2 of the privilege word,
.GTPRV;
these two bits specify an octal
number from 0-3; you are always allowed
a 0 priority.

/ECHO

restores the normal echoing of each
character typed in. Most terminals on
the DECsystem-lO are used in full-duplex
mode.
In
this
mode,
the monitor
normally transmits to the terminal those
characters that are to be printed;
this
process is called "echoing." If your
terminal prints nC when you type it, but
none of the other normally printing
characters when you type them, you can
use this switch to establish normal
echoing.
(The
initial
setting is
determined by each installation when the
monitor is built and its characteristics
set. )

/NOECHO

suppresses monitor echoing of
input
characters. Local copy terminals (i.e.,
terminals that automatically print each
character as you type it) do not require
normal monitor echoing,
because
the
echoing would cause each character typed
to be printed twice.
This
switch,
therefore, should be used to stop double
printing of each character typed on a
local
copy
terminal.
(The initial
setting
is
determined
by
each
installation when its monitor is built.)

/FILL:n

tells the system that the filler class n
is assigned to your terminal.
Many
different
types
of
terminals
are
supported by the DECsystem-lO operating
system. Some terminals require one or
more
filler
characters to be sent
following certain control
characters
such
as
LF
(line
feed)
and HT
2-136

Meaning
(horizontal tab). The filler characters
are CR
(215 octal for even parity) for
carriage return characters
(CR,
215
octal)
and DEL (RUBOUT, 377 octal) for
all other characters.
No fillers are
supplied for image mode output.
For the
number of
fillers
sent
for
each
character and filler class, refer to the
table included in SET TTY FILL and NO
FILL descr iptions in this manual.
(The
initial setting is determined by each
installation when its monitor is built.)

/FORM

tells the system that your terminal has
hardware FORM
(PAGE)
and VT (vertical
tab) characters, thereby allowing you to
use
them.
(The initial setting is
determined by each installation when its
monitor is built.)

/NOFORM

tells the system that your terminal does
not
have
hardware
FORM
and
VT
characters, thereby causing the monitor
to simulate them by sending eight line
feeds for a FORM and four for a VT.
(The initial setting is determined by
each installation when its monitor
is
built. )

/GAG

allows your terminal to receive SEND
messages,
but only at monitor level.
Normally,
the /GAG condition is
an
initial setting.

/NOGAG

allows your terminal to receive SEND
messages even when it is not at monitor
level.

/GUIDELINE

specifies that the numeric value cited
in the /PHYSICAL switch is a guideline.
If not issued, /GUIDELINE is assumed;
it is the default setting for /PHYSICAL.

/LC

tells the system that your terminal has
lowercase
characters,
and therefore
prevents their translation to uppercase.

/NOLC

causes
the
monitor
to
translate
lowercase characters to uppercase as
they are received.
Some terminals have
only uppercase characters, while others
have both upperacase and
lowercase.
Frequently,
it is convenient to have a
terminal with both cases simulate the
behavior of one with uppercase only.
/NOLC causes this
simulation.
The
monitor's echo always matches the case
of the characters after translation.
By
looking
at
the
printout, you can
determine what translation the monitor
has
performed.
Normally,
the /NOLC
condition is an initial setting.
2-137

Meaning

ILIB: [proj , prog]

sets your job's library directory to the
UFO
[proj,prog] and adds it to your OSK
specification. Consequently, a library
area is set up to be searched.
(See
SETSRC, in this chapter.)

INOLIB

removes the library directory
from your OSK specification.

ILIMIT

specifies that the numeric value cited
in the IPHYSICAL switch is a limit
rather than a guideline.
If ILl MIT is
not issued, the system assumes that the
numeric value given for the IPHYSICAL
switch is a guideline.

ILOCATE:n

logically establishes your job at a
specified station.
When the job is
initiated,
your
logical
station
corresponds to your physical station.
You will need this switch,
therefore,
only in changing your logical station.
When issuing the switch, type n to be
the desired station number.

INAME:name or
INAME:"name"

associate the given name with your job.
This name will appear on QUEUE'd output
listings and on other information output
by the system.
The name should be
enclosed
in
quotes if it contains
punctuation characters.
(This switch
most commonly applies to BATCON version
12 and SPRINT version 2.)

INEW

tells the system to
add
the
NEW
directory to your SYS specification. As
in
a result of this switch, the system,
conducting a search for any program or
file, will first check the experimental
directory [1,5]. The default setting is
INONEW.

INONEW

removes the [1,5] directory
your
SYS specification.
default setting for INEW.

INOTE:filespec.

prints the specified file,
using the
NOTICE.TXT logic.
That is, it must be
followed by the file name and extension.
It is useful for printing a project
notice that is being kept in a library
area.
For example, NOTE:*.TXT[33,437]
will type all files with the extension
.TXT.
If the login project number is
separated from the programmer number by
a slash (I) instead of a comma (,), the
files will be typed only if they were
created after the last login.

2-138

(LIB:)

(NEW)
from
It is the

Switch
/PAGE

enables you to
temporarily
suspend
system typeout without losing it. /PAGE
causes this condition by turning on two
features:
the XOFF key
(~S),
which
suspends the typeout, and the XON key
(A Q), which restores it. These keys are
neither echoed nor sent to your program.
This switch is useful if you are using a
video terminal and wish to read a page
of text before it moves off the screen.
Note that this switch preempts the use
of -S and -Q for reading paper tape.
(See /TAPE.)

/NOPAGE

disables the typeout control functions
of the XOFF and XON keys. The current
interpretation of these keys depends on
the last /TAPE issued.
Normally, the
/NOPAGE condition is an initial setting.

/PHYSICAL:nP

specifies the maximum current physical
page limit (CPPL;
see Chapter 1 of the
Monitor Commands Manual).
Because P
stands
for
"pages," the notation n
represents the maximum number of pages.
IP,
therefore, would set a limit of one
512-word page. This switch is used only
on virtual memory systems. The value
that it specifies will be either a
PHYSICAL GUIDELINE or a PHYSICAL LIMIT,
depending
on
whether
you
type
/PHYSICAL:nP/GUIDELINE
or
/PHYSICAL:nP/LIMIT.
If
you
type
neither, /GUIDELINE is assumed.

/PHYSICAL:nK

specifies the number of blocks (K)
used
as the maximum current physical page
limit;
lK would set a limit of one
l024-word block.
This switch is used
only on virtual memory systems.
The
value that it specifies will be either a
PHYSICAL GUIDELINE or a PHYSICAL LIMIT,
depending
on
whether
you
type
/PHYSICAL:nP/GUIDELINE
or
/PHYSICAL:nP/LIMIT.
If
you
type
neither, /GUIDELINE is assumed.

/QUOTA:str or
/QUOTA: (strl, ... )

recomputes disk usage on all specified
file structures.
If none is specified,
usage
is
recomputed
on
all file
structures in your search list.

/RCVSPEED:n

sets to n baud the speed
system receives.

/RUN:filespec

will run the specified
another is designated
manager.

program
by the

/SCAN

sets the scan switch for
the directory
pa th.
(See SETSRC, in th i s chapte r . )

2-139

which

the

unless
system

Meaning

/NOSCAN

cancels the
scan
directory path.

/SETTTY

tells the system that your directory has
a SWITCH.INI file that contains LOGIN
followed by one or more switches that
designate
characteristics
of
your
terminal only (for example: LOGIN /FORM
/NOBLANK /SETTTY WIDTH:36).
/SETTTY,
therefore, causes the settings in this
file
to
supersede
their
monitor
counterp~rts.
The /SETTTY condition is
the default setting.

/NOSETTTY

tells the system not to change any of
your
terminal's
characteristics
as
designated in the monitor or in any SET
TTY commands you have have issued before
logging in.

/SPEED:n

sets to n baud the speed at which the
system sends and receives.
(You can
adjust your terminal's speed by setting
its baud knob or button.)

/SPOOL:dev or
/SPOOL: (devl, ... )
or
/SPOOL:ALL

adds the specified device(s)
to the
current list of those spooled for the
job. Spooling is the mechanism by which
I/O to or from slow-speed devices is
simulated on disk.
Data temporarily
stored on disk can be automatically
output on the specified device when it
becomes available. These devices can be
spooled:
the line printer (LPT), the
card punch (CDP), the card reader (CDR),
the paper-tape punch
(PTP),
and the
plotter (PLT).

/STR

causes all files in the standard system
library
[1,4] with name .STR.TXT to be
typed on your terminal.
Assume,
for
example, that there is a file on private
structure "PR" called PRLSTR.TXT
[1,4]
which says:
"PR: PAYROLL DEBUG PACK -NOT REAL DATA". Any user who logged in
with /STR (or had /STR in his SWITCH.INI
file) would have the warning message
typed on his terminal.

/NOSTR

inhibits the printing of SYS:STR.TXT

/SYS

adds the SYS specification to your DSK
specification.
Consequently, if a file
is not found in the directories on your
search list or in your library directory
(if
/LIB
[proj,prog]
has
been
specified),
the system directory [1,4]
will then be searched for the file.

/NOSYS

removes the SYS specification from
DSK specification.

2-140

switch

for

the

your

Meaning

/TABS

tells the system that your terminal has
hardware TAB stops every eight columns,
to
use
this
thereby allowing you
feature.
(The
initial
setting is
determined by each installation when its
monitor is built.)

/NOTABS

tells the system that your terminal does
not have hardware TAB stops, thereby
causing the monitor to simulate them by
sending the necessary amount of SPACE
characters.

/TAPE

allows your terminal to start and stop
reading paper tape.
/TAPE establishes
this function by enabling the XON key
(-Q)
to start the reading process, and
the XOFF key
(-S)
to stop it.
(See
Chapter
5
of
DECsystem-lO Monitor
Calls. )

/NOTAPE

disables the special paper tape function
of the XON and XOFF keys. These keys
may have a PAGE function independent of
/TAPE or /NOTAPE. Normally, the /NOTAPE
condition is an initial setting.

/TIME:n

sets a central processor time limit of n
seconds for a job. When the time limit
is reached, the system stops the job and
prints a message. A timesharing job may
be continued by typing CaNT, but unless
the time is reset via the SET TIME
command, no time limit will be
in
effect.
A
batch
job
cannot
be
continued.

/VIRTUAL:n

specifies the current
virtual
page
limit, as represented by n.
(For a
description of CVPL, see Chapter 1 of
the
Monitor
Commands
Manual.)
In
/VIRTUAL:nK and :nP, K represents a
block,
and P a page;
lK equals 1024
words, and IP, 512 words.
If you type
neither letter, K is assumed.
K may be
specified within the range 1 to 512P.
If
/VIRTUAL:n
is issued with a 0
argument, the value of CVPL, as set by
the system administrator, is used.

/WATCH: (arg (1) ,
arg(2), ... arg(n))

sets the system to print the specified
file
incremental
job
statistics
automatically.
Thus,
it provides you
with
a
tool
for
measuring
the
performance
of
your programs.
For
example, you may type a line that reads
/WATCH:READ or /WATCH:RUN or /WATCH:WAIT
or /WATCH:DAY or
/WATCH:VERSION
or
/WATCH:NONE
or /WATCH:MTA or /WATCH
followed by any combination of these
arguments in parentheses and separated
by commas.
To
include
all
these
arguments, type /WATCH:ALL.
2-141

Meaning

/NOWATCH

inhibits the printing of incremental job
statistics.

/WIDTH

sets to n the carriage width (the point
at which a
free carriage return is
inserted).
The range of n is 17
(two
TAB stops) to 200 decimal.
Normally, n
is initially set to 72.

/XMTSPEED:n

sets to n baud the speed
system sends.

which

the

Characteristics
The LOGIN command:
Returns your terminal to monitor mode or
running if specified in

starts

program

ACCT.SYS entry for proj,prog.
Runs the LOGIN program.
Example
The following is the procedure used to gain access to the system .
• L.OGIN
,JOB 29
:0:2"7 Sf 4662

SCLIKA KL10 SYSil026 TTY250
LOGIN types your assigned job number
(job number 29),
followed by monitor
name, version number, and console line
number.
If
you do not type your
project-programmer number on the same
line as the LOGIN command, LOGIN outputs
a number sign indicating that you should
type your project-programmer number.
System requests you
to
type
your
password.
You type password, followed
by a carriage return (refer to Section
1.4.2.1).
To
maintain
password
security, the monitor does not echo the
password.
On terminals with local-copy
(refer to DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls), a
mask
is typed to make the password
unreadable.

14~:i9

1 "7-·AI..I~.~·-·"7"7

~J(-:·~d

If your entries are correct, the system
responds with time,
date,
day of the
week, the message of the day
(if any),
and a period,
indicating readiness to
accept another command.

2-142

MAKE Command

Function
The MAKE command creates a new file on the disk with TECO
(Text
Editor and Corrector).
If a file already exists with the same
name, the system prints a warning message and supersedes the
file,
if you continue in TECO.
If you type two CTRL/Cs to leave
TECO, the system will not destroy the file.
(Refer to the TECO
manual in the OECsystem-10 Software Notebooks.)
Command Format
MAKE dev:file.ext[project,programmer]
dev:
is the device or file structure name on which the
system creates the file.
If you omit it, the system assumes
OSK.
file.ext is any legal file name
The file name
is required;
optional.

and
the

file name extension.
file name extension is

[project,programmer] is the directory area in which the
system creates the file.
If you omit the project-programmer
number argument- the system assumes your default directory
area
(i.e., your project-programmer number).
Note that the
default directory may be an SFO or some other UFO.
You can pass switches to TECO when you precede the switch
with a slash in the MAKE command string. When COMPIL
interprets the command string, it passes the switch to TECO.
Characteristics
The MAKE command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Runs the TECO program, destroying your core image.
Example
~MAKE

TEST3.MIC

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the commands
before running TECO.

2-143

MOUNT Command

Function
The MOUNT command allows you to request assignment of a device
via the operator. This command is similar to the ASSIGN command,
but, whereas the ASSIGN command operates without
operator
interaction, the MOUNT command requests operator interaction when
necessary.
For example, if a batch job requests a DECtape drive
and all drives are in use, then the operator can free one for
you, if you wish.
With this command you can request devices from
the restricted pool of devices, which you cannot do with the
ASSIGN command.
The MOUNT command gives the operator control over the assignment
of devices on the system. When you request a device via this
command, the operator has the option of selecting a specific unit
(e.g.,
DTA5),
or deferring your
request,
or canceling your
request completely.
For example, all units of this type are in
use and the operator does not want to free one for you.
The
operator may also mount the medium for the requested unit if it
is sufficiently identified
(e.g.,
a deck of cards in the card
reader or an identified DECtape on a specific drive).
When you issue the MOUNT command to gain access to a file
structure, you can specify a particular drive, and, if desired,
place the file structure name at the end of your
job's search
list and wait for
completion of operator action.
Each file
structure can have an administrative file,
QUOTA.-SYS, which
contains a
list of quotas for all users allowed to access the
structure.
(Quotas for the structures in your default search
list
are contained in the file SYS:AUXACC.SYS.)
When the
operator mounts a file structure, the system creates a UFD for
you
if you have an entry in the file structure's QUOTA.SYS or in
SYS:AUXACC.SYS.
The MOUNT command runs the UMOUNT program in your core area.
UMOUNT scans the command string and completes as much of the
command as possible without operator intervention. When operator
intervention is required, UMOUNT queues a request to the OMOUNT
program by writing a command file in the [3,3] disk area.
OMOUNT
examines these command files and interacts with the operator.
When you delete the command file, the operator action has been
completed.
UMOUNT waits for this completion of operator action
unless you have specified /NOWAIT or you type two CTRL/Cs.
When
you
type
two CTRL/Cs,
you do not receive a message of
confirmation, but you can later use the /CHECK switch to see if
your request is still pending.
(See the examples.)
To insure validity of any tape error analysis,
you should use
MOUNT/DISMOUNT to acquire and release magtape units.
This
mechanism provides the basis for all
media-related
error
reporting.
Command Format
MOUNT dev:logical-name/switches(drives)
dev:

is one of the following:

A physical or generic device
MTA)

2-144

name

(e.g.,

DTA3,

CDRD,

MOUNT Command (Cont.)
2.

A logical name you previously associated with a physical
device by either a MOUNT or an ASSIGN command

A file structure name (one that is already
one whose name appears on STRLST.SYS)

A spooled device name (e.g., LPT, PTP),
devices are spooled

NUL:. This argument is required except when specifying
one of the following switches:
/CHECK, /HELP, or /WAIT.
If you issue a MOUNT command for one drive (e.g., MTA1)
and the operator selects another drive for you (e.g.,
MTA2) , then the system gives the logical name of MTAl to
the physical drive
(MTA2) so that batch control files
that reference MTAl will work correctly.

mounted

assuming

these

Logical-name is any SIXBIT name. The logical name may be a
previously assigned name.
If your request in which this
name appeared has been processed, then MOUNT transfers the
name from the previously assigned device to the device in
this MOUNT command.
If the previous request has not been
processed at the time you specify the logical name again,
then MOUNT creates a unique logical name of the form
"Mnnnnn" instead of transferring the name from one physical
device to another.
It is recommended that you supply a
logical name with any non-disk MOUNT request, because when
you use generic device names, the logical name is the only
way for you to know what physical device has been assigned
by the operator.
If you omit this field,
UMOUNT either
creates a unique logical name of the form "Mnnnnn" or it
uses the physical device name.
UMOUNT creates a unique
logical name if you specify a generic device or if you
specify a physical device that already has its name assigned
as a physical or logical name by your job. UMOUNT uses the
physical device name as a logical name in cases where you
specify a specific device and the name is not already
assigned as either a physical or logical name.
You can use switches to further describe the device to be
mounted
or the requested action.
These switches are
optional unless otherwise indicated in the individual switch
descriptions.
The system processes the switches in the
order you specify. Therefore, if there are any conflicting
switches,
the system uses the last one scanned in the
command line.
(An exception tot his is the use of the /WAIT
and /NOWAIT switches within a single command string.
If you
specify both switches together, a fatal error results.)
You
may abbreviate the switch names to as few characters as are
necessary to make the switch unique.
/ACTIVE

Mount the disk in your active search list.
This means that the structure becomes part of
generic DSK:
and the system automatically
searches
it.
(Refer
to
the
SETSRC
command.)
/ACTIVE is the default condition.

/PASSIVE

Mount the disk in your passive search list.
The disk is not considered part of generic
DSK:
and is not automatically searched;
rather,
it is merely available for use.
(Refer to the SETSRC command.)

2-145

MOUNT Command (Cont.)
/CHECK

Check and list your
job's pending MOUNT
requests.
This switch is intended to be used
by itself with the MOUNT command,
and
if a
device specification or other switches appear
in the command string with the /CHECK switch,
the system ignores them.
NOTE
/C is a valid abbreviation of /CHECK.
Therefore, if /CREATE is desired, you
must type at least "/CR".

/CREATE

Permit creation of files on this structure,
default condition.
Specification of this
switch implies that /ACTIVE is in effect.
(Refer to the SETSRC command.)

/NOCREATE

Prohibit creation of files on this structure
when DSK:
is specified or implied.
Files
may be created on this structure if you
explicitly use its name in the command line.
Specification of this switch implies that
/ACTIVE is in effect.
(Refer to the SETSRC
command. )

/HELP

Type out a brief description of the MOUNT
command.
This switch is intended to be used
by itself with the MOUNT command,
and if a
device specification or other switches appear
in the command string with the /HELP switch,
they are ignored.

/MULTI

Allow multiple access, disk only, opposite of
/SINGLE.
/MULTI is the default condition.

/PAUSE

Notify you (to give you an opportunity to
cancel the request) before queuing the mount
request to the operator.

/REELID:name

A reel identification to be
used
when
requesting a magnetic tape to be mounted.
The argument, "name," is a 6-characte'r ASCII
string that is used to uniquely identify a
reel of magnetic tape.
This identification
is included in any system-generated error or
status reports about the drive while the reel
is mounted.
This switch is required when
requesting magnetic tapes to be mounted.

/RONLY

Read only, same as /WLOCK.

/SHOVE

Force the mount request to the operator
if SCHED 400 is set.

/NOSHOVE

Do not force
operator even
condition.

/SINGLE

Prohibit access to this structure by other
users.
You must be in the same project as
2-146

even

the mount request to
the
if SCHED 400 is set, default

MOUNT Command (Cont.)
the owner of the pack to be allowed single
access.
File protection is enforced for you.
This switch is applicable only to disk mount
requests.
/VID:text

A visual identification describing the volume
(DECtape,
card deck,
etc.) to be passed to
the operator. This switch is required in
MOUNT requests for DECtapes and for all
input-only devices.
The "text" can be up to 50 characters in
length.
For DECtapes,
the text is the
DECtape number, e.g., /VID:1326.
If the tape
is not numbered or if you do not wish to have
the number checked, you must describe the
tape by enclosing the "text ll in single or
double quotation marks.
For example.
MOUNT
DTA:/VID:IIFRIDAY'S
[13,2652]"

FAILSAFE

FOR

For input-only devices, the text should be
description of the input.
For example.
MOUNT
CDR:/VID:"PLEASE
CARD-DECK: 'COBOL SOURCE'"

LOAD

THE

BLUE

Unquoted
strings
may
contain
only
alphanumeric
characters,
periods,
and
hyphens.
In quoted strings,
the quotation
marks are included in the 50 characters.
/WAIT

Wait before continuing with your
job when
operator intervention is required.
When this
switch is used in a command with a device
specification and other switches, your job
will wait for the request to be completed.
When this switch is used alone (MOUNT/WAIT),
your job will not continue until all of your
pending requests have been processed. This
format is useful only if a MOUNT dev:/NOWAIT
was done previously or if you have typed two
CTRL/Cs.
In either
case,
the
message
IIWaiting •.. Type 2 CTRL-Cs to Exit ll is typed
on your terminal.
/WAIT is the default
condition.
NOTE
/W is a valid abbreviation of /WAIT.

/NOWAIT

Do not wait if the operator intervention is
needed to process your pending requests.
This switch is particularly advantageous when
running batch jobs.
In timesharing jobs the
use of the /NOWAIT switch merely saves you
from typing two CTRL/Cs (~C~C).

/WENABL

Permit writing for your
job.
default condition for disk.

2-147

This

the

MOUNT Command (Cont.)
/WLOCK

Prohibit writing for your job. Your job may
not write on this device or file structure
and the monitor will not update BAT blocks or
the access date.
If you specify /SINGLE ,
the operator may set hardware write-lock to
ensure that nothing is written.
In addition,
the write-status of all tapes is verified so
you
must
specify
the correct setting.
Hardware write-status is not checked for disk
and a
[1,2] job may write on a disk mounted
with /WLOCK, so care should be taken if you
are
[1,2]
and do not wish to write on the
disk.
/WLOCK is the default for magnetic
tape and DECtape.

/WRITE:NO

Same as /WLOCK. Permit writing.
default condition for disks.

/WRITE:YES

Same as /WENABL.
Prohibit writing.
the default condition for tapes.

This is the
This

(drives) are the physical drives on which the units are to
be mounted. A drive argument may be used only when mounting
file structures. The drives must be in the logical unit
order within the file structure. Drive names are separated
by commas.
Leading and embedded drives that are not
specified must be represented by null names
("OPS3).
Unspecified trailing drives may be omitted. Orive names are
as follows:
Blank, null - unspecified, UMOUNT finds one of proper type.
Two letters - controller class (e.g., OP).
Three letters - specific controller
finds drive on that controller.

(e.g.,

DPA).

Three letters and one or two digits - specific drive
OPAO, OPAl).

UMOUNT
(e.g.,

By specifying a drive list, you may only suggest that the
packs be mounted on specific drive,s or controllers.
If you
do not specify a drive, the system finds an available drive
of the proper type.
if you specify a drive incorrectly for
the named structure, or the drive is unavailable, you are
informed and the requests are then queued.
Characteristics
The MOUNT command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Runs the UMOUNT program, destroying your core image.

Examples
• MOUNT MTA F(:)JLSA/I:~EEI...ID: 456/VID: "THUr~f:)r:r(:)Y'" S FI~IL..~:)f:) TAPE FDI:;~ DSI\(:) n..J
HEC~UEnT

C~UEUED

WAITING ••• 2
"'C
"'C

~C'S

TO EXIT

2-148

MOUNT Command (Cont.)
This MOUNT command requests that the operator mount the magnetic
tape
identified
as
"Thursday's
FAILSA
for DSKA." This
identification is accomplished either by a label affixed to the
reel or canister or by an understanding between the operator and
the requesting user. The /REELID switch specifies that the tape
is to be identified as reel number 456 in all error reports.
In
order to associate the error reports with the reel on which the
errors occurred, it is recommended that a label bearing the reel
identification be attached to the tape reel.
This command also
specifies that the logical name FAILSA is to be associated with
the physical drive on which the reel is mounted .
• t1 0 UNT tit T (.'1 :I. / F: EEL I D : :I. 2:3 / IJ I D P (I 'j' ,;:~ 01... 1... t'l A~3 T E r::
II

r~EnU!::ST

..J

(~UEUED

WAITING ••• 2

~CS TO EXIT
MTA MOUNTED. MTB:l.O:l. USED

• SYSTI~T ..J
2-4--- lO l' 40?2 TTY:I.:I.
$

SYSTAT

12+SPY

MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE

,.JOB

t1TB:1. 0 :1.

(,.IHY

LOGICAl. .
~·lTA:l.O:I.

This MOUNT command asks the operator to mount a magnetic tape
with a REELID of 123 and the external label "PAYROLL MASTER" on
MTAI. The operator was unable to use MTAI so he selected MTBI
instead.
However, OMOUNT assigned the logical name MTAI to the
physical device MTBI. This feature is especially useful in batch
control files and allows you to continue to refer to the tape as
MTAI.
oi10UNT BI...I', C/NOI."I()I T..J
r~[nUE~:;T

OI..JE:UED

TI]

NOUN',!" UN I TE;

This MOUNT command asks the operator to mount the file structure
BLKC:.
You want to return to monitor command level after the
request is queued, without waiting for the operator to service
the request .
., ~inUNT
F~E(~UEST

DTI~/\·I I D: :I. ~?::;)4 ~

(~UEUED

WAITING ••• 2

~C/S

TO EXIT

''''C
''''C

Then you ask the operator to mount the DECtape labeled both
magnetically and externally, 1234. You did not specify /NOWAIT
so you received the "Waiting ..• 2 ~Cs to Exit" message.
However,
you decided not to wait and returned to monitor command level by
typing two CTRL/Cs.
ol'10UNT

BTA/VI D: ~:56/n...J

ro:E(~UEST

OUEUFD
t,J A I TIN G. • • 2 ,., C'S T (] E XI T
DTA MOUNTED, DTA:l.Ol USED.

2-149

MOUNT COlnmand (Cont.)
Next, you request that the operator mount the DEC tape labeled
5678.
This time, you wait until the DECtape is mounted before
continuing with your job. You are notified that the DECtape is
mounted on DTAI.
~ t··10UNT/CHECI<..J
1. M JOBS TTYI0S 10y4072 1 MOUNT DTA M44321 IV:1234 IWL /AFTER:14-MAR
""7~:.): :I. 7: 20
1 COMMAND IN QUEUE

The response from the MOUNT/CHECK command indicates which of your
requests have not been processed.
Because BLKC is not listed in
the queue,
that request has been serviced.
You can type
"RESOURCES" to see if the operator mounted the file structure.
The mount request for DEC tape 1234 is still pending.
/AFTER
indicates that the operator has deferred servicing this request
until 17:20 on 14-Mar-77. The last line indicates that the total
number of MOUNT requests pending for all users is one .

• MOUNT /~JA I T ~
WAITING ••• 2 ~C'S TO EXIT
You now decided to wait until all your pending requests have been
processed.
The line "Waiting ... 2 ~Cs to Exit" indicates that
UMOUNT is waiting .

• MOUNT/CHECI\..)
NONE PENDING FOR YOUR JOB
:I.
COMMAND IN QUEUE
Finally, you verified that all your requests have been processed.
Note that some other user has issued a MOUNT command since you
last issued the MOUNT/CHECK.

2-150

MTCOPY Program

Function
The MTCOPY program copies entrie contents of one magnetic tape to
another magnetic tape, or copies selected files from one magnetic
tape to another magnetic tape.
Command E"ormat
R M'l'COPY
*output MTA:/output switches

input MTA:/input switches

The file switches are:

/2
/5
/8
/A:n
/B:n
/E
/1
/R
/U

200 bits/inch
556 bits/inch
800 bits/inch
Advance n files before operation
Backspace n files before operation
Even parity
Industry-compatible mode
Rewind before and after operation (default)
Unload after operation

The general switches are:
/C:n
/C
/G
/H
/N
/V:n
/V

Copy n files (input only)
Copy to double EOF
Proceed on errors
Help
Suppress automatic rewinds
Verify n files
Verify to double EOF

Neither /C nor /V defaults to /C/V.
applies to both.

A count on either /C

The system preserves density across commands until you specify
that the tape 1S to be unloaded or rewound. /A, /B, and /N
suppress automatic /R. /R without /A or /B restores automatic
rewinds. Devices need not be reset for ne~ commands.
by

Spaces and tabs are ignored.
Comments are preceded
semicolon; switches may be included in parentheses.

Characteristics
The R MTCOPY command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Runs the MTCOPY program, destroying your core image.
Examples

+R NTCOPY....~

Run MTCOPY.

*MT('H: C/V/2:::MTA2: ~

Copy and verfiy a 200
from MTA1: to MTA2:.

*MTA2:/A:2/C:3/V:3-

Copy and verify files 3 to
to file 4 on MTA3:.

=~MTA3:~

*MT~)O: A: 4::::MTAO :~

Position MTAO:
fourth file.
2-151

to the

bits/inch
5

magtape

from

beginning

MTA2:
of

the

NODE Command

Function
The NODE command has four distinct functions, determined
number of arguments given in the command string.
Number of
Arguments

the

information

for

Function

Type out the node-id and related
each known node in the network.

Type out the node information of the specified node.

Assign the designated I/O device on the specified
node.
The logical device name is the same as the
physical device name.

Assign the designated I/O device on the specified
node.
The logical device name is the one given in
the command string.

Command Format
NODE node-id

physical-device-name logical-device-name

node-id is the node identifier of the node on which the device is
to be assigned.
physical-device-name is any physical device name followed by a Ito 3-digit number representing a unit number.
If you omit n, the
monitor attempts to assign any device of the designated type or
any file structure name.
logical-device-name is a logical name of up to six characters you
assign.
This argument is optional and if omitted, the logical
name will be the same as the physical name.
Except for disk
devices,
you can assign only one logical name to a physical
device. Subsequent NODE commands to all devices,
except disk
devices,
replace the old logical name with the new one.
You can
disassociate all logical names from all devices by issuing the
DEASSIGN command.
Characteristics
The NODE command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Restrictions
You must use a space, tab, or underscore to separate the node-id
and the physical device name.
You must use a space or a tab to
separate the physical and logical device names.
Examples
• NODE-/

NODE
NODE

KL1026(26)
SCLIZA KL10 SYS#1026 07-24-77
MCR[1] CDR[l] LPT[3] PTR[1] PTP[1] MTA[9] DTA[8] TSK[16J
CTCH22(22) DN82 Vl1(24) 07-JUN-77
TTY[33] CDREI] LPT[lJ

2-152

NSAVE Command

Function
The NSAVE command writes out a core image of your core area on
the specified device.
(Note that files on DECtape cannot be
NSAVED.) If the file to be saved is in .EXE format, only one file
will be written instead of the standard high and low files.
When
the program is subsequently loaded by a GET, R, or RUN command,
it will be nonsharable.
Command F'ormat
NSAVE dev:file.extension[proj,prog]core
Arguments and defaults are the same as in the aSAVE command.
Characteristics
The NSAVE command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.
Does not operate when a device is currently transmitting
data.
Ex:amples
,. NSf-I\.-'!::: TEST..}
TEST

Slf~VED

2-153

NSSAVE Command

Function
The NSSAVE command writes out a core image of your core area on
the specified device.
(Note that files on DECtape cannot be
NSSAVEd.) If the core image to be saved is in the new .EXE
format,
only one file will be written instead of the standard
high and low files.
When the program is subsequently loaded by a
GET, R, or RUN command, it will be sharable.
Command Format
NSSAVE dev:file.extension[proj,prog]core
Arguments and defaults are the same as in the OSAVE command.
Characteristics
The NSSAVE command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.
Does not operate when a device is currently transmitting
data.
Example

"NSSAVE TEBT..J
TEST SAVED

2-154

OPSER Program

Function
The OPSER program facilitates multiple job control from a
single
terminal by allowing you to run up to 14 jobs, called subjobs,
from your terminal.
The OPSER program acts as the supervisor of
the various subjobs by allowing monitor level or user level
commands to be passed to all of the subjobs or to selected
subjobs.
Output from the various subjobs may be retrieved by
OPSER.
The subjobs of OPSER run on pseudo-TTYs
(refer
to DECsystem-lO
Monitor Calls)
and all
initializations of the pseudo-TTYs are
performed by OPSER.
You need only to provide the subjob name and
either an OPSER-provided subjob number or a user assigned name.
System programs, as well as programs you write that require a
dedicated terminal can be run as subjobs of OPSER.
By running
jobs on pseudo-TTYs, OPSER is able to maintain an I/O link
between you and the running jobs.
In addition, the output from
the various subjobs is concentrated on one terminal
instead of
many,
as was the case when each program required its own
terminal.
The OPSER program is primarily intended for
use by the system
operator
in
controlling
the
separate components of the
multiprogram batch facility.
However, all users can employ this
program
for
their
own
purposes.
(Refer
to the OPSER
specification in the DECsystem-lO Software Notebooks and Appendix
A of the Operator's Guide for information on OPSER.)
C()mmand Format
R OPSER
OPSER signifies its readiness to process commands by typing
an asterisk if no subjobs are in use or subjobs are in a
wait state for an operator action.
OPSER responds with an
exclamation point when a subjob is running.
Commands may be
entered whenever OPSER is operating.
Each command is
preceded by a colon and must be typed to sufficient length
to make it unique.
OPSER Commands
Command
:AUTO/hh:mm

Meaning
Process the specified
file
as
an
automatic startup file.
The execution
of the file
1S
terminated
by
an
end-of-file or by the operator typing on
the console.
This is the normal way
that the standard subjobs are started by
the operator.
The time argument is
optional:
when it is given, the AUTO
file
is run at the specified time.
Comments can be included in an AUTO file
by preceding the
comments
with
a
semicolon.
For example,
:SLOGIN
:LOGIN A NEW SUBJOB

2-155

OPSER Program (Cont.)
OPSER Commands (Cont.)
Command

Meaning

: AUrrO/ >hhmm

Process the AUTO file
occurrence of hhmm.

:AUTO/ >hhmm

Don't process the AUTO file if
past hhmm.

time

:CLOSE

Close the disk log file without
a new one.

opening

:CONTINUE

Continue processing the AUTO file after
it has been interrupted by a Control-C.
This allows the operator to gain control
of a subjob during auto file processing.

: CURRENT

Type name, if defined;
otherwise,
type
the number of the current subjob (the
last one typed into).
Output
from
another subjob does not affect current
subjob.

:DAYTIME

Obtain the current date and time.

:DEFINE xxx=n

Associate the symbol xxx as the mnemonic
for subjob number n. The symbol B is
reserved for the subjob running BATCON.

:DEVICE nam log:n

Assign the device with the physical name
,nam,
and logical name, log, to subjob
n. The logical name is optional,
but
you must type a null field if the name
is omitted, e.g., :DEVICE CDR::3.
The
command re-ENTER will abort the request.

:ERROR n,m,p

Report only error messages
(that is,
ignore nonerror messages from subjob n).
Message reporting is resumed with the
:REVIVE command.

:EXIT

Exit to the monitor if no subjobs are in
use;
otherwise, give a list of those
that are running. This should be used
instead of ~C, because EXIT does not
return your job to the monitor mode if
there are any active subjobs.
(See
also: MONITOR. )

:FREE

Type the first free subjob number.

:HELP

Type a text which briefly
commands.

:JCONT n

Continue the specified stopped job.

:KILL n,m,p

Kill the specified
identical to :KJOB.

2-156

the

explains

subjobs.

This

the

OPSER Program (Cont.)
OPSER Commands (Cont.)
Command

Meaning

:KJOB n,m,p

Kill the specified subjobs,
files.

:KSYS hhmm

Operator-privileged command.!

:LOGIN proj,prog

: MONITOR

Exit to the monitor, even if subjobs are
running.
(See also : EXIT. )

:MSGLVL 0

Cause the response to the :WHAT
to include the JOBSTS bits.

:MSGLVL 1

Cause the response to :WHAT command
eliminate the JOBSTS bits (default).

:QUEUE <line>

Initiate the first free subjob and send
the typed-in line to the system queue
manager.

: RESOURCES

Type the list of
resources.

:RESTRICT dev:

Operator-privileged command. l

:REVIVE n

Resume normal echoing of output from
subjob
n
(i.e.,
clear effects of
:SILENCE,
:TSILENCE, and : ERROR
for
subjob n).

:SCHED

Type out the schedule bits as set by the
operator. Bits are:

o
1
2
4
100
200
400

saving

all

subjob.
If
no
number
is typed,
project-programmer

the

command

available

system

Regular timesharing
No further LOGINs except from CTY.
No further LOGINs
from
remote
terminals, and no answering of data
sets
Batch jobs only
Device MOUNTs can be done without
operator intervention
Unspooling allowed
No operator coverage

:SEND line

Simulate the SEND monitor command.

:SET a

Simulate a SET monitor command.
Valid
SET monitor commands are SET CORMAX, SET
CORMIN, SET DATE, SET DAYTIME, SET OPR
TTY, SET SCHED, and SET TTY.

See Appendix A of the Operator's Guide.

2-157

OPSER Program (Cont.)
OPSER Commands (Cont.)
Command

Meaning

:SET BATMAX n

Operator-privileged command. 1

:SET BATMIN n

Operator-privileged command. l

:SET LOGMAX n

Operator-privileged command.

:SET RUN

Operator-privileged command.

:SILENCE n

Suppress all output from subjob n.

:SLOGIN proj,prog

:STOP n

Put the specified subjob in monitor
mode.
This is equivalent to inputting
two CTRL/Cs in interactive mode.

: SYSTA'r xx

Run SYSTAT with optional argument
over the first free subjob.

:TIME

Type out the total running time since
the last :TIME command, followed by the
integrated product of running time and
core size.

:TLOG filespec

Create a disk log
file
with
the
specified name.
If the file already
exists, a message is typed to determine
whether the existing file should be
superseded.
If not,
the
file
is
appended to the existing one. Default
for filespec is OPSER.LOG.

:TSILENCE n

Suppress all output from subjob n
as
the :SILENCE command)
but
entries into the log file.

:TTYTST

Test this terminal by typing all the
ASCII characters between octal 40 and
174, inclusive.

:UNRESTRICT dev:

Operator-privileged command!

:WHAT n,m,p

Type the status of the specified subjobs
on the terminal. The status includes a
SYSTAT with the time, the time of the
last input and the last output, a linear
listing of the JOBSTS bits depending
upon the value of :MSGLVL and the time
of the next timed AUTO file.

:WHERE devn:

Type out the station number
device's physical location.

See Appendix A of the Operator's Guide.
2-158

(same
place

the

OPSER Program (Cont.)
When a subjob number or name is required in a command string,
the
subjob can be specified in one of four ways.
It can be omitted, in
which case the last subjob typed into is used;
the mnemonic ALL can
be used, in which case all active subjobs are implied; decimal number
can be used, from zero to the limit OPSER is generated for;
or a
mnemonic previously assigned to the subjob with the :DEFINE command
can be used.
Examples
.R OPSER~

*L{)GIN~
! lcd09:46(O)

.JOB 13

*r,c
?OPRJr~O

SCLIZA KL10 SYStl026 TTY434

Job(s)

y'unnin!:t cm 0

?OPR.JRO T~pe H:KILL ALL" to kill the subjobs
*:KILL ALL~

*-----

2-159

OSAVE Command

Function
The OSAVE command writes out a core image of your core area on
the specified device.
It saves any user program (two-segment
sharable, one-segment nonsharable, or two-segment nonsharable) as
one or two files.
Later, when the program is loaded by a GET, R,
or RUN command, it will be nonsharable.
If DDT was loaded with
the program,
the entire core area is written;
if not, the area
starting from zero up through break (as specified by .BSA,
left
half)
is written. The save command stores JOBVER in .RBVER when
saving .LOW and .SAV files;
and it stores JOBHVR in .RBVER when
saving .HGH and .SHR files.
(Refer to the DECsystem-lO Monitor
Calls for a description of the job data area locations referenced
by this command.)
You should use the OSAVE command instead of
when debugging a two-segment program.

the

OSSAVE

command

On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing,
a null
record is output before the EOF for the missing segment so that
two EOFs cannot occur consecutively.
Therefore,
a saved null
segment does not appear as a logical EOT (TWO EOFs in a row).
When loading, the high segment is always referred to because the
low segment file may not exist;
the opposite holds for the other
.SAV file format.
When running under a virtual memory system, DAEMON will be called
on an OSAVE command if any pages are paged out or your job has a
non-contiguous core image.
Command Format
OSAVE dev:file.ext[proj,prog] core
dev is the device on which the core image file
is to be
written.
The default device name is DSK:.
In nondisk
monitors, the default is the generic name that matches the
system device.
The colon following the device name is
required if a device is specified.
file.ext is the name to be assigned to the core image file.
The default file name is your job's current name as set by
your last R, RUN GET, OSAVE, or OSSAVE command;
the last
command that ran a program
(e.g., DIRECT); or the last
SETNAM monitor call.
ext applies to the file name used for the
within the high segment.

low

segment

not

[proj,prog] is the location on the disk area where the
image file is to be written.

core

core is the amount of core in which the program is to be
run. This value is stored in JOBDAT as the job's core area.
(.JBCOR) and is used by subsequent RUN and GET commands.
This argument is optional.
You can specify core arguments in units of 1024 words or 512
words
(a page)
by following the number with K or P
respectively.
For example, 2P represents 2 pages or 1024
words.
If you do not specify K or P, K (1024 words) is
assumed.
2-160

OSAVE Command (Cont.)
Note that on KAIO-based systems
(DECsystem-1040,
1050,
lU55),
the minimum unit of allocation is 1024 words.
Therefore, all arguments are rounded to the nearest multiple
of 1024 words
(e.g.,
3P is treated as 2K on a KAIO-based
system) .
If core is omitted, only the number of
the core image area
(as explained
description) is assumed.

blocks required by
in the RUN command

Characteristics
The aSAVE command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.
will not operate while a device transmits data.
1.

If a two-segment core image is being saved,
the high
segment is saved with the file ext . • HGH, and overwrites
any previous file similarly named.

If TEST.SHR exists when the aSAVE TEST
TEST.SHR is deleted.

Example
~ onAVE

TEST

T[~:;T..J

n(~\'\.JED

2-161

given,

then

OSSAVE Command

Function
The OSSAVE command is the same as the OSAVE command except that
the high segment, if present, will be sharable when it is loaded
with the GET command. To indicate this sharability,
the high
segment is written with extension .SHR instead of .HGH. A
subsequent GET will cause the high segment to be sharable.
Because an error message is not given if the program does not
have a high segment, you can use this command to save system
programs without having to know which are sharable.
On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing,
a null
record is output before the EOF for the missing segment so that
two EOFs cannot occur consecutively.
Therefore,
a saved null
segment does not appear as a logical EaT (TWO EOFs in a row).
You should use the OSAVE command instead of the OSSAVE command
when debugging the program. This is because a GET command after
an OSAVE command does not reinitialize the original high segment
from the file after you modify it with the D command or the DDT
program.
When running under a virtual memory system, DAEMON will be called
on an OSSAVE command if pages are paged out or the core image is
non-contiguous.
Command Format
OSSAVE dev:file.ext[proj,prog] core
Arguments and defaults are the same as in the OSAVE command.
Characteristics
The OSSAVE command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.
Will not operate while a device transmits data.
Example
~ ()~:;S(II.jE

TEST..)

TEnT GAVED

2-162

PJOB Command

Function
The PJOB command causes the monitor to respond with the following
information:
1.

Your job number

Your user name

Your project-programmer number

Your terminal number

This command is in the KAFULL, KIFULL and KLFULL monitors,
the feature test switch FTPJOB.
CODllmand Format
PJOB
Characteristics
The PJOB command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Example
~P..JOB

. .JOB 49

USEI;: CUSTER, I... ~

[27,4072]

2-163

TTY240

under

PLEASE Command

Function
The
PLEASE
command
allows
you
non-conflicting
communication with the designated station operator.
Command Format
PLEASE dev:prog!

two-way

text

dev is any terminal not assigned to a job (i.e.,
is not a
job's
controlling
terminal)
with which you wish to
communicate, including:
1.

TTYn:
directs the text to
The default is TTYO.

specific

terminal

OPRnn:
directs the text to the operator's
node nne

(null argument) directs the text to TTYO at the
node.

unit.

terminal

central

prog!
is the name of the system program to be run
automatically when the message is completed.
This argument
may appear before or after the device argument and must be
concluded with an exclamation point.
If PLEASE is entered
at the CCL entry point, it reads file nnnPLS.TMP.
This file
is sent to the designated device.
After
the operator
terminates the request, the specified program will be run at
its CCL point.
Neither the dev:
nor prog!
argument can be
used from a batch control file.
text is your message.
The argument is required.
Characters
are not transmitted until the RETURN, vertical tab, or form
feed is depressed,
at which point the entire line is
transmitted.
When you depress the RETURN, vertical tab, or form feed key,
a message
informing the operator of the caller's node
number, project-programmer number (or user name if monitor
job tables are available), and text message is printed on
dev:.
In addition, PLEASE prints time information involved
in the transmission.
An ESCAPE on CTRL/C on either your
terminal or dev:
causes communication to terminate and your
TTY to be left in monitor mode.
Note that when the line
terminates with an ESCAPE,
the line is typed but the
operator response is not waited for.
Messages may be typed
in both directions without retyping the command.
Characteristics
The PLEASE command:
Places your terminal in user mode until you type an ESCAPE.
Runs a system program except when used with batch.
Restrictions
For batch users, the PLEASE command is trapped by the Batch
Controller and only PLEASE text is allowed.
It can be used to
request operator action while in the batch mode.
The line of
text can only be one line and mayor may not be terminated with
an ESCAPE.

2-164

PLEASE Command (Cont.)
Example
• PLEf.ISE TELL. ME: WHEN_ DTAOl :3 WILL BE FF~EE-.-J
OPERATOR HAS BEEN NOTIFIED

IN HAL.F AN HOl.m
TH('}NI'\fl../
"'C

2-165

PLOT Command

Function
The PLOT command places entries in the plotter output queue.
This command is equivalent to the following form of the QUEUE
command:
QUEUE PLT:jobname
Command Format
PLOT jobname

list of input specifications

= list of input specifications

jobname is the name of your
job being entered into the
queue.
The default is the name of the first file in the
request, not the name of the first file given. These differ
when the first file given does not yet exist.
input specifications is a single file specification or a
string of file specifications, separated by commas, for the
disk files being processed. A file specification is in the
form dev:file.ext[directory].
dev:
is any disk file structure to which PLTSPL has access;
the default is DSK:.
file.ext are names of the files.
The file name is optional.
The default for the first file name is *, the default for
subsequent files is the last file name used. The extension
can be omitted;
the default is .PLT.
[directory] is a directory to which you have
directory is assumed if none is specified.

access;

your

You can obtain the listing of entries in the plotter queue for
specific project-programmer numbers by following the command with
the desired project-programmer numbers enclosed
in
square
brackets
(e.g., PLOT
[40,15]).
If no arguments are given with
the command (i.e., only the command name is given),
the entries
for all jobs of all users are output. The asterisk wildcard
convention can be used for the input specifications.
Switches
that aid in constructing the queue entry can appear as part of
the input specification. These switches are divided into three
categories:
1.

Queue-operating - Only one of these switches can be placed in
the command string because the switches define the type of
queue request. The switch used can appear anywhere in the
command string.

General - Each switch in this category can appear only once
in the command string because they affect the entire request.
The switch used can appear anywhere in the command string.

File control - Any number of these switches can appear in the
command
string
because
this category is specific to
individual files within the request. The switch used must be
adjacent to the file to which it applies.
If the switch
precedes the file name, it becomes the default for subsequent
files.
For example, the command string
PLOT FILEA,FILEB/DISP:REN,FILEC

2-166

PLOT Command (Cont.)
indicates that the DISPOSE switch is
command string

only

for

FILEB.

The

PLOT /DISP:REN FILEA,FILEB,FILEC
indicates that the DISPOSE switch is for all three files.
The following switches can be used with the PLOT command.
Note
that if you omit an argument to a switch, you must also omit the
colon preceding the argument.
Otherwise, the argument is assumed
to be zero and not the default value.
(See the QUEUE command for a complete list of switches and
functions.)

their

Characteristics
The PLOT command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program, destroying your core image.
Does not require LOGIN when only QUEUE listings are desired.
E~!Camples

.PI...OT *~PLT/FO~(MS:PLAIN..)

Cause all files with the extension
.PLT in your area to be plotted.
Because these are spooled files (i.e.,
have the extension .PLT), the files
are immediately renamed out of your
area, and deleted after plotting. The
operator is asked to put PLAIN paper
on the plot te r .

2-167

PRESERVE Command 1

Function
The PRESERVE command renames the specified files with the
standard protection
(usually 055 to 057) inclusively ORed with
100. The files are then preserved so that KJOB will not delete
them unless you request it to.
This command has the same action
as the P argument to the KJOB command when
individually
determining what to do with each file.
Command Format
PRESERVE file.ext,file2.ext,file3.ext, •..
You can use the full wildcard construction for either the
file name or the extension.
If you specify a protection
code, the result of the PRESERVE command is the same as the
PROTECT command;
that is, the given protection code is used
instead of the standard protection inclusively ORed with
100.
Characteristics
The PRESERVE command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, destroying your core image.
Example
• PRESEF~VE TEST. HEL.-J

FILES

F~ENAMED:

TEST + F~EL
• pr~ESEF\VE PF<OG1. *.-J

FILES RENAMED!
PROGl..REL
F'r~OG 1 • OaR
PROG1.ALG
p~(OG:I. t FOR

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
before running PIP.

2-168

command

PRINT Command

Function
The PRINT command places entries into the line printer output
queue.
This command is equivalent to the following form of the
QUEUE command:
QUEUE LPT:jobname
Command F'ormat
PRINT jobname

= list of input specifications

jobname is the name of your
job being entered into the
queue.
The default is the name of the first file in the
request, not the name of the first file given. These differ
when the first file given does not yet exist.
input specifications is a single file specification or a
string of file specifications, separated by commas, for the
disk files being processed. A file specification is in the
form dev:file.ext [directory].
dev:
is any disk file structure to which LPTSPL has access;
the default is DSK:.
file.ext are the names of the files.
The file name is
optional.
The default for the first file name is *, the
default for subsequent files is the last file name used.
The extension can be omitted;
the default is .LPT.
[directory] is a directory to which you have
directory is assumed if none is specified.

access;

your

You can obtain the listing of entries in the line printer queue
for specific project-programmer numbers by following the command
with the desired project-programmer numbers enclosed in square
brackets
(e.g., PRINT
[10,157].
If you do not specify any
arguments with the command (i.e., you type only the command name
),
the system prints all entries in the line printer queue for
all jobs for all users.
You can use the asterisk wildcard construction for
the input
specification. Switches that aid in constructing the queue entry
can appear as part of the input specifications.
These switches
are divided into three categories:
1.

Queue-operation - Only one of these switches can be placed in
the command string because the switches define the type of
queue request. The switch used can appear anywhere in the
command string.

General - Each switch in this category can appear only once
in the command string because they affect the entire request.
The switch used can appear anywhere in the command string.

File control - Any number of these switches can appear in the
command
string
because
this category is specific to
individual files within the request. The switch used must be
adjacent to the file to which it applies.
If the switch
precedes the file name, it becomes the default for subsequent
files.
For example, the command string

2-169

PRINT Command (Cont.)
PRINT FILEA, FILEB/DISP:REN, FILEC
indicates that the DISPOSE switch is
command string

only

for

FILEB.

The

PRINT /DISP:REN FILEA, FILEB, FILEC
indicates that the DISPOSE switch applies to all three files.
(See the QUEUE command for a complete list of switches and
functions.)

their

Characteristics
The PRINT command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program, destroying your core image.
Does not require LOGIN when only queue listings are desired.
Examples
.PRINT NOTICE.TXT.....J
+

Print the file DSK:NOTICE.TXT.

PI:;: I NT SYSTAT. SCM/D I ~3P : I:;:E:NAME/COP I ES : O.....J

Print
two
copies
of
the
file
DSK:SYSTAT.SCM from your default area.
Rename the file out of
your
area
immediately
and
delete
it
after
printing.
• PRINT*. TXT IHEADER: t1/FORMS: 2PAI:;:T.....J

Print all files
the extension
headers between
files on forms
2PART.
• F'I~ I NT 181::0: 3::;6/1'( I LL......J

in your area which have
.TXT.
Do not print file
the files.
Print the
known to the operator as

Remove the request with sequence number
356
from
the LPT queue.
This
is
accepted only if the spooler has not
started processing the request.

• PRINT LOADER .SAV/()IOnNAI~Y IPRINT: SUF'PRE8B.....J

Print a file known to be a binary file
and
suppress
all
carriage control
characters except CR and LF.
• PI:;:INT PRGMAC + I~EL./F'RINT: OCTAL.....J

Print an octal
PRGMAC.REL.

2-170

dump

the

file

PROTECT Command 1

Function
The PROTECT command alters the access protection codes associated
with the specified files.
The action of this command is similar
to the R switch in PIP.
You indicate the access protection of a file by three octal
digits.
Each digit represents a particular class of user. The
first digit represents the owner of the file,
the second
represents users with the same project number as the owner, and
the third represents all other users. Each number in the 3-digit
code can be one of the following.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

No access privileges
Execute the file
Read and execute the file
Append, read and execute the file
Update, append, read, and execute the file
Write, update, append, read, and execute the file
Rename, write, update, append,
read,
and execute the
file
Change protection, rename, write, update, append,
read,
and execute the file.

The standard protection is normally 057, which means the owner
has all privileges (0), users in the owner's project can read and
execute the file (5), and all other users cannot access the file
(7).
However,
the system standard may be changed by the
individual installations. Note that the owner of a file can
alter the file's protection regardless of the existing protection
cod(~.
Therefore, codes 0 and 1 for the owner have an equivalent
action.
In addition,
because the owner can LOOKUP the file to
change the protection via a RENAME, codes 7 and 6 are equivalent
to code 5 for the owner.
Command J~ormat
PROTECT file <nnn>, file2 <nnn>, file3 <nnn>, ••.
You can specify the protection code before the file name, in
which case it is the default for subsequent files until you
change it.
You can use the fill wildcard construction for
either the file name or the extension.
If you have the required privileges, yo~ can change the
protection of files not in your directory by specifying the
desired directory name.
If you specify the directory name
before the file name,
it becomes the default for all
succeeding files specified in this command line.
If you omit the protection code, the result of the PROTECT
command is the same as the PRESERVE command;
that is, the
system gives the standard protection code inclusively ORed
with 100 to the file.

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command
before running PIP.

2-171

PROTECT Command (Cont.)
Characteristics
The PROTECT command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, destroying your core image.

Examples
~ P~~DTECT TEST + t,EL <05l>~
F I I...E~:; I:;:ENAMED:
TEnT 9 F~EI...
f PF,()TECT
PI:;:OG1. *<12~3>~
F I I...ES F,ENf.-lMED:

PF~()G1.• I~EL
PI:~OG:1. • G()I~
PI:~(]G :1. ~ ALG

PROD:L • For,

2-172

QUEUE Command

Function
The QUEUE command allows you to make entries in several system
queues - the
input queue for
the batch system, and the output
spooling queues for
the line printer,
the card punch,
the
paper-tape punch,
and the plotter.
The QUEUE command also
provides the means of obtaining listings of the entries in the
queues.
Command f"orma ts
1.

QUEUE INP:
jobname = control file
specification

specification,

log

file

To make an entry in the batch input queue, INP:.

QUEU~

output
specifications

queue

name:

jobname

= list

input

To make an entry in an output spooling queue.
3.

QUEUE listing file specifications/LIST = list of queue names
To obtain a listing of the entries in a queue.

The following six commands can be substituted for the various
formats of the QUEUE command:
a.

CPUNCH jobname = list of input specifications
to QUEUE CDP:
jobname = list

PLOT jobname = list of input specifications equivalent to
QUEUE PLT:
jobname = list

PRINT jobname
to QUEUE LPT:

= list of input
jobname

= list

specifications

equivalent

SUBMIT jobname = control file name,
log
file
name
equivalent to QUEUE INP:
jobname = control file, log
file

TPUNCH jobname = list of input specifications
to QUEUE PTP:
jobname = list

equivalent

Queue names are taken from the following list:
INP:
LPT:
CDP:
PTP:
PLT:

(I:)
(L:)
(C:)
(PT:)
(PL:)

Batch input queue
Line printer output queue, default condition
Card punch output queue
Paper-tape punch output queue
Plotter output queue

Control file specification is the file specification, plus
switches and keyword parameters,
for
the control file being
submitted to the batch input queue.
This file can be on any file
structure that you have access to;
the default is DSK:.
The
file name is required, but you can omit the extension;
the
default is .CTL.
The asterisk construction is legal for the file
name or extension and is the only way you can submit multiple
control files to batch with a single QUEUE command.

2-173

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Log file specification is the file specification for the file
that is to be used to record action taken during the execution of
the control file.
This file can be in any directory on any file
structure on which you have privileges to write. The default is
the same file structure in which the control file resides.
If
the file name is missing, the log file is given the same name as
the control file.
If the extension is omitted, it is .LOG.
Jobname is the name of your job being entered into the queue.
The default job name is the name of the first file in the request
and not the first file given. These names are different when the
first file given does not yet exist.
Input specifications are the file specifications for the disk
files to be processed and the various switches and keyword
parameters that aid in constructing the queue entry.
The files
can be on any file structure that the queue processor has access
to;
the default is DSK:. The files can be in any directory,
provided that you have read-access to them;
the default is your
directory. The file name is optional;
the default is * for the
first file name.
The default for subsequent file names is the
last file name used.
Note
that
the
asterisk
wildcard
construction is legal only in the input specifications. You can
omit the extension because each queue has a default extension for
the files to be processed. These default extensions are:
.CTL .LPT .CDP .PTP .PLT -

Batch input queue
Line printer queue
Card punch queue
Paper-tape punch queue
Plotter queue

The listing file specification is the description of the listing
file. The default for the listing file destination is TTY unless
a t-±'le name is specified.
In this case, the listing goes to the
disk.
The default extension for the queue listing is .LSQ.
If
no queue names are specified, all queues fo~ all the jobs of all
users are listed.
You can obtain queue listings for specific project-programmer
numbers
by
following
the
queue
name with the desired
project-programmer numbers enclosed in square brackets
(e.g.,
QUEUE/LIST = INP:
[27 , 235], [10,47]). The wildcard construction
can be used for the project number or programmer number.
If no
queue names are specified but a project-programmer number is
given, all queues for all jobs of the specified user are listed.
For example, QUEUE/LIST = [27,400]
lists the entries in all
queues for the user [27,400].
Switches - Three categories of switches are provided. The first
category contains the switches that define the operation;
the
second contains the switches that can appear only once because
they affect the entire request;
the third contains the switches
specific to each file.
In general,
switches that precede the
file name become the default for all succeeding files.
This is
true also for a device name, an extension, or a directory name
that precedes a file name.
Queue-Operation Switches - Only one of this type of switch can be
placed in a command string, because these switches define the
type of queue request. This switch may appear anywhere in the
command string.

2-174

QUEUE Commmld (Cont.)
General Queue Switches - Each of these switches can appear only
once in a command string.
They affect the entire request,
generally in terms of scheduling.
These switches can appear
anywhere in the command string.
File-Control Switches - These switches affect the individual
files in a request and must be adjacent to the file name in the
command string.
In order to change the defaults for the rest of
the files,
however,
these switches must appear before a file
name.
For example, the command string
QUEUE FILEA,FILEB/DISP:REN,FILEC
indicates that the DISPOSE switch will affect
command string

only

FILEB.

The

QUEUE /DISP:REN FILEA,FILEB,FILEC
indicates that the DISPOSE switch applies to all three files.
In the table of switches below, the
been used:

conventions

have

ALL

- Switches that can appear for both the batch
queue and the output queues.

input

INPUT

- Switches that can appear only for the batch
queue.

input

LIST

- Switches that can appear only for the listing file
specification.

OUTPUT

- Switches that
queues.

can

following

appear

only

for

the

output

Note that if you omit an argument to a switch, you must also omit
the colon preceding the argument. Otherwise, the argument is
assumed to be zero and not the default value.
Switch

Category

Queues

/AFTER:t

General

ALL

Process the request after the
specified time.
t is in the
form hh:mm (time of day)
or
+hh:mm
(time later than the
current time). A colon must
be used to separate the hours
from
the
minutes.
The
resulting AFTER time must be
less than the DEADLINE time.
If the switch or the value of
the switch is omitted,
no
AFTER constraints are assumed.

/BEFORE:t

General

OUTPUT

Queue only the files
with
creation dates before time t
where t = dd-mmmm-yy:
hh:mm.
Date must be today or earlier.

/BEGIN:n

File
Control

OUTPUT
(LPT) INPUT

Start the output on the nth
page for LPT requests or on
the nth line of the control

Meaning

2-175

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Category

Meaning

Queues

file for INP:
requests.
The
default is to begin output on
the first unit.
/CARDS:n

General

INPUT

Use n (decimal) as the maximum
number of cards that can be
punched by your job.
If the
switch is omitted,
no cards
are punched.
If the switch is
given
with no value,
2000
cards is
assumed
as
the
maximum.

/COPIES:n

File
Control

OUTPUT

Repeat the output the specified number of times
(n must
be less than 64).
The default
is one copy.
If more than 63
coples are desired,
two (or
more) requests must be made.

/CORE:n

General

INPUT

Use n (in decimal K)
as the
maximum amount of core memory
that your job can use.
If the
switch is omitted, a maximum
of 25K is assumed;
if the
value
of
the
switch
is
omitted, a maximum of 40K is
assumed.

/CREATE

Queue
Operation

ALL

Make a new entry in the specified queue.
This switch is
the
default
for
the
queue-operation switches.

/DEADLINE:t

General

ALL

Process the request
before
specified time.
t is in the
form hh:mm (time of day)
or
+hh:mm
(time later than the
current time).
A colon must
be used to separate the hours
from
the
minutes.
The
resulting DEADLINE time must
be greater than the /AFTER
time.
If the switch or the
value
of
the
switch
is
omitted,
no
DEADLINE
constraints are assumed.

/DELETE

File
Control

ALL

Same as /DISPOSE.

/DEPEND:n

General

INPUT

Specifies the initial value of
the
dependency
count
in
decimal.
When
used
with
/MODIFY,
this switch changes
the
dependency
count
of
another job.
If n is a signed

2-176

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Category

Meaning

Queues

number (+ or -),
that number
is added to or subtracted from
the dependent job's count.
If
n is not a signed number, the
dependent
job's
count
is
changed to n.
If this switch
is omitted, no dependency is
assumed.
file

/DISPOSE:
DELETE

File
Control

ALL

Delete
the
spooling.

after

/DISPOSE:
PRESERVE

File
Control

ALL

Save the file after spooling.
This is the default for all
files
except
those
with
extensions of .LST.

/ERBINARY

Type an error
message
if
binary file is included in the
queue.

/ERNONE

Type an error
files
match
construction.

/ERPROTECTION

Types an error message if a
violation of protection fields
would be required to process
the command.

message if no
the
wildcard

Queue
Operation

LIST

List the entries in the queue,
but do not update the queues.
Therefore, the list may not be
an up-to-date listing of the
queues but the listing will be
faster than with /LIST.

/FEET:n

General

INPUT

Use n
(in decimal)
as
maximum
number of feet
paper tape that your job
punch.
If
the switch
omitted,
no paper tape
punched.
If the value
omitted, the default is
B+20 feet, where B is
number of
blocks
in
request.

/FILE:ASCII

File
Control

INPUT

Specify that the INPUT file
format is to be interpreted as
ASCII text.
This is assumed
for all files with extensions
other than .DAT.

: COBOL

File
Control

INPUT

Specify that the INPUT file
format is to be interpreted as
COBOL SIXBIT text.

/FILE:ELEVEN

File
Control

INPUT

Specify that the INPUT file
format is to be interpreted as
four
8-bit
bytes in each
36-bit word. These bytes are

Flj~E

2-177

the
of
can
is
is
is
10*
the
the

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Category

Queues

Meaning
arranged as follows:
1st byte
is in bits 10-17; 2nd byte,
in bits 2-9;
3rd byte,
in
bits 28-35;
4th byte, in bits
20-27.

/FILE:FORTRAN

File
Control

INPUT

Specify that the INPUT file
format is to be interpreted as
FORTRAN
ASCII
text
(obeys
FORTRAN control characters).
This is assumed if you specify
the extension .DAT explicitly.

/FORMS:a

General

OUTPUT

Place the output on the named
forms.
The argument to the
switch
must
be
six
alphanumeric
characters.
Normal forms
(14 x 11) are
used
if
this
switch
is
omitted. Narrow forms are 8
1/2 xlI.

/HEADER:
o or 1

File
Control

OUTPUT

Output block headers at beginning of
the
file
if
1
(default);
do
not output
headers if o.

/HELP or
/HELP:TEXT

Print a message giving the
general format of the command
string
and
explain
the
dialogue that is entered if
you need additional help.

/HELP:
SWITCHES

Type out a list of switches.

/KILL

Queue
Operation

ALL

Remove the
specified entry
from the
specified
queue.
This switch requires an output
specification;
it does not
default to LPT:*. The /KILL
switch
can
be
used
for
deleting
a
previously
submitted request as long as
the
request
has not been
started.

/LIMIT:n

General

OUTPUT

Limit the
output
to
the
specified
number of pages,
cards, feet, or minutes.
(One
page is about three blocks.)

/LIST

Queue
Operation

LIST

List the specified entries in
the
queue;
the
default
entries are those for queues
for all the jobs of all users.

/L:ALL

Queue
Operation

LIST

List all
request.

2-178

data

on each queue

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Category

Queues

/L:DETAIL

Queue
Operation

LIST

List detailed job data on each
queue request.

/L:FAST

Queue
Operation

LIST

Same as /FAST.

/L:: FILES

Queue
Operation

LIST

List the
request.

/L::JOBS

Queue
Operation

LIST

List jobs in the queue.

/LOG

File
Control

OUTPUT
(LPT)

Define
the file
that the
spoolers will use to record
their output.
The default is
jobname LOG.

/METERS:n or

General

OUTPUT (PTP)

Limit PTP-limit to n meters.

/MODIFY

Queue
Operation

ALL

Alter the specified parameters
in the specified jobs;
this
switch requires that you have
access rights to the job.
It
also requires a queue name;
it does not default to the
LPT.
This switch can be used
to
modify
a
previously
submitted request as long as
the request has
not
been
started.

/NgW

File
Control

ALL

Accept request even if file
does not yet exist.
This is
the default for the log file
of batch input queue.

/NOHEADER

File
Control

OUTPUT

Suppress the block headers at
the beginning of the file.

/NOLOG

File
Control

OUTPUT

This is not
log file.

/NONEW

File
Control

ALL

This file already exists.

/NONULL

General

OUTPUT

Print an error
null request.

message

/NOOPTION

General

OUTPUT

Suppress
the
SWITCH.INI.

option

file

/NOPHYSICAL

File
Control

OUTPUT

Allow
logical
LOOKUP.

names

/NOREMOVE

File
Control

OUTPUT

Do not remove a file from the
queue.

Meaning

files in each queue

/~~ETRES ::n

2-179

to be the jOb's

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Meaning

Switch

Category

Queues

/NORESTART

General

INPUT

Job cannot be restarted if
your job was stopped because
of an error.

/NOSTRS

File
Control

OUTPUT

Do not scan each structure for
files with the same name.

/NOTE:a

General

OUTPUT (LPT)

Output the specified text
in the output.

/NOTITLE

File
Control

OUTPUT

Do not
page.

/NOUNPRE

General

OUTPUT

The
/NOUNPRESERVE
switch
allows any file to be output.

/NULL

General

OUTPUT

Do not output an error message
if there are no files in the
request and do not create a
queue entry. This is assumed
at KJOB time.

/OKBINARY

File
Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Print files whose extensions
include binary
information.
Normally files with extensions
.SAV, .SHR,
.LOW,
.REL, and
.HGH will not be in print
queues.

/OKNONE

File
Control

OUTPUT

Do not produce message if no
files
match
the
wildcard
construction.
However,
a
totally null queue
request
produces
a
fatal
error
message.

/OKPROTECTION

General

ALL

Ignore all protection errors.

/OPTION:S

General

ALL

Use the option line QUEUE:S in
the SWITCH.INI file.

/OUTPUT:n

General

INPUT

.LST files
deferred
(default) .

/PAGE:n

General

OUTPUT

Use n (decimal) as the maximum
number of pages of output that
your job can print.
If the
switch is omitted, the maximum
is 200 pages;
if only the
value is omitted, a maximum of
2000 pages can be printed.

/PAPER:x

File
Control

OUTPUT

Identical
to
/PUNCH:x.,
/PRINT:x, /TAPE:x, or /PLOT:x.

/PARITY:
EVEN or ODD

File
Control

ALL

List the tape with either EVEN
or ODD parity.

/PATH. [DIR]

File
Control

OUTPUT

Run the job
directory.
2-180

add

(a)

title to each

and
to

any requests
LOGOUT
time

the default

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Category

Queues

Meaning

/PHYSICAL

File
Control

ALL

Suppress logical device names
for the specified device.

/PLOT:ASCII

File
Control

OUTPUT (PLT)

Plot the file in ASCII mode.
If
the
/PLOT
switch
is
omitted,
the file is plotted
in the data mode specified in
the file.

/PllAOT: BINARY

File
Control

OUTPUT (PLT)

Plot the file in binary mode.
If
the
/PLOT
switch
is
omitted,
the file is plotted
in the data mode specified in
the file.

/PLOT:IMAGE

File
Control

OUTPUT (PLT)

Plot the file in image mode.
If
the
/PLOT
switch
is
omitted,
the file is plotted
in the data mode specified in
the file.

/PRINT: ARROW

File
Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Convert all control characters
to up-arrow
format
except
011-015 and 020-024. This is
the default.

/PHINT:ASCII

File
Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Send the file to the
printer with no changes.

/PRINT: OC~rAL

File
Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Print the file in octal.

/PHINT:
SUPPRESS

File
Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Convert all carriage-control
characters
to
line-feeds
except
for
ASCII
code
characters and CR and DC3;
this switch implies the use of
the /PRINT:ARROW.
Equivalent
to operator command to spooler
(SUPPRESS) .

/PHIORITY~n

General

ALL

Give the specified external
priority
(n = 0 to 62) to the
request. A larger number is
greater priority. The default
is 10 if no switch is given,
and 20 if a switch is given
without the value.

/PROTECT:nnn

General

ALL

Specify a protection nnn
(in
octal)
for
this job or queue
entry.
If the switch or the
value
of
the
switch,
is
omitted,
the
standard
protection is assumed.

/PRESERVE

2-181

line

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Category

Queues

Meaning

/PUNCH:026

File
Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files in 026 Hollerith
code.
If the /PUNCH switch is
not
given,
the files are
punched according to the data
mode of the file.

/PUNCH:ASCII

File
Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files
in ASCII card
code.
If the /PUNCH switch is
not
given,
the files are
punched according to the data
mode of the file.

/PUNCH:BCO

File
Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Same as /PUNCH:026.

/PUNCH:
BINARY

File
Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files in check-summedbinary card format.
If the
/PUNCH switch is not given,
the
files
are
punched
according to the data mode of
the file.

/PUNCH: IMAGE

File
Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files in image
card
format.
If the /PUNCH switch
is not given,
the files are
punched according to the data
mode of the file.

/PUNCH:
MNEMONIC

File
Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files in mnemonic binary
Mode.
If the /PUNCH switch is
not
given,
the files are
punched according to the data
mode of the file.

/REMOVE

File
Control

OUTPUT

Remove
the
file from the
queue. This switch is valid
only with the /MOOIFY switch
and can be used to remove a
previously submitted file as
long as the batch system has
not started processing your
job.

/REPORT:code

File
Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Prints the specified report
cover page and up to
one
additional page within a COBOL
report file.
Code can be up
to 12 characters in length.

/RESTART:
o or 1

General

INPUT

A value of 0 (default) means
the job cannot be requeued or
restarted
by
the operator
after
a system
crash.
A

2-182

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Category

Meaning

Queues

message is sent to the job's
log file.
A value of 1 means
the job will be requeued or
restarted.
Your job should
not be restarted if there are
changes to the permanent file
directory.
/RUN:file

File
Control

OUTPUT

Execute the specified file.

/RUNCORE:n

File
Control

OUTPUT

Execute the specified file in
nK or core.

/RUNOFFSET:n

File
Control

OUTPUT

Execute the specified
with offset n.

/SEQUENCE:n

General

ALL

Specify a sequence number to
aid in identifying a request
to be modified or deleted.

/SINCE:t

General

OUTPUT

Queue only the files
with
creation
dates
after
the
specified time t where t is in
the form dd-mmm-yy hh:mm.

/SPACING:
DOUBLE

File
Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Double-space the output lines.

/SPACING:
SINGLE

File
Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Single-space the printed lines
(default) .

/SPACING:

File
Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Triple-space
lines.

/STRS

File
Control

OUTPUT

Search for the file on all
structures in the search list
and take each occurrence. The
default is to take just the
first occurrence of the file.

/~rAG: xxx

File
Control

INPUT

Start at the statement labeled
xxx of the
control
file.
Equivalent to GOTOxxx at the
beginning of the control file.

/'rAPE :ASCII

File
Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

Punch the tape in ASCII code.
If the /TAPE switch is not
specified,
the
files
are
punched according to the data
mode of the file.

~rRIPLE

2-183

the

file

printed

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Switch

Category

Queues

/TAPE:BINARY

File
Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

Punch the tape in binary mode.
If the /TAPE switch is not
specified,
the
files
are
punched according to the data
mode of the file.

/TAPE:IBINARY

File
Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

Punch the tape in image-binary
mode.
If the /TAPE switch is
not specified,
the files are
punched according to the data
mode of the file.

/TAPE : IMAGE

File
Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

Punch the tape in image mode.
If the /TAPE switch is not
specified,
the
files
are
punched according to the data
mode of the file.

/TIME:
hh:mm:ss

General

INPUT

Specify the central processor
time limit for your
job.
A
colon must be used to separate
the
hours,
minutes,
and
seconds.
If no switch is
specified,
the limit is
5
minutes;
if the switch is
specified without a value, the
limit is 1 hour.

/TITLE

File
Control

OUTPUT

Print a
output.

/TPLOT:n

General

INPUT

Use n (decimal minutes) as the
maximum
amount of plotting
time allowed for your job.
If
the
switch is omitted,
no
plotter time is allowed;
if
the value is omitted but the
switch
is
specified,
the
maximum plotter time is 10
minutes.

/UNIQUE:
o or 1

General

INPUT

Run any number of batch jobs
under this project-programmer
number at the same time, if O.
Runs only one batch job at any
one time, if 1 (default).

/UNPRESERVED

General

OUTPUT

Output file
preserved.

Meaning

title on each page of

only

not

Characteristics
The QUEUE command (and its associated variations):
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program, thereby destroying your core image.
Does not require LOGIN when only queue listings are desired.

2-184

QUEUE Command (Cont.)
Examples
• nUE'UE FII...EA, FII...EB./

FILEA.LPT
and
Enter
file
FILEB.LPT in the line-printer
queue under the job name of
FILEA.

(, C~l.JEUE INP: ::~TEBT..)

Enter file TEST.CTL in the batch
input queue under jobname TEST
and log file with name TEST.LOG.

• QUEUE IN: PAYI~::=MAN..)

Enter file MAN.CTL in the batch
input queue under jobname PAYR
and log file with name MAN.LOG.

• WJE:UE [181<: A + X~.::/L. I ST...}

Place a queue listing of all
jobs into file A.X in your disk
area.

.QUEUE INP:FREED=FII...EA/CREATE
/PRIOI:nTY:41 TIME: 1 :~)./

Place file
FILEA.CTL in the
Batch input queue with the job
name
FREED.
An
external
priority of 4 and CPU time limit
of one minute and five seconds
are set for your job.
The log
file is named FILEA.LOG.

+ WJEUE

Remove the entry corresponding
to TEST.CTL from the batch input
queue.

INP: TEBT=/I<ILL....)

QUEUE INF': JOBNAM::::/MODIFY /TIME: 2: OO~

Alter the time parameter of the
entry
corresponding
to
JOBNAM.CTL in the batch input
queue •
• QUEUE INF': =JOI( + ell/PAGES: 500/TF'I...OY: 22..}

Establish a limit of 500 pages
and 20 minutes of plotting on
the output generated by this
job.
+ l~UEUE

PloT: ::::.JOB + PLT II... I MIT: 20..}

2-185

Queue a file to PLTSPL with a
limit of 20 minutes of plotting
time.

QUOLST Program

Function
The QUOLST program informs you of both the amount of disk space
you have used and the amount you have left on each file structure
in your search list.
This program also returns the amount of
free space that the system has left for all users of the
structure.
Free system space on structures not in your search
list is not output.
You can obtain this information by typing
SYSTAT/F.
The output given for each file structure consists of 1)
the
structure name;
2) the number of blocks allocated;
and 3) the
number of blocks left in the logged-in quota, in the logged-out
quota,
and on the structure. The number of blocks allocated is
the same as the number output in the summary of the DIRECT
command when the /ALLOC switch is used.
Note that the QUOLST program does not return statistics for a
user logged-in under [1,2] because this project-programmer number
has infinite quotas.
Command Format
R QUOLST
Characteristics
The R QUOLST command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUOLST program, destroying your core image.
Examples
+

r~ QUOI...ST..}

USE~~ :
BTF~

DSI,A:

DSKC:
DSKB:

27,4072
USED
LEFT:(IN)
1()()0
0
24~,
9755
50
9950

2-186

(OUT)

(SYS)

100
4755
495()

1388
12<»16

92448

RCommand

Function
The R command loads a core image from the system device
(SYS:)
and starts it at the location specified within the file (.JBSA in
the Job Data Area). This command is the same as RUN SYS:file.ext
core and is the usual way to run a system program that does not
have a direct monitor command to run it.
This command clears all of user core.
However,
programs should
not count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas
of core that are expected to contain zeros (i.e., programs should
be
self-initializing).
This action allows programs to be
restarted by a CTRL/C, START sequence without having to do
another R command.
Note that if a directory specification should
be present in the command string, it overrides the assumed SYS:
device.
On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing,
a null
record is output before the EOF for the missing segment so that
two EOFs cannot occur consecutively.
Therefore,
a saved null
segment does not appear as a logical EaT (TWO EOFs in a row).
COlmmand F'ormat
R file. ext core
Arguments are the same as in the RUN command except that
is used as the default device.
(In nondisk monitors,
the default is the generic name that matches the system
device. )
(Refer
to the RUN command for a discussion of the
core argument.)

SYSi

The extension applies to the low file, not the high file.
An extension of
.SHR,
then .HGH, is assumed for the high
file.
If the user types an extension of ~SHR or
.HGH,
the
extension is treated as a null extension because .SHR and
.HGH are confusing as low file extensions.
Ch.aracteristics
The R command:
Places the terminal is user mode.
Runs a system program, destroying your core image.
Ex.amples
~ f~

PIP.....)

>:<

"r:~ F'IP ~5.....)
*
---

2-187

REASSIGN Command

Function
The REASSIGN command allows one job to pass a device to a
second
job without having the device go through the monitor device pool
(restricted or unrestricted).
Both restricted and unrestricted
devices can be reassigned.
This command, applied to DECtapes,
clears the copy of the directory currently in core,
forcing the
next directory reference to read a new copy from the tape, but
does not clear the logical name assignment.
If a device is
INITed,
a RELEASE UUO is performed unless the user issuing the
command is reassigning the device to himself.
Command Format
REASSIGN dev job
dev = the physical or logical name of
reassigned.
This argument is required.

the

device

job = the number of the job to which the device is to be
reassigned.
If
no job is specified,
the device is
reassigned to the job issuing the command.
This is useful
when you want to force the next directory reference to corne
from the tape instead of core.
A logical name that is also a physical name can be
reassigned only if the job issuing the command and the job
to which the device is to be reassigned have the same
project-programmer number,
or the user issuing the command
has operator privileges (logged-in under [1,2] or logged-in
at aPR).
However,
a
logical name cannot be duplicated;
because, two devices cannot have the same logical name.
Characteristics
The REASSIGN coammand:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.
Will not operate while a device transmits data.
Restrictions
The job1s controlling terminal cannot be reassigned.
Examples

.REASSIGN LPT:17~~

Reassign the line printer to job 17 .

• REASSIGN C[tP:4~

Reassign the card punch to job 4.

2-188

REATTA Program

Function
The REATTA program allows you to transfer your
job from one
terminal to another. Unlike the ATTACH command, REATTA does not
require a password or that the terminal be of the same type that
LOGIN recognizes in order to run the job.
For example, usually a
[1,2] job can run only on a local terminal. However, the REATTA
program can be used to attach a [1,2] job from a local terminal
to a remote terminal.
Before reattaching your job, you should verify that the terminal
to which you are attaching is turned on and working properly.
Otherwise, it might be difficult to retrieve the job.
C()mmand Format
.R REATTA
REATTA responds by asking for the new terminal name.
TYPE NEW TTY NAME:
The user answers with either the new terminal name
(e.g.,
CTY, TTY2) or number (e.g., 2). REATTA then responds with
FROM JOB n
on the old terminal, and
NOW ATTACHED TO JOB n
on the new terminal.
Charactell:' istics
The R REATTA command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the REATTA program, thereby destroying your core image.
RE~str ict:ions

The R REATTA command is not available to batch users.
El~amples

.I:~ HEATTA~

TYPE NEW TTY NAME:

iappears on old terminal

FR0l1 JOB l

NOW ATTACHED TO JOB l

iappears on TTY 27

2-189

REENTER Command

Function
The REENTER command restarts a program at a location prespecified
in the program as an alternate entry point. Although the use of
this alternate entry point varies among programs,
it
is
frequently used for
a partial reinitialization of the program.
(The START command is used for a complete reinitialization and
the CONTINUE command is used for no reinitialization.) Note that
the DDT command resembles the REENTER command because it also
restarts the program at an alternate entry point.
However, this
point is fixed because it is the beginning address of DDT.
The REENTER command copies the saved program counter value from
.JBPC in
.JBOPC and starts the program at an alternate entry
point specified in .JBREN
(must be set by the user or his
program).
If the job was executing a UUO when it was interrupted
(i.e., in exec mode but not in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode), the
monitor continues the
job until the UUO is completed and then
traps to the REENTER address in .JBREN.
If the job is in TTY
input wait or SLEEP mode, the trap to the REENTER address occurs
immediately and .JBOPC contains the address of the UUO.
If the
job
is
in user mode,
the trap also occurs immediately.
Therefore, it is always possible to continue the ·interrupted
program after trapping by executing a JRSTF@.JBOPC.
Command Format
REENTER
Characteristics
The REENTER command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Requires core.
Requires you to have a job number.
Example

.REENTER

2-190

RENAME Command 1

Function
The RENAME command changes one or more
specification of files on disk or DECtape.

items

the

file

Command Format
RENAMEnewl = oldl, new2 = old2, .•.
If the new file name is specified without an extension,
the
null extension is assumed.
Device or file structure names
can be specified only with the new file name and remain in
effect until changed or until the end of the command string
is reached.
In addition, a protection may be specified with
the new file name and remains in effect only for that file
name. This command accepts the full wildcard construction.
Characteristics
The RENAME command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying your core image.
Example

iRENAME TEST.REL=R
TESTER
FILES RENAME:
1 NO FILE NAME DSK: TESTER
.RENAME TESTER=TEST.REL
FILES RENAMED:
TEST.REL
.RENAME WONDER.*=PROG1.*
FILES RENAMED:
PROG 1 .1:~El...
PF~()G 1 + QOF~
PF~OGl •
PF~()G 1 •

ALG
FOR

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
before running PIP.

2-191

command

RESOURCES Command

Function
The RESOURCES command prints the name of all available devices
(except TTYs and PTYs) ,
all file structures, and all physical
units not in file structures
(unless they
are
down
or
nonexistent).
Command Format
RESOURCES
Characteristics
The RESOURCES command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.
Example
+ F\ES()lJF~CE

DIRS?DSKA~WHTV,PCS,WRSO,DSKN,YELB,DSKC,GALO,HOlJK,DSKB,FSA3,RPAO,RPA1,1,R

PR
PA4,RPA5,RPA6,RPA7,DPA1,DPA4,DPA5,DPA6,RPB4,RPB5,RPB6,RPB7,RPC1,RPC3,RPO
,CDR260,PTR260,DTA262,263,264,265,266,267,MTA260,261,MTB263,MTC260,MTD20

2.-192

REWIND Command

Function
The REWIND command rewinds a magnetic tape or a
command is equivalent to the PIP command string:
dey:

DECtape.

This

(MW)=

CODllmand Format
REWIND dev:
dev:

= a magnetic tape (MTAn) or a DECtape (DTAn).

Characteristics
The REWIND command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the COMPIL program, thereby destroying your core image.
Examples
+REWIND DTAO:1.4:
+

I:;:EWIND MTAO:l.:I.:

2-193

RUN Command

Function
The RUN command loads a core image from a
retrievable storage
device and starts at the location specified within the file
( . JBSA) •
If the program has two segments, both the low and high segments
are set up.
If the high file has extension .SHR (as opposed to
.HGH), the high segment will be shared. Therefore, if the user
RUNs (or GETs) the same program, I/O will not usually be required
for the high segment. A two-segment program may have a low file
extension (.LOW).
The RUN command clears all your core.
However,
programs should
not count on this action and should explicitly clear those area
of core that are expected to contain zeros
(i.e.,
the programs
should be self-initializing). This action allows programs to be
restarted by a nC, START sequence without having to do another
RUN command.
On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing,
a null
record is output before the EOF for the missing segment so that
two EOFs cannot occur consecutively.
Therefore,
a saved null
segment does not appear as a logical EaT (TWO EOFs in a row).
Command Format
RUN dev:file.ext [directory] core
dev: = the logical or physical name of the device containing
the core image.
The default device name is DSK:.
(In
nondisk monitors, the default is the generic name that
matches the system device.)
file.ext = the name of the file containing the core image;
.ext applies to the low file,
not the high file.
An
extension of .SHR, then .HGH, is assumed for the high file.
If the user types an extension of
.SHR or
.HGH, the
extension is treated as a null extension because
.SHR and
.HGH are confusing as low file extensions. The default file
name is the job's current name as set by the last R,
RUN,
GET, SAVE,
or SSAVE command, the last SETNAM UUO, or the
last command which ran a program.
[directory] = the directory name,
required only if core
image file is located in a disk area other than yours.
Note
that if a directory specification should be present in the
command string,
and the device is SYS:
it overrides the
assumed SYS:
device.
core = the amount of core to be assigned to the sum of the
low and high segments if different from minimum core needed
to load the program or from the core argument of the SAVE
command which saved the file.
If core> the minimum
message occurs.

low

segment

size,

then

error

If core > the minimum low segment size and the sum of the
high segment and the minimum low segment size, then the core
assignment is the low segment size.

2-194

RUN Command (Cont.)
If core > the sum of the minimum low segment and the high
segment size,
then the core assignment is the size of both
the low and high segments to be used.
Core arguments can be specified in units of 1024 words or
512 words
(a page)
by following the number with K or P,
For example, 2P represents 2 pages or 1024
respectively.
words.
If K or P is not specified, K (1024 words) is
assumed.
Note that on KAlO based systems
(DECsystem-1040, 1050,
1055), the minimum unit of allocation is 1024 words.
Therefore, all arguments are rounded to the nearest multiple
of 1024 words
(e.g.,
3P is treated as 2K on a KAlO based
system) .
Because previous core is returned, MTA must have the core
argument because there is no director telling how much core
is for the low segment.
(Refer to Appendix D.)
Characteristics
The RUN command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Restrictions
On systems with a large amount of core memory, you should not
specify a core argument that forces the high segment to start
higher than 400000 (i.e., a core argument of greater then l28K)
unless the program's high segment is location independent.
If
this is done, the ILLEGAL UUO error message is likely to occur.
Examples
~mJN

TEST..}

2-195

SAVE Command

Function
The SAVE command function is determined in the process of
building the monitor. SAVE can be made identical to either OSAVE
or NSAVE.
Example

MONGEN
M.EXE

= 0

M.EXE

= 1

SAVE

OSAVE
not shared
.SAV, .HGH, .LOW, .SHR

NSAVE
not shared
.EXE

SSAVE

OSSAVE
shared
.SAV, .HGH, .LOW, .SHR

NSSAVE
shared
.EXE

2-196

SCHED Command

Function
The SCHED command types out the schedule bits as set by the
operator.
You can obtain this information to determine the use
of the system (e.g., regular timesharing or batch jobs only)
before you LOGIN. The schedule bits are as follows:

o regular timesharing.
1 no further log ins allowed except from CTY.
no
and
2 no further logins from remote terminals,
answering of data sets.
4 batch jobs only.
100 device mounts can be done without operator intervention.
200 unspooling allowed.
400 no operator coverage.
Command Format
SCHED
Cha.racteristics
The SCHED command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.
Exa.mple
~nCHEn~

000000
• GCHEJ;!~
000400

Regular
timesharing,
coverage.

but

operator

No LOGINs allowed from local or
remote
terminals and data sets are not answered.
Regular
timesharing,
but
no
operator
coverage.
Device mounts can be done without
operator interventions.

2-197

SEND Command

Function
The SEND command provides a mechanism for one-way inter console
communication.
(This command replaces the TALK command.) A line
of information is transmitted from one terminal to another, with
the identification of the terminal sending the information. With
remote communications capabilities, SEND is able to differentiate
between stations.
When the SEND command is sent from the central operator's
terminal (OPR) or from a terminal logged in as [1,2], it allows a
broadcast of a line of information to all non-slaved terminals
(including
remote
terminals)
in the system.
This allo~s
important information to be dispersed, such as system shutdown or
hardware problems.
SEND ALL messages do not go to slaved
terminals unless the SET TTY NO GAG bit is set to permit
reception when the terminal is busy.
A busy test is made on single-destination messages before the
message is sent unless the sender or the receiver of the message
is OPR or a job logged-in as [1,2]. The receiver of the message
is considered busy if their terminal is not at monitor command
level.
If the receiver is busy, the sender received the message
BUSY and the information is not sent, unless the receiving
terminal has the TTY NO GAG bit set.
(Refer to the SET TTY
command.)
If
the
recelvlng terminal is turned off,
the
information appears to have been sent, because the hardware
cannot detect this conditton on hard-wired terminals.
Command Formats
1.

SEND dev:text

SEND JOB n text

SEND m:text
dev = any physical terminal name (CTY included)
or OPRnn.
If OPRnn is specified, the message is sent to the operator
at station nne
If OPR (nn is null)
is specified,
the
message is sent to the operator at your logical station. If
the terminal sending the message is the operator's terminal,
the argument may be ALL to provide the broadcast operation.
n
m

= the job number to which the message is to be sent.
the number of TTY.

the message printed on the receiving terminal appears as follows:
; iTTYn: - test
where:
n is the TTY sending message, and the text is the
message.
A bell sounds on the receiving terminal when
the message is sent.

2-198

SEND Command (Cont.)
Char acte!r istics
The SEND command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN
Restrictions
The SEND command is not available to the batch user.
Examples
• SEND Of=': PLEASE: WJ:UTE-ENABl.E {ITA 003 :~

2-199

SET BLOCKSIZE Command

Function
The SET BLOCKSIZE command sets a default blocksize (in words) for
the specified magnetic tape.
Command Format
SET BLOCKSIZE dev:nnnn
dev: = MTAn:where n is the number of the magnetic tape drive
for which the blocksize is to be set, or a logical name
associated with a physical magnetic tape. You must have the
magnetic tape assigned to you.
This argument is required.
nnnn = a decimal number between 3 and 4094 designating the
block size for this magnetic tape. No additional checking
is done for the legality of the specified number besides the
check for the maximum 4094 and a minimum of 3. This
argument is required.
Characteristics
The SET BLOCKSIZE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Examples
~ SET BLOCKS I ZE MTA002: :3(»~:;6..J

~ I~SSIGN MTA004: NAME :..J
MT I~004 I~nn I GNED
• !:) E TIlL.. DC1\

n I ZEN AME : 2 () 0 0 .J

2-200

SET BREAK Command

Function
The SET BREAK command is used (KIlO and KLIO processors only)
primarily during the debugging process.
It is primarily useful
when the program which is being debugged:
1.

Will not fail when DDT has been loaded

Destroys DDT when DDT is loaded

Destroys the contents of
a
memory
location
unpredictable point during program execution

It is possible to break when the specified location is read from,
written into,
and/or fetched.
It is also possible to break on
monitor references to items in the user's address space. This is
useful when the monitor
is storing or retrieving arguments
to/from unexpected locations in your address space because of
malformed UUO argument lists.
If you are breaking on a WRITE condition,
the write condition
causing break will not yet have been executed. Therefore, the
instruction located at PC and all operands should be examined
before continuing program execution.
Command F'ormat
SET BREAK AT adr ON condition
SET BREAK NO condition
SET BREAK NONE
SET BREAK USERS 1
SET BREAK NO USERS 1
where:

AT and ON are optional portions of the command line.
adr
is an octal number
in the
representing user virtual address.

range

0-777777,

condition is one or more reason for allowing the
to occur.

break

Multiple conditions may be specified within one command:
these
conditions are separated from one another by a comma. The
possible conditions which may be specified are:
Condition

Meaning

READ

Break if the contents of adr are read by the program.
Note that this condition causes a break to occur on a
read-modify write as well as on a read.

WRITE

Break if the location specified by adr is written into.

An op(~rator-privileged command.
Guide.

See Appendix A of

2-201

the

Operator's

SET BREAK Command (Cont.)
Condition

Meaning

EXECUTE

Break if an instruction is fetched
specified by adr.

ALL

Break if the location specified by adr is read
(READ),
written
into
(WRITE),
or fetched
(EXECUTE) .

from
from

MUUO

Break on monitor references
WRITE, and/or EXECUTE.

READ,

from

the

qualified

location

If all three break conditions are to be specified, you can
include the word ALL in the command line, replacing the command
argument string: WRITE, READ, EXECUTE. When desiring breaks on
monitor references for all three break conditions, you can
include one of the following command argument strings in the
command line: either MUUO, ALL or MUUO, READ, WRITE, EXECUTE.
When issuing a SET BREAK command without specifying any break
conditions,
the conditions specified in the previous SET BREAK
command are still in effect.
If there was no previous SET BREAK
command, ALL is assumed.
When issuing a SET BREAK command
without specifying any address, the conditions included in the
command line are ORed with existing break conditions and the
previously specified address is used.
If there are no existing
break conditions, 0 is the default address.
In summary, break addresses remain in effect until changed;
break conditions remain is effect until removed.
If you wish to remove a break condition,
the condition
removed may be specified in the following command:

and
to

SET BREAK NO condition
If all existing break conditions are to be removed, the following
command line may be issued:
SET BREAK NONE
This command will remove all existent break conditions, but will
not remove a previously specified address. An example setting a
default break location is:
SET BREAK 1000 ON READ, WRITE, EXECUTE
SET BREAK NO READ
SET BREAK NONE
SET BREAK EXECUTE;
1000 IS DEFAULT BREAK LOCATION
When a break occurs, one of the messages:
%ADDRESS BREAK AT USER PC xxxxxx
%ADDRESS BREAK AT EXEC xxxxxx UUO AT USER xxxxxx
will be typed, and the terminal will be left in monitor mode.
The second message is produced when MUUO was included in the SET
BREAK command line.
If the user types:
.CONTINUE
the program will continue
caused the break.

execution

2-202

the

instruction

which

SET BREAK Command (Cont.)
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
KIlO and KLIO processors only.
Exa,mples
(.SET BF~EAI'\ AT :I.()()O ON HEADy~JF~ITE..)
• SET BI:,:EAI, EXECUTE..}
• f,ET BI:~EAI\ NONE~
,. !:;ET BI:;:EAK lOOO MUUO, EXECUTE,

WF~ITE..J

2-203

SET CDR Command

Function
The SET CDR command sets the file name for the next card-reader
spooling intercept.
(Refer to DECsystem-IO Monitor Calls.) This
command is generally not needed, even when the card reader is
being simulated on the disk via the spooling mechanism.
It is
included in case you wish to reset or change the spooling.
In
addition,
the Batch Controller uses this command to read spooled
input card decks.
Command Format
SET CDR filename
filename = one- to three-character file name to be
next card-reader INIT.
Characteristics
The SET CDR command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Examples
• SET cnr~ A ~

.SET CDR MAS~

2-204

used

SET CPU Command

Function
The SET CPU command allows the privileged user to change the CPUs
on which their
job can run.
It is used in a multiprocessing
system to specify whether the programs run under the job can be
processed on the primary CPU, the secondary CPU, or either CPu.
The job remains with the specified CPU until 1) another SET CPU
command with a different specification is given,
2) a KJOB
command is issued,
or
3) you as privileged user's program
override the SET CPU command by
issuing the SETUUO with a
different specification.
If the SETUUO overrides the command,
the specification given in the UUO remains in effect until a
RESET or EXIT UUO or another
SETUUO
with
a
different
specification is executed.
When an EXIT or RESET UUO is
executed, the job reverts back to the specification given in the
last SET CPU command.
When you log in, the CPU specification is
usually set to ALL.
The schedulers for
each CPU competed for
jobs with the ALL specification so that the load is dynamically
balanced between CPUs.
Therefore, this command is generally not
needed but is provided in case the user wishes to change the CPU
specification.
Command
1.

l~ormats

SET CPU CPxn
adds the specified CPU to the jobs CPU specification.

SET CPU NO CPxn
removes the specified
specification.

CPU

from

the

job's

CPU

SET CPU ALL
adds all of the CPUs to the job's CPU specification.

SET CPU ONLY CPxn
changes the CPU specification so that it
the specified CPU.

includes

only

or A
or
I
x = either U designating a
logical name,
a
KAIO
processor
designating
physical
names
for
(DECsystem-1077),
(DECsystem-1055)
or
KIlO
processor
respectively.
n = a decimal number from 0 to the number
the system.

processors

The privileges required for using this command are determined
bit 5 (JP.CCC) of the privilege word, .GTPRV.

Char actelr:' istics
The SET CPU command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
RE~str ict:ions

2-205

SET CPU Command (Cont.)
Examples

.BEl CPlJO ONLY CF'Ul...)
.SET CPU CF'AO..J

2-206

SET DEFAULT Command
Function
The SET DEFAULT command sets a default protection code for any
files you may create.
Any value you set with this command
overrides the system's standard protection code.
Your system
administrator sets the system's standard protection code, which
is usually 057, via MONGEN.
Command Format
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION ON
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION OFF
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION n
The arguments to the
described below.

SET

DEFAULT

PROTECTION

n is the value the system will use as
for any files you may create.

the

command

are

protection

code

ON indicates to the system that it is to use your
protection code (i.e., n).

specified

OFF indicates that the system is to use the system's
standard protection code when you create files, even if you
have issued a SET DEFAULT PROTECTION n command.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Example

.8ET DEFAULT PROTECTION ON

2-207

SET DENSITY Command

Function
The SET DENSITY command sets a default
the specified magnetic tape.

density

(bits/inch)

for

Command Format
SET DENSITY MTAn:density
MTAn: where n is the number of the magnetic tape drive for
which the density is to be set, or a logical name associated
with a physical magnetic tape. You must have the device
assigned to you. This argument is required.
density

200
556
800
1600
6250

bits/inch
bits/inch
bits/inch
bits/inch
bits/inch

This argument is required.
Characteristics
The SET DENSITY
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Examples
• SET DENS! TY MTA()O~;:

!7;56~

2-208

SET DSKFUL Command

Function
The SET DSKFUL command controls the treatment of your job when it
is attempting output and there is either not space available on
the file structure being referenced or your quota for
that
structure is exceeded.
Command Formats
1.

SET DSKFUL ERROR
Outputting stops and an error condition is passed to the
program.
Most programs respond to the error condition by
lssulng an error message and returning the job to monitor
level without any opportunity for the user to continue.

SET DSKFUL PAUSE
Output stops and execution of the program is suspended.
An
error message is printed on your terminal and control of the
job is returned to the monitor. Generally, you should employ
the SEND command to request assistance from the operator.
Execution of the program can be resumed with the CONTINUE
command as long as you do not give a command that destroys
the core image of the interrupted program.
However,
the
program will again be stopped if the problem of insufficient
disk space or insufficient quota has not been corrected in
the interim.

The default setting is ERROR unless your
specifies PAUSE as your defalt.
Characteristics
The SET DSKFUL command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Examples
SET DBI'\FUI... : PAUSE..,.)

2-209

accounting

file

entry

SET DSKPRI Command

Function
The SET DSKPRI command allows the privileged user to set the
priority for his job's disk operations (data transfers and head
positionings). The standard priority is 0, and the range of
permissible values is -3 to +3. This means that a priority lower
than the standard can be specified as well as one higher than the
standard.
The priority specified applies to all disk I/O
channels currently open or subsequently opened whose priority has
not been explicitly set with a DISK. monitor call.
(Refer to
DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls.) The priority specified in the SET
DSKPRI command remains in effect until 1) another SET DSKPRI
command is given with a different priority, 2) a KJOB command is
issued, or 3) your program overrides the SET DSKPRI command by
issuing a DISK. monitor call with a different priority.
Command Format
SET DSKPRI n
n = a decimal number from -3 to +3 indicating the priority
to be associated with the job's disk operations. When n =0,
the priority is the normal timesharing priority.
Characteristics
The SET DSKPRI command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Restrictions
The privileges required for using this command are determined by
bits 1 and 2 of the privilege word, .GTPRV. These two bits
specify an octal number from 0-3. The user is always allowed a 0
priority.
Examples
• SET DBI\PF~ I

2.J

2-210

SET HPQ Command

Function
The SET HPQ command allows the privileged user to place their job
in a high-priority scheduler run queue. With this command, you
obtain a faster response and CPU time than in the normal
timesharing
queues.
The
job
remains
in the specified
high-priority queue until 1) another SET HPQ command to a
different high-priority queue is given,
2) a KJOB command is
issued, or 3) your program overrides the SET HPQ command by
issuing an HPQ UUO with a different value.
If an HPQ UUO
overrides the command, the level specified in the UUO remains in
effect until a RESET or EXIT UUO or another HPQ UUO with a
different value is executed.
When an EXIT or RESET UUO is
executed,
the job is returned to the high-priority queue
specified in the SET HPQ command.
Co:mmand Format
SET HPQ n
to
15
indicating
the
n = a decimal number from 0
high-priority queue to be entered. When n = 0, the queue is
the normal timesharing run queue. Queue numbers from 1 to
15 are high-priority queues. The number of high-priority
queues is an installation parameter and may be less than 15.
Characteristics
The SET HPQ command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Restrictions
The privileges required for using this command are determined by
bits 6 through 9 of the privilege word, .GTPRV. These four bits
specify an octal number from 0-17, which is the highest priority
queue you can attain.
Examples
• SET HPQ 4..J

2-211

SET PHYSICAL Command

Function
The SET PHYSICAL command is used to specify the maximum current
physical page limit (CPPL), if the word LIMIT is included within
the command line.
(CPPL is described in Chapter 1 of The Monitor
Calls Manual.) By including the word GUIDELINE in the command
line, the SET PHYSICAL command is used to establish a guideline
for the page fault handler. The page fault handler will then use
the specified figure as a guideline in determining the exact time
a program will go virtual.
Command Format
SET PHYSICAL
where:

LIMIT
GUIDELNE

nP
nK

LIMIT and GUIDELINE are alternative portions of the
command line.
If both are omitted, GUIDELINE is
assumed.
lK equals 1024 words, and lP equals a page
words.
If K and P are omitted, K is assumed.

512

K may be specified within the range 1 to 256K;
be specified within the range 1 to 5l2P.

may

If the command SET PHYSICAL LIMIT is given
argument, the job will never "go virtual."
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Example
~SET

PHYSICAL :t.OOP..)

~BET PHYSICAL GUIDEl.INE 2K..-J

• !:;ET PHYSICAL l.IMIT 501"..J

2-212

with

SET SPOOL Command

Function
The SET SPOOL command adds devices to or deletes devices from the
current list of devices being spooled for this job. Spooling is
the mechanism by which I/O to or from slow-speed devices is
simulated on disk.
Devices capable of being spooled are:
the
line printer, the card punch, the card reader,
the paper tape
punch, and the plotter.
Command Formats
1.

SET SPOOL devl,dev2, •.. devn
adds the specified devices to the job's spool list.

SET SPOOL ALL
places all spooling devices into the spool list.

SET SPOOL NONE
clears the entire spool list.

SET SPOOL NO devl,dev2, •.• devn
removes the specified devices from the job's spool list.
devl,dev2, ..• devn = physical device names of one or more
devices to be added to or deleted from the current spool
list. These names are taken from the following list:
COP,
CDR, LPT, PLT, PTP.

Chslracter istics
The SET SPOOL command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Restrictions
To unspool devices, the job must have 1) the privilege bit set in
.GTPRV, 2) bit 28
(200 octal)
set in the STATES word by the
operator SET SCHED command, or 3) you must be logged-in under
[1,2] •

~BET

SPOOl... CDP:

.BET SPOOl... NO I...PT:
.SET SPOOL NONE

2-213

SETSRC Program

Function
The SETSRC program is used to manipulate the job's search list or
the system's search list.
A search list is defined to be the
order of the file structures that are to be searched whenever
generic device DSK:
is explicitly or implicitly specified by
you. This search list is originally defined by the system
manager to include the file structures that you can access. With
the SETSRC program, you can alter the search list defined for you
by adding or deleting file structures.
The search list is of the form
fsl/s/s, fs2/s/s,

... , FENCE, ... ,fs9/s/s

where fs is the name of the file structure and /s is a switch
modifying the file structure. The file structures on the left of
the FENCE comprise the active search list and represent the
generic device DSK for this job. The files to the right of the
FENCE comprise the passive search list and represent file
structures that were once in the active search list.
File
structures are kept in the passive search list in order that
quotas can be checked on a DISMOUNT or KJOB command. The FENCE
represents the boundary between the active and passive search
list.
Note that the MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands can also change the
job's search list by adding or deleting a file structure.
Because the SETSRC program does not create a UFD if one does not
exist,
the MOUNT command should be used to create a UFD. The
name of the new file structure is placed at the end of the search
list.
(Refer to the SETSRC specification in the DECsystem-lO
Software Notebooks for a complete description of the SETSRC
program. )
Command Format
R SETSRC
You can then respond with any of the following commands:
Command
A

Explanation
Add one or more file structures to the
existing
list.
The file structures
(with any switches) are appended to the
beginning or the end or the active
search list according to the following
specifications:
1.

If no asterisk appears
in
the
specifications
(e.g.,
fsl, fs2) or
if an asterisk appears before the
file structure names (e.g., *,fsl,
fs2), the file structures are added
to the end of the search list.

2-214

SETSRC Program (Cont.)
Command

Explanation
2.

If the asterisk
follows
the
file
structure names
(e.g.,
fsl, fs2, *,),
the file structures are added to the
beginning of the search list.

If the asterisk appears in the middle of
the file structures (e.g., fsl, *, fs2),
the file structures before the asterisk
are added to the beginning of the search
list and the file structures after the
asterisk are added to the end.
If the specified file structure
is
currently In the search list,
it is
removed and then added in the desired
position.
Therefore,
this command can
be used to reorder the search list.

Create a new search list for
this job.
Any
file structures in the current
search list that are not in the new list
are moved to the passive search list.

Create a new default directory path.

Create a new system search list
(i.e.,
the
file structure search list for
device SYS:). You must be logged in
under [1,2] to use this command.

Obtain information about
commands.

Modify the current search list and DSK
specification by altering the switch
settings for individual file structures.
This command does not add or remove file
structures from the search list.

Remove file structures from the search
list.
They are placed on the right side
of the FENCE (passive search list)
so
that on subsequent LOGOUTs or DISMOUNTs
quota limits can be checked.
Ersatz
devices
are
not
affected by this
command.

Type the search list of the job.

Type the default directory path.

Type the system search list.

the

available

The following switches can be used in the SETSRC command
string.
Switches that modify file structures must appear
immediately after the file structure that they modify.
Other switches can appear anywhere in the command string.
The switches can be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation
is unique.

2-215

SETSRC Program (Cont.)
Switches That Modify File Structures
/CREATE

Allow new files to
file structure.

/NOCREATE

Do not allow new files to be created on
the
file
structure
when
DSK
is
specified,
but allow
files
to
be
superseded.
Files can be created on the
file structure if the user specifies the
file structure name explicitly.

/NOWRITE

Do not allow writing on
the
file
structure for
this job (i.e., the file
structure is read only).

/WRITE

Allow writing on the file structure.

created

the

If no switches are specified,
/CREATE and /WRITE are
assumed.
For compatibility with previous versions of
SETSRC, /N is equivalent to /NOCREATE and /R equivalent to
/NOWRITE.
Switches That Modify The Directory Path
(used only with the CP command):
These switches can be typed in directly as commands by
omitting the CP command and the slash
(i. e., /SCAN is
equivalent to CP/SCAN).
/NOSCAN

Cancel the scan switch for the directory
path.

/SCAN

Set the scan switch
path.

for

the

directory

Switches That Modify The DSK Or SYS Specification
(used only with the C and M Commands):
These switches can be typed in directly as commands by
omitting the C or M command and the slash (i.e., NOSYS is
equivalent to M/NOSYS).
/LIB: [proj , prog]

Set the job's library directory to the
UFD
[proj,prog]
and add it to your DSK
specification. This means that if a
file is not found in your directories in
your search list, the library directory
will then be searched for the file.

/NOLIB

Remove the library directory
user's DSK specification.

from

the

/NOSYS

Remove the SYS specification
user's DSK specification.

from

the

/NONEW

[1,5]
Remove the
directory
user's SYS specification.

from

the

/SYS

Add the SYS specification to the user's
DSK specification. This means that if a
file
cannot
in the user's
be found

2-216

SETSRC Program (Cont.)
directories in his search list or in his
library directory (if ILIB:
[proj,prog]
has
been
specified),
the
system
directory
[1,4] will then be searched
for the file.
Add the directory [1,5]
to the user's
SYS specification. This means that when
the system directory is searched,
the
directory
[1,5] will be searched before
the directory [1,4].

INEW

Characteristics
The R SETSRC command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the SETSRC program, destroying your core image.
Restr icti.ons
The user must be logged in under [1,2] to create a new system
search list.
The directory path commands
(CP and TP) are
meaningful only with the 5.04 monitor and later monitors and only
if FTSFD is on.
Examples

.R SETSRC..J
*.l.~

DSKH:,FENCE

Your search
DSKB.

list

defined

Add DSKA to the end of
list.

the

Your search
DSKB,DSKA.

defined

list

search
as

*:1:

DSKB:,DSKA,FENCE

Add DSKC to the
search list.

beginning

the

*A DSI<C:, *..-J

Remove DSKA from the search list.

*T ...vJ
DSKC:,DSKB:,DSKA:,FENCE
*R DSKA:..-J

*1...J

*DSKC:~DSKB:,INOWRITE

*M /L1B:

[27,5110]~

Your search
DSKC,DSKB.

list

defined

Do not allow writing on DSKB.
Set your library
[27,500]
and add
specification.
Add SYS:
to
specification.

*.!...-J

directory
to
it to your DSK

the

ILIE: [27, 5:L 10J/SYS DSKC:, DSI<I~: /NOWRITE, FENCE, DSI<A :..J

2-217

user's

DSK

SETSRC Program (Cont.)
Your DSK and SYS specifications are
listed first followed by the user's
search list.

The system search list
as DSKA,DSKB,DSKC.

2-218

defined

SET TIME Command

Function
The SET TIME command sets a central processor time limit for a
job.
When the time limit is reached, the job is stopped and a
message is typed. A timesharing job may be continued by typing
CaNT, but no time limit is in effect unless it is reset. A batch
job cannot be continued.
Command Format
SET TIME n
n = number of seconds of central processor time to which the
job
is limited.
An argument of 0 cancels the time
remaining.
Chiaracter istics
The SET TIME command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Restrictions
The SET TIME command is ignored in a batch control file. A batch
job has its time limit set via the /TIME switch in the QUEUE or
SUBMIT command string or on the $JOB card.
Examples
+ MI~I\E

LOOP ~ F4...}

Create a program with
loop.

infinite

CONTINUE..}
GOlD :1.0.)
END.)
<ESC><ESC>

*1.10__

*ESBX<E~:)C><EBC>·

.TYPE LOOP.F4../
CONTINUE

Type the program.

:1.0

GOlD :1.0

END
• LOAD I... OOP...}
LOOP

Compile and load the program.

FOF(n~AN:

I1AIN.

LINI'\"*

EXIT
Set the time limit to 5 seconds •
• TIME...}

:1. :1.• ()8
l:l..OB
r: 11... O·..·CORE ..-SEC .... 9!5

Clear the incremental run time,
that the SET TIME command can
checked.

so
be

Start the loop.
?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED

As expected,
exceeded.

2-219

the

time

limit

was

SET TIME Command (Cont.)
~ TIME...)
~j ~ ()()

1.6~()n

KILO-CORE-SEC=134

2-220

SET TTY or TTY Command

Function
The SET TTY command (or TTY command) declares properties of the
terminal on which the command is typed to the scanner service.
with terminals connected directly to the DECsystem-lO, the system
manager can set some default conditions, so that this command is
usually not needed.
However, you are likely to need this command
when connected by telephone lines to a dial-up data set, because
it may not be possible for the system manager to predict the type
of terminal which will be used.
Note that all SET TTY commands can be followed by a TTYn:
specification,
but these become operator-privileged commands.
(See Appendix A of the Operator's Guide.)
Command Formats
1.

SET TTY NO word
equivalent to TTY NO word

SET TTY word
equivalent to TTY word

SET TTY TTY:n NO word
equivalent to TTY TTY:n NO word

SET TTY TTY:n word
equivalent to TTY TTY:n word
NO
the argument that determines whether a bit is to be
or cleared.
This argument is optional.

set

word = the various words representing bits that
modified by this command.
The words are as follows:

may

TTY ALTMODE

Converts the ALTmode codes of 175
and
176 to the ASCII standard
(initial
escape
character
033
state) .

SET TTY NO ALTMODE

Restores the individual identity of
the codes 175 and 176.

SE,]~

SE'l~

TTY BLANKS

SET TTY NO BLANKS

Restores
multiple
return/line feeds and
(initial state).

carriage
form feeds

Suppresses blank lines (consecutive
carriage return/line feeds after
the first) and outputs form feeds
and vertical tabs as 2 carriage
return/line feeds.
This is useful
for
a video display terminal in
order to increase the amount of
output which fits on the screen.
SET
TTY
COpy
Outputs
con t roll in g t e r min a 1 .
(VT 50) .
2-221

SET TTY or TTY Command (Cont.)
SET TTY NO COpy

Outputs ESC to controlling terminal
(VT50) •

SET TTY CRLF

Restores the automatic
return (initial state).

SET TTY NO CRLF

The carriage return normally output
at the end of a line exceeding the
carriage width is suppressed.

SET TTY DE BREAK

Notifies the
system
that
the
terminal has a feature that allows
the computer to lock the keyboard
(Model 2741 terminals).

SET TTY NO DEBREAK

Turns off
command.

SET TTY ECHO

Restores the normal echoing of each
character typed in. Most terminals
on the DECsystem-lO are used in
full-duplex mode which means that
the terminal does not print each
character as you type it.
Instead
the
monitor
must
echo
each
character
typed
so
that
the
character will be printed.
If a
terminal prints AC when it is typed
but does not print any of the
non-control characters you type,
then this command can be used to
establ i sh normal echoing.
(Ini tial
setting
determined
by
each
installation when constructing its
monitor at MONGEN time.)

SET TTY NO ECHO

This command suppresses
monitor
echoing of input characters. Local
copy terminals
(i.e.,
terminals
that
automatically
print
each
character as the user types it) do
not require normal monitor echoing,
because the echoing would cause
each character typed to be printed
twice. This command is used to
stop
double
printing
of each
character typed on a local copy
terminal.
(Initial
setting
determined by each
installation
when constructing its monitor at
MONGEN time.)

SET TTY ELEMENT

Changes the typing element number
for Model 2741-type terminals. The
element numbers available are:
Element
987
029
087
963
938
988
2-222

the

SET

TTY

carriage

DEBREAK

Meaning
APL correspondence
Standard correspondence
Call 360 BASIC
Extended binary
BCD
APL (EBCD)

SET TTY or TTY Command (Cont.)
Note that the SET TTY ELEMENT n
command also sets the terminal as
if the SET TTY NO LC command were
used.
SET TTY NO ELEMENT

Turns off the
command.

SET TTY FILL n

The filler class n is assigned to
this
terminal.
Many different
types of terminals are supported by
the DECsystem-lO operating system.
Some terminals require one'or more
filler
characters
to
be sent
following
certain
control
characters such as line feed (LF)
and horizontal tab (HT). The table
below illustrates the number of
fillers sent for each character and
filler
class.
The
filler
characters are CR
(215 octal for
even parity)
for carriage return
characters (CR, 215 octal) and DEL
(RUBOUT,
377 octal) for all other
characters.
No
fillers
are
supplied
for
image mode output
(initial setting determined by each
installation when constructing its
monitor at MONGEN time).

SET TTY NO FILL

Equivalent to TTY FILL 0
(initial
each
by
setting
determined
installation when constructing its
Fillers
monitor at MONGEN TIME).
echoing
are
for
output
and
determined from the following:

Character
Name
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR on output
f,ree CRa
CRLF on output
XON
TAPE
XOFF
NTAP

1
2

Octal
0
010
011
012
013
014
015
015-012
021
022
023
024

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

SET

TTY

ELEMENT

Number of Fillers for Filler Class
1
2
3
2
1 or 2
2
2
12
1
2
3
1
1
1
1

1 or 21

6
6

21
3
4

212
3
4

9'+

1
1
1
1

1 if 0-3 spaces to tab stop; 2 if 4-7 spaces to tab stop.
Output only; no fillers on input.
Refer to the SET TTY CRLF command.
Sum of the fillers output for a CR and LF.

2-223

SET TTY or TTY Command (Cont.)
SET TTY FORM

This terminal has hardware FORM
(PAGE)
and
VT
(vertical tab)
characters
(initial
setting
determined
by each installation
when constructing its monitor at
MONGEN time).

SET TTY NO FORM

The monitor sends eight line feeds
for a FORM and four line feeds for
a VT (initial setting determined by
each installation when constructing
its monitor at MONGEN time).

SET TTY GAG

Messages transmitted by the SEND
command cannot be received at this
terminal unless the terminal is at
command level (initial state).

SET TTY NO GAG

Messages transmitted by the SEND
command can be received at this
terminal even though it is not at
command level.

SET TTY HOLD

Outputs
ESC[
to
terminal.
(VT 50) •

controlling

SET TTY NO HOLD

Output
ESC\
to
terminal.
(VT50) •

controlling

SET TTY TTYn:IGNORE

Operator-privileged command.
(See
Appendix
A
of
the Operator's
Guide. )

SET TTY TTYn:NO IGNORE

Operator-privileged command.
(See
Appendix
A
of
the Operator's
Guide. )

SET TTY LC

The
translation
of
lowercase
character input to uppercase is
suppressed.

SET TTY NO LC

This command causes the monitor to
translate lowercase characters to
upper case as they are received.
Some terminals have only uppercase
characters, while others have both
uppercase
and
lowercase.
Frequently,
it is convenient to
have a terminal with both uppercase
and lowercase simulate the behavior
of one with uppercase only. This
command causes the
monitor
to
perform this simulation. The echo
sent back by the monitor always
matches the case of the characters
after translation. By looking at
the printout, you can determine
what translation was performed by
the monitor (initial state).

SET TTY PAGEn

This command gives the user the
ability
to
temporarily suspend
system output to a terminal without
losing
it.
The XOFF key
(nS)
2-224

SET TTY or TTY Command (Cont.)
suspends the typeout, and the XON
key
(~Q)
restores it for n lines.
The XOFF and XON keys are not
echoed and are not sent to the
user's program.
This command is
useful for video display terminals
where the user may want to read a
page of text before it disappears
from the screen.
Note that this
preempts the use of ~S and ~Q for
reading paper tapes.
(See SET TTY
TAPE. )
SET TTY NO PAGE

The terminal output control ability
of
the
XOFF and XON keys is
disabled.
The
current
interpretation
of
these
keys
depends on the last SET TTY TAPE
command (initial state).

SET TTY RTCOMPATIBILITY

Disables the ~R and ~T features.
(See
Section
1.3.1
for
a
description of ~R and ~T.)

SET TTY NO RTCOMPATIBILITY

Turns on the R and ~T features.
(See
Section
1.3.1
for
a
description of R and ~T.)
n

SET TTY SLAVE

The terminal becomes slaved,
i.e.,
no commands may be typed on the
terminal, and the terminal may be
ASSIGNed by another user.
You can
slave your own terminal and you
must contact the operator in order
to unslave it (initial setting is
determined
by each installation
when constructing its monitor at
MONGEN time).

SET TTY TTYn:NO SLAVE

Operator-privileged command.
(See
Appendix
A
of
the Operator's
§..uide.)

SET

,]~TY

SPEEDn

Set to n baud the speed at which
the
system sends and receives.
(You adjust the speed
at
the
terminal by setting a switch on the
terminal.)

SET

,]~TY

SPEEDm, n

Set the terminal transmitting speed
to n and the receiving speed to m.
(This is especially useful
for
display
terminals
that
permit
transmitting
and
receiving
at
different speeds.)

SET

,]~TY

TAB

This terminal has hardware
TAB
stops every eight columns (initial
setting is determined
by
each
installation when constructing its
monitor at MONGEN time).

2-225

SET TTY or TTY Command (Cont.)
SET TTY NO TAB

The monitor simulates TAB output
sending the
from
programs
by
of
SPACE
necessary
number
characters.

SET TTY TAPE

The XON key
(~Q)
causes
the
terminal to read paper tape. The
XOFF key ("S) causes the terminal
to stop reading paper tape.
(Refer
to Chapter
5
of
Decsystem-lO
Monitor Calls.)

SET TTY NO TAPE

The XON key (AQ) and the XOFF key
(AS)
have no special paper tape
function.
They may have a PAGE
function (initial state).

SET TTY TIDY

Specifies
(for
Model
2741
terminals)
that every character
occupy one
print
space.
The
terminal
normally
types
out
characters so that they appear the
same as you type them in.
For
example, [prints out as "<.
In
TIDY mode, [prints out as <.

SET TTY NO TIDY

Turns off the SET TTY TIDY command.

SET TTY UC

Equivalent to SET TTY NO LC.

SET TTY NO UC

Equivalent to SET TTY LC.

SET TTY WIDTH n

The carriage width
(the point at
which a free carraiage return is
inserted) is set to n.
The range
of n is 17 (two TAB stops) to 200
decimal. The initial state is 72.

Characteristics
The SET TTY command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.
Restrictions
The SET TTY (or TTY) command is not available to the batch user.

2-226

SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command

Function
The SET VIRTUAL LIMIT command is used to specify the current
virtual page limit (CVPL).
CVPL is described in Chapter 1 of the
Monitor Calls Manual.
Command Format
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT

nK
nP

LIMIT is an optional portion of the command line.

where:

lK equals 1024 words, and IP equals a page
words.
If K and P are omitted, K is assumed.

512

K may be specified within the range 1 to 256K;
be specified within the range 1 to 512P.

may

If the command SET VIRTUAL LIMIT is given with a 0 argument,
the
value specified for CVPL is used.
CVPL is set by the system
administrator and indicates the current virtual page limit.
Cha:racter istics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
KIIO/KLIO processors with virtual memory only.
Example
~ BET VHrfUAL LIMIT :32K..-J

~ SET Wf.,TCH~
'PAI:~Gn

AI:~E:

DAY ~ I:~UN 1I WA I T ~HEAD ~ WF~I TE ~ VERB I ON, MTA ~ AL.L, NONE

~BET WATCH DAY..-J
~ BET t~I~TCH r~UN~
~ BET

~JATCH

WAIT....J

• BET WATCH VEI:~SI()N DAY..-J
~ F~UN LOOP ~

<:1.4:26:40>
?L.OOP.SAV NOT FOUND
<O~()6 O.9:L
>

<S:PIP 338(260)

*r,c
. : : : ( ) (0

O[~

C) + ()(3

2-227

SET WATCH Command

Function
The SET WATCH command sets the system to print incremental job
statistics automatically. This command provides the user with a
tool for measuring the performance of his programs.
Command Formats
1.

SET WATCH arg(1},arg(2}, •.. ,arg(n}
prints the specified WATCH statistics.

SET WATCH ALL
prints all the WATCH statistics.

SET WATCH NONE
eliminates the printing of all WATCH statistics.

SET WATCH NOagr(1},arg(2}, •.. ,arg(n}
eliminates the
statistics.

printing

the

WATCH

specified

The following arguments enable printing whenever a monitor
comand switches the console from monitor the user mode.
arg

= DAY prints the time of day, as [HH:MM.SS]

arg = VERSION prints the version of the program
standard format (refer to the VERSION command).

The following arguments enable printing whenever the console
is returned to monitor mode via the ~C, EXIT, HALT, ERROR IN
JOBn, or DEVICE xxx OPR zz ACTION REQUESTED messages.
arg = READ prints the incremental number of disk blocks
read modulo 4096.
arg

= RUN prints the incremental run time.

arg = WAIT prints the wait time (time elapsed since the
user started or continued the program).
arg = WRITE prints the incremental
blocks written modulo 4096.

number

disk

When an UNLOAD is performed, MTA prints magtape statistics in the
following form.
[MTxn:reelid READ (c/h/s)
where:

= albic WRITE (c/h/s) = d/e/f]

x is an alphabetic representing the tape controller.
n is a number representing the drive number.
reelid is the reel identification.
a is the number of characters read.

2-228

SET WATCH Command (Cont.)
b is the number of hard-read errors.
c is the number of soft-read errors.
d is the number of characters written.
e is the number of hard-write errors.
f is the number of soft-write errors.
When a, b, and c are 0, the information pertaining to
not be printed.

READ

will

When d, e, and fare 0, the information pertaining to WRITE
not be printed.

will

To prevent this message from being printed, the user can type the
following command:
.SET WATCH NO MTA
This message will be produced by an UNLOAD (MTAPEll).
Any combination of the arguments may be specified in any order.
Statistics are not printed for commands that do not run programs,
such as ASSIGN or PJOB. When you log in your job is set to WATCH
the statistics of which you notified the system manager.
The
information on what statistics to WATCH is kept in ACCT.SYS.
The order of the error messages is the same as the order of
output.
Therefore,
if you forget either the argument or the
significance of the statistics you can find these out by typing
SET WATCH and examining the message.
A single space is always
typed between each statistic, whether the statistic appears or
not;
therefore,
it is possible to tell which statistics are
beinq typed.
NOTE
Enabling WATCH output interacts with the incremental data
typed by the TIME and DSK commands.
Characteristics
The SET WATCH command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Examples
• SET
?Ar~s

WflTCH~

are: dahlprunywait,read,write,version,mtayallynone

• SET Wf.l TCH It.!:) Y ~

.SET

~JATCH

I:~UN~

.BET WflTCH WAIT ...J
.BET W.!:)TCH

VEF;~BI[)N

DAY...J

2-229

SET WATCH Command (Cont.)
[S:SOS 21(134)

+ ]

F i 1 \-:.):

,., C
COt:l.O :LO+:l.6
., I:;~

PIP...,.)

rn:34:04J
rS:PIP 33C(344)
*'·'C
[ <5"":" 0 :1. I) t I.> ::-i ::I

+ J

• r;: TECO...,.)
I:: n: :·~4 : :1. 6:1
[S:TECO 24(202)

*,·'c

ro+():~

Btl~5

+ J

2-230

SKIP Command 1

Function
The SKIP command moves a magnetic tape forward a specified number
of files or records or to the logical end of tape. This command,
depending on its arguments, is equivalent to the following PIP
command strings:
MTAn:
MTAn:
MTAn:

(M #nA)
#nD)
#nT) =

(M
(M

SAVed files on magnetic tape always contain two files,
a high
segment file and a low segment file.
If one of the segments is
missing, a null file containing one record is written for the
missing agent.
Thus,
in order to space over a SAVed file, the
user must skip two files.
Refer to Appendix D of the format of a
SAVed file.
Command Formats
1.

SKIP MTAn: x FILES
advanced forward x files.

SKIP MTAn: x RECORDS
advances forward x records.

SKIP MTAn: EOT
advances forward to the logical end of tape.

The words FILES, RECORDS, and EOT can be abbreviated to F, R, and
E, respectively.
Characteristics
The SKIP command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying your core image.
Examples
~SKIP MTA001:

+ SKIP

EOT..J

MTA002: 20 I:::ECDI:::DS...J

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
before running the PIP program.
2-231

command

START Command

Function
The START command begins execution of a program that you either
loaded previously with the GET command or that you interrupted
while running (e.g., ~C). The old program counter is copied from
.JBPC to .JBOPC.
You can optionally specify an explicit start
address, if omitted, the address supplied in the file (.JBSA)
is
used.
If you specify an address argument and the job was
executing a monitor call when interrupted (i.e., it was in exec
mode but not in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode), the monitor sets a
status bit (UTRP) and continues the job at the location at which
it was interrupted before trapping to the specified START
address. When the monitor call processing is completed,
the
monitor clears the status bit,
sets .JBOPC to the address
following the monitor call, and then traps to the START address.
If the job is in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode, the trap to the
program occurs immediately, and oJBOPC contains the address of
the monitor call.
If the job is in user mode, the trap also
occurs immediately.
Command Format
START addr
addr is the address at which execution is to begin if other
than the location specified within the file (.JBSA). This
argument is optional.
If you do not specify this argument,
the address comes from .JBSA. You may specify a starting
address of O.
Characteristics
The START command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Will not operate while a device transmits data.
Requires core.
Requires LOGIN if you specify an address argument.
Example
.START ../

2-232

SUBMIT Command

Function
The SUBMIT command places entries into the input queue for
the
batch system.
This command is equivalent to the following form
of the QUEUE command:
QUEUE INP:
Command Format
SUBMIT jobname

jobname

control file, log file

= control file, log file

jobname is the name of the job being entered into the queue.
control file is the name of the control file.
This file
contains all monitor-level and user-level commands for
processing by the Batch Controller (BATCON).
log file is the name of the log file.
This file is used by
the Batch Controller to record its processing of the job.
Only the two files mentioned above can be specified in a request
to the batch input queue.
The name of the control file is
required;
the log file name is optional and,
if omitted,
is
taken from the control file.
If the job name is omitted, it
defaults to the name of the log file, if present, or the name of
the control file.
If an extension is omitted, the following are
assumed:
.CTL for the control file
.LOG for the log file
You can obtain a listing of entries in the input queue for
specific project-programmer numbers by following the command with
the desired project-programmer numb~rs enclosed
in
square
brackets (e.g., SUBMIT [27,4072]).
If no arguments appear in the
command string (i.e., only the command name is given),
all
entries in the batch input queue for all jobs are listed.
Three categories of switches can be used in the command string:
1.

Queue-operation - Only one of these switches can be placed in
the command string because this category defines the type of
queue request. The switch used can appear anywhere in the
command string.

General - Each switch in this category can appear only once
in the command string because these switches affect the
entire request. The switch used can appear anywhere in the
command string.

File control - Any number of these switches can appear in the
command
string because these switches are specific to
individual files within the request. The switch used must be
adjacent to the file to which it applies.
If the switch
precedes the filename, it becomes the default for subsequent
files.
For example, the command string
SUBMIT FILEA/DISP:PRE,FILEB
indicates that the DISPOSE switch applies only to FILEA.
command string
2-233

The

SUBMIT Command (Cont.)
SUBMIT /DISP:PRE FILEA,FILEB
indicates that the switch applies to both files.
See the QUEUE command for a complete list of switches
functions.

and

their

Characteristics
The SUBMIT command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program.
Does not require LOGIN when only queue listings are desired.
Examples
• SUBM I T lJnF~,JOB::~CONTRL + LOGF I L...-J

The defaults are as follows:
1.

control file name is CONTRL.CTL

log file name is LOGFIL.LOG

no cards punched (/CARDS:O)

maximum core of 25K (/CORE:25)

no dependency (/DEPEND:O)

control
and
log
(/DISPOSE:PRESERVE)

no paper tape punched (/FEET:O)

all line printer output is spooled
being 200 (/OUTPUT:4,/PAGE:200)

priority is 10 (/PRIORITY:lO)

10.

standard protection is assumed (/PROTECT:nnn (standard»

11.

job is not restarted after a crash (/RESTART:O)

12.

maximum CPU time is 5 minutes (/TIME:O:05)

13.

no plotter time allowed (/PLOT:O)

14.

only one job at a time
number is run (UNIQUE:l)

files

are

under

saved

with

given

after

the

spooling

maximum

pages

project-programmer

• SUBMIT USR,JOB:::/I10DIFY IFEET: 3~7jICORE~

Modify the original request to include 35 feet as the maximum
number of feet of paper tape that the job can punch and 40K of
core as the maximum amount of core that the job can use.
This
command is valid only if the job has not been started yet by the
batch system.
• SUB~HT USI:~,.JOB::::/KILL..-.J

Kill the job only if it has not been started by the batch system.

2-234

SYSTAT Command

Function
The SYSTAT command runs a system program that prints status
information about the system.
This information allows you to
determine the load on the system before logging-in.
To write the output on the disk as a file with
assign device DSK with logical name SYSTAT.

name

SYSTAT.TXT,

The SYSTAT command types the status of the system:
system name,
time of day, date,
uptime, percent null time (idle plus lost
time), number of jobs in use.
It types the status of each job logged-in:
job
number;
project-programmer
number
(**,** = detached,
[aPR] = the
project-programmer number of the
operator,
[SELF] = user's
project-programmer number):
terminal line number (CTY = console
terminal, DET = detached, Pn = PTY number); program name being
run; program size;
job and swapped state (refer to DECsystem-IO
Monitor Calls);
run time since logged-in.
It types the status of high segments being used:
name
(PRIV =
nonsharable, OBS = superseded);
device or file structure name
from which the segment came; directory name (**,** if detached);
size
(SW = swapped out, SWF = swapped out and fragmented, F = in
corE~ and fragmented on disk, Spy =
user is executing the Spy
monitor call); number of user in core or on the disk.
Included in the command's response is the amount of swapping
space used,
the virtual core used,
swapping ratio,
active
swapping ratio, virtual core saved by sharing, average job size.
It types status of busy devices: device name,
job
device is assigned
(AS = ASSIGN command, INIT =
monitor call, AS+INIT = both ways).
It types system file
single-access job.

structures:

free

blocks,

number, how
INIT or OPEN
mount

count,

It types remote stations:

number of station, status of station.

It types dataset control:

number of the TTY, status of TTY.

Command f'ormat
SYS,]~AT arg
arg is one or more single letters (in any order)
used to
type any subset of the SYSTAT output. This argument is
optional and if you omit it, the entire SYSTAT output is
listed.
The following lists the various arguments to the
SYSTAT command.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J

busy device status
continuous SYSTAT
dormant segment status
non-disk error report
file structure status
other system status
help text listing the arguments
job status
list the SYSTAT output on LPT
2-235

SYSTAT Command (Cont.)
N
P
R
S
T
V
X

non-job status (i.e., all information except J)
disk performance
remote station status
short job status
dataset status
if using a display (for paged output)
read the file DSK:CRASH.EXE if found, otherwise read
specified crashed monitor written in EXE format.

Meanings of job state codes:
RN
WS
TS
DS
AU
PS
MQ
DA
CB
Dl
D2
DC
CA
EV
10

TI
DI
SL
NU
ST
JD
~D

TO
~C
~W

OW
HB
PI
EW
NA

in a run queue
I/O wait satisfied
TTY I/O wait satisfied
Disk I/O wait satisfied
Disk alter UFO wait
Paging I/O wait satisfied
disk monitor buffer wait
disk storage allocation (sat block) wait
disk core block scan wait
DECtape control wait
2nd DECtape control wait
data control wait
core allocation wait (to be locked)
exec virtual memory wait
I/O wait
TTY I/O wait (input)
disk I/O wait
sleep wait
null state
stop (nC) state
daemon wait
daemon wait
TTY output
job stopped
command wait
operator wait
hibernate state
paging I/O wait
event wait
nap (short sleep)

You can obtain output for individual jobs by
the following after the command:

specifying

one

A number n that causes information to be listed only for the
indicated job
(i.e.,
job n). A period causes information
for your job to be output.
A project-programmer number specified in square brackets
causes information to be output only for jobs with the
The project and/or
specified project-programmer number.
{i.e., specified with an
programmer number can be wild
asterisk).
A number preceded by a number sign (in)
causes information
to be output only for
jobs from the indicated terminal
(i.e., TTYn).
In addition, a C following the command
indicates CTY, Pnn indicates PTYnn, Tnn indicates TTYnn, and
a period indicates the terminal on which the SYSTAT command
is issued.

2-236

SYSTAT Command (Cont.)
Characteristics
The SYSTAT command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the SYSTAT program, destroying your core image.
Does not require LOGIN.
l~xamples

• SYSTAT ../
Statu~:;

SCLIZA KL10 SYSt1026 at 11:25:52 on 04-Aus-77

UF,t,:im~:~ 1 :40:39+1 :4~~:47"
10+61%NI..I11 t:i IJlf:~ .... 10+:38% I d:l. (.:.~ + O+2:'5%Lo!:;t
64 :l.o~.:i~.;ied :i.n, :3 df?t,<~ched out cd~ :I. 6() t
66 Jobs :i.n 1.J!;f:·~ out of 160.

)()

..Jc)b

IWho

L:i.ne:fl:

[OF'R]

F'OJ~,

~:.~

r::OF'F~J

~57114620

3"7,5116

t::'

[OPI:~]

6
7

[OPI:~:1

1
46
50
4
[lET
1:L
1"cr
• •0",-'
CTY
107

8
9
:LO
:L1

12
:L3
14

15
16
17

18
:L9

20
21
:~2
2:~

24
25
26
27

28
29

::W
::~1

]2
::S:3
::~4

]5
]6
]7

:'58
~:~9

40
41
42
4:3
44

45
·.(16

10,,2100
:3(),46'16
[OPF~ :1
[OPFn
[OPF~ :1
~~ 1 , 4T7~7;
~)() , :36:1.5
[OPFO
[OPFO
[OPF~ ]
[OPR:1
[OPF~ :1
30,466:1.
COPR:J
[OPF~:1

[OPFn
t::ClPR:J
:37, 4~5:37
[OPR:J
3"7" ~!}70
12,13
~~7,4562

:1. 2,2504
[()PRJ
:1.0 S' 2162
226,,456:3
30,,4661
226,,4646
226, 4~563
:I. ()" ~:.)O64

P2,.J~:)

27
34
P :3,.J~)
DET
P5J~:)

P10J9
DET
P:I.2J46
()

P:I.,.J?
P4,.J?
P6,.J?
~a

~Jhat

LF'TSF'L
SYSTAT
SOS
SOS
OPSEF~

DAEMON
PPN
TECO

~:i+8

f~un

T:i.lYlf:"
40

SL
""C
T1
T1

~5~5

:1.1
:'52

~:5

(1
18
2:51
:I.
41

5L
'''C
TI

HB BW
"'C SW
SL..
TI
'''C

2+~:i

SYSTAT
LPTSPL
TECO
TECO

19+5PY
26+:1.2

fJF'I~OMO

6+13

m..

FIl...DAE
BATCON
DTEL.DR
MIC

HI!
HE!

6
10
0

SET~31~C

BACKUP
SYS1NF
W.JASAf~

JUSTIF
DIF~ECT

~;+H

~:i+B

21+:L::.~

7
4+14
3
26
:I. ()
2B+12
29+:30
6+2:1.

I::·il.

,.1\)

8
~::;7

"'C SW

0
1:36
1
7
3
3

HB
HB
BL
"'C
BI...
"'C

...

P7,J?

ALCOMP

12+1~.)

~)2

(~UEUE

14+:1.0

TEeO

~.:i+B

'.,c

~57

SOS

:1.1+16
1
24

IIA

2: !:.) 4

"'C

~H'B

""C

24
1:03
27

12
::!r:5
4+13
1+3
4+4
2+5
46+44

HB
HB SW

264
227
263
6
:1.16
P14J64
F':t. :l..J46
l:":H

[~UOLST

BACI(UP
t~UABAF~
W.JASAF~

~!~.:;3

3~), ~H3~)

32~j

OPSEF~

60,,3733
~3(), 5134
226,456:3
16,107

134

P1~5J46

InSDRT
2()
MCS·..·10
QUDLBT
NEWMAC
nUEUE
QUEUE
I...PTSPL

:'5::~5

OF'SEr~

~50, :3l2?

26+:1.2
1:3+SPY
11+:1.6
1:1.+16
2+5
24+SPY
1.

State

OPBEF~

VED
L..OGCSP
FILCOM

30l:l.,:L '741
10,,1?6
:'50 1I466:L
:30,4661

S:i::·:::f.~ (P)

P:I.~;J64

DDT
P16J64
266
126
~3()1

245

F~N

:1.

:t.
:~

:1:

5:24

:'52

"'C
"'C

:3
NA
"'C SW
TI
'"'C SW

2 ~.~ .f- :~ ~:!
14+18
:1.4+10
2:1.+7

"'c
TI BW

2+~)

2-237

()

"'C
"'C

TI
2~:.~+4()

'")

:1.:3

:I.
~:!

3: 0:'5
'")

..:..

1:13
:I. () t
")
A"••

(LOGMA

SYSTAT Command (Cont.)

~)1

226 'I 4!:56:'5
226" ~:5()71
226,4563
~51 ,1771
27,5031

~)2

226/456:3

P::,~OJ64

~)3

400,,2040
~:,:;O , 2365
3(),3024
10,466370
(SELF]

307
235
265
304
41
316
11()
2

47
48
4('?
~)O

~)4
~)5

~56
~)7

P17J64
:37
P21J64
11~j

5~~

12,~i065

~58
~59

l.OGCSP
T[ST[l3
LOGCSP
TECO
SOS
l.OGCSP
DIRECT
SYSTAT
SIF~US
D1r~ECT

SYSTAT
SOS
FORTRA
COMPIL
BACKUP
LOGCSP

31,457"7
50,4035
60
22~,:;
6:L 3071,1741
226,4563
F'22J64
62
223
SH~lH3
63
30" 4~j66
13()
226,4~:)63
XSEr~
64
25~)
SYSTAT
65
2" ~5
P23 ..J4() lOGIN
226,4563
66
:t means non .... s~:lst,e'" H i '-St~~.\t
$ ",eans E~,,(,~\cute Onlhl
"Jnn i ~,i. thf? controll:in!~ ,joby Pnn

BI"'~:t~:~

dev:ice~3

[I€,~vict~

Why

Job

rrY:'56
DET
TTY:L33

48
48
40
MPX:~
40
MPX2
40
4()
MPX1
l.PT26() 11
Lf'T261
1
DTA261
7
MTB260 30
MTB26:3 61
MTB264 20
'LL..
60
'Ll.
13
'l.l.
39
12:3 disk DDIH;

I"C
r1

()

1+~5

"'C

7+8
11+16
1+3
6+21
19+5PY
31+34
1.1'1-21
16+SPY
11+16

""c
,...c

() t:
13
51
0 :I:
10

1+:'5
21+44

17+~;1

5+8
12+14
1+:3
~5:1. +:'54
11+9
19+5PY
3+21

"'C

'"'C SW
TI
TO
F~N

'''C
TI

B $

1
4
8
4
36

M(~

~53

TI
"'C

:~ : O()

SL
TO
RN

()

Lo!!Hcal

a!;

as+:in:i, t
as+ir-.i t
as+init
as
as
a!5

File St ructl_1 rf~s:
MOI..lnt
F T'ef:~
GALO
82462
nSKA
20:32
18
()
1 !:5 (.? 5
TATT
FTN
26530
1
TAUX
2800
1
51297
RlD
2
DSKN
18975
26
YElIt
68:360
0
27767() 61~'
DSKC
d
.:.,
CCBL
36842
243()9~5
DSKB
69
Total F T'f,~e 811658
Systf~m

Na",e

")
~

2-238

:I:

4
()

co r re~:iPondt=) to TTY423+nn

as+init
as
init
init
init
init
as+init
as+init

•

"'C

'''C

:I:

$
$

TECO Command 1

Fun4~tion

The TECO command opens an already existing file on disk for
editing with TECO. Refer to the TECO manual in the DECsystem-lO
Software Notebooks.
Command Format
TECO dev:file.ext[directory]
dev:
is the device or file structure name containing
existing file.
If omitted, DSK:
is assumed.

the

file. ext is the file name and the file name extension of the
existing file.
If omitted,
the arguments of the last
EDIT-class command are used.
[directory] is the directory name in which the file appears.
If omitted, your directory is assumed.
You can pass switches to TECO by preceding the switch with a
slash in the TECO command string. When COMPIL interprets
the command string, it passes the switches on to TECO.
Cha:r acter istics
The TECO command:
Places your terminal in user mode.
Runs the TECO program, destroying your core image.
Example

.TECO LOGOUT.MIC...}
[2K

CON~J

*
• TEeD PRINT. MIC-J
(2K Co J'f:'~]

1
This command runs the COMPIL
commands before running TECO.

2-239

program,

which

interprets

the

TIME Command

Function
The TIME command causes the system to type the total running time
since the last time you issued the TIME command, followed by the
total running time used by the
job since it was
initialized
(logged-in),
followed by the integrated product of running time
and core size (KILO-CORE-SEC=). Time is typed in the following
format:
hh:mm:ss.hh
where
hh = hours
mm = minutes
ss.hh = seconds to nearest hundredth.
Interrupt level and job scheduling times are charged to whichever
user
was
running
the system job when the
interrupt or
rescheduling occurred.
NOTE
If automatic runtime
is enabled via the SET
command, the incremental runtime is usually O.

WATCH

Command Format
TIME job
job is the job number of the job whose timing is desired.
If job is omitted, the job to which the terminal is attached
is assumed.
In this case,
the monitor types out the
incremental runtime (runtime since the last TIME command) as
well as the total runtime since the job was initialized.
Characteristics
The TIME command:
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN when requesting
userls logged in job.

time

for

another

Example
~ TIME...)
,..J
4 .. '::''::'
:?:I. • :'51.>
~.,

The command is given for the first time after
LOGIN; therefore, the incremental time equals
the total time since LOGIN.

KILO-CORE-SEC=175
.TIM~

O.O()

21, .:3C)

KILO-CORE-SEC=175

2-240

TIME Comnland (Cont.)
~ D J ':;~/F -.J
l·J(]NnF:r:~ + REL

DSKC:

<27~4072>

l·JONDEt~ + Q()F~

~ TIME~

o ~ /0 :?2 + Of.>

,,( I L() .... COI:~E .... SEC:::: 1. 83

2-241

TPUNCH Command

Function
The TPUNCH command is used to place entries into the paper-tape
punch output queue. This command is equal to the following form
of the QUEUE command:
QUEUE PTP:
Command Format
TPUNCH jobname

jobname

= list of input specifications.

= list of input specifications

jobname is the name of the job being entered into the queue.
The default is the name of the first file in the request not
the name of the first file given.
These differ when the
first file given does not yet exist.
input specifications is a single file specification or a
string of file specifications, separated by commas, for the
disk files being processed. A file specification is in the
form dev:file.ext[directory].
dev:
is any disk file structure to which PTPSPL
access;
the default is DSK:.

will

have

file.ext is the name(s) of the file(s).
The file name is
optional.
The default for the first filename is *, the
default for subsequent files is the last filename used. The
extension can be omitted;
the default is .PTP.
[directory] is a directory to which you have access;
your
directory is assumed if you do not specify a directory.
The wildcard construction
specifications.

can

used

for

the

input

You can obtain the listing of entries in the paper-tape punch
queue for specific project-programmer numbers by following the
command with the desired project-programmer numbers enclosed in
square brackets (e.g., TPUNCH [400,27]).
If no arguments appear
in the command string (i.e., you give only the command name ),
all entries in the paper-tape punch queue for all jobs are
listed.
You can specify switches as part of the input specification that
aid in the construction of the queue entry. These switches are
divided into three categories:
1.

Queue-operation - Only one of these switches can be placed in
the command string because they define the type of queue
request. The switch used can appear anywhere in the command
string.

General - Each switch in this category can appear only once
in the command string because these switches affect the
entire request. The switch used can appear anywhere in the
command string.

File control - Any number of these switches can appear in the
command string because they are specific to individual files
within the request. The switch used must be adjacent to the
file to which it applies.
If the switch precedes the
2-242

TPUNCH Command (Cont.)
filename, it becomes the default for subsequent
example, the command string

files.

For

indicates that the DISPOSE switch applies only to FILEB.
command string

The

TPUNCH FILEA, FILEB/DISP:REN, FILEC

TPUNCH /DISP:REN FILEA, FILEB, FILEC
indicates that the DISPOSE switch applies to all three files.
The following switches can be used with the TPUNCH command. Note
if an argument to a switch is omitted, the colon preceding the
argument must also be omitted. Otherwise the argument is assumed
to be zero and not the default value.
See the QUEUE command for a complete list of switches
functions.

and

their

Characteri.stics
The TPUNCH command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program, thereby destroying your core image.
Does not require LOGIN when only queued listings are
desired.
Exa.mples
y

TPUNCH SENDMP + I:~EL/TAPE: BINA/:~Y /COPIEB: ~~...)

Punch 3 copies, in binary mode, of the file DSK:SENDMP.REL.

2-243

TYPE Command 1

Function
The TYPE command directs PIP to type the contents of the named
source file(s) on your terminal. Note that if more than one file
is requested in the command string, the files are typed out one
after another with no indication of the beginning and ending of a
file.
Command Format
TYPE list
list is a single file specification or a string of file
specifications
separated
by
commas.
The file name
(including any extension)
is required for a directory
service.
In addition, the full wildcard construction can be used
the file name and/or the extension.

for

Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them
in
parentheses
in the TYPE command string.
When COMPIL
interprets the command string, it passes the switches on to
PIP.
Characteristics
The TYPE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, destroying your core area.
Examples

OoTYPE: LOGOUT.MIC.J
de 1 et.e

*. C-lno

delete *.melTJ
dir

.. TYPE PI~INT .. MIC..}
PRINT LL:=COM1.MEM
PRINT LL:=COM11.MEM
PRINT LL:=COM12.MEM
PRINT LL:=COM2A.MEM
PRINT LL:=COM2B.MEM
PRINT LL:=COM2C.MEM
PRINT LL:=COM3.MEM
OoTYPE SWITCH.INI...}
00100

sos/save:l0/isave:40

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the command
before running PIP.
2-244

UNLOAD Command

Function
The UNLOAD command rewinds and unloads a tape, either magnetic
tape or DECtape. When unloading magnetic tape, WATCH statistics
are printed on the operator's terminal.
These statistics are
also printed on your terminal by default.
Command Format
UNLOAD dev:
dev:

is a magnetic tape (MTAn) or a DECtape (DTAn).

Characteri.stics
The UNLOAD command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the COMPIL program, destroying your core image.
Examples
~UNL.OAII

DTA017...)

• UNLOAD MTA013..J

2-245

USESTAT Command

Function
The USESTAT command returns status information pertinent to your
job.
This status information is printed on one line in eight
columns.
The information given includes:
incremental day time in seconds
incremental run time in seconds
incremental disk reads
incremental disk writes
program name
core size
job state
program counter (PC)
Refer
to Section 1.3.1 for
a description of
the
status
information returned as a result of the USESTAT command (or AT).
An ampersand (&) is printed out after the JOBSTATE if the job is
loaded in core.
The results obtained from issuing the USESTAT command may also be
obtained by issuing a CTRL/T (AT).
CTRL/T can be issued at user
level as well as at monitor level.
The PAGE function .PAGEA returns more information (see UUOSYM).
Command Format
USESTAT (or CTRL/T)
Characteristics
CTRL/T
Does not change the state of the terminal.
USESTAT:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Example
.un~

DAY: :37:57 RUN: 4.85 RD:l111 WR:775 SOSX 8+23P

2-246

PC:404570

VERSION Command 1

Function
The VERSION command prints the version number of the program in
your core area
(i.e.,
the last program you ran implicitly or
explicitly). One use of this command is to determine the program
that output a message to you.
If the terminal is still in user
mode (i.e., a character other than a period was output) after the
message, you can type the following
AC
.VERSION

(two ACS if the program is not waiting for input)

The monitor returns with the name of the program in core
(i.e.,
the one presumed to have output the message) and the version
number of that program.
After receiving the information, you can
type
.CONT to return the terminal to user mode.
If the message
was a
fatal message
(i.e.,
a period was output after
the
message).
CTRL/C need not be typed since the terminal is already
in monitor mode.
In most cases, you cannot type .CONT after a
fatal error message.
The version number is obtained from .JBVER and .JBHVR in the
job
data area and is printed in standard format.
Similar output is
automatically generated by the SET WATCH VERSION command
(refer
to the SET WATCH command description). The output from these two
commands is in one of the following representations:
low + high

The low and high segments are different.

low

There is only a low segment.

low +

The low and high segments are the same.

A GETSEG monitor call has been performed to a
high segment that matches the low segment.
A GETSEG UUO has been done to a high
that does not match the low segment.

blank

segment

The high segment has been released.

With the VERSION command,
represented in the format

the

low

and

high

segments

are

name version
With the SET WATCH VERSION command, the low and high segments are
represented in one of three formats:
name version

The program is not from SYS;

:name version

The output is the result of a SETNAM
(e.g., at the end of loading).

S:name version

The program is a program loaded from the
system device
(actual SYS:
not logical
device SYS:)

Output only from the SET WATCH VERSION command.

2-247

UUO

VERSION Command (Cont.)
The name is a SIXBIT name and the version is in standard format.
When printing the version number, the standard format is:
major version minor version (edit) - group who modified program last
The major version is octal:
the minor version is alphabetic:
the edit is octal and enclosed in parentheses:
and the group who
last modified the program is octal and preceded by a hyphen
(0 = DEC
development,
1 = all
other
DEC
personnel,
and
2-7 = customer use).
There are no spaces separating the
items,
and if an item is zero,
it does not appear in print.
The
parentheses and hyphen also do not appear
in print if the
corresponding item is zero.
The following are examples of
version numbers output in standard format.
10B(335)-1

edit
major version 10, minor version B,
335, group that modified program last
number
1.

7 (5)

major version 7, minor version 0, edit number
5, group that modified program last 0.

54A

major version 54, minor version A,
edit
number 0, group that modified program last 0.

When running under a virtual memory system, DAEMON will be called
on execution of the VERSION command if the first page of the high
segment is paged out.
Command Format
VERSION
Characteristics
The VERSION command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Examples
~R TEC()~

*'"'C

• VEI:;:S:rON~

TEen 24(202)

• F~ SYBTAT ~
'·'C

:VEF~BI()N ~
SYSTAT 47:3A (22~3)

'·'C

:VERSION-./
BDS 21 CL34)
.INITIA..}
'·'C

• VERSION..}

INITIA 7(146)
2-248

WHERE Command

Function
The WHERE command enables you to determine:
1.

the node-id

the node number

the software I.D.

the creation date of the monitor software

(monitor name)

of the node at which a specific peripheral device is located.
If
the node of a particular terminal is requested, the information
returned is that of the physical location of the terminal.
The
information mayor may not be that of the controlling job. This
depends on whether or not you have changed your job's logical
location by means of the LOCATE command.
When the WHERE command does not provide
sufficient
information, the following additional inputs are required:

user

physical device name (both generic and logical);

physical line number (for network TTYs);

NOT CONNECTED entry (if the network TTY is not connected.)

Command Format
WHERE devn:
dev is any physical name and n is the unit number.
where OPR:
allows you to find the location
controlling job thru the OPSER program functions.

Characteristics
The WHERE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.
Allows for an optional colon after the device name.
E:Kamples
4

WHEI:;:E L.PT26()

NODE

1'\1.. 1 ()26 (26)

SCI..IZA KL1() SYSll()26 07-24-77 I..PT260

2-249

the

ZERO Command 1

Function
The ZERO command clears the directory of the output device.
command is equal to the following PIP command string:
dev:

This

/Z=

Command Format
ZERO dev:
dev: is a DECtape (DTAn) or a disk (DSK).
required.

This argument

A directory name can be specified with ZERO DISK:
and if
you have access to the specified directory, the directory is
zeroed.
If you do not specify a directory, your directory
is assumed.
The only acceptable abbreviation of this command is ZER.
Characteristics
The ZERO command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, destroying your core image.
Examples
• ZEF~O

DTAO:J.4:

~ ZEF~O

[18K:

.ZERO

DSK:<27~4072>

This command runs the COMPIL program, which interpret the
before running the PIP program.
2-250

command

CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES

The following conventions are used in describing the system diagnostic
messages:
dev
file structure name
file.ext
adr
n

abc
x

switch

a legal device name.
a legal file structure name.
a legal filename and extension.
a user address.
a number.
a disk unit or drive.
an alphabetic character.
a switch.

Most messages returned to you fall in one of three categories.
These
categories are determined by the beginning character of the message.
?
at the start of the message indicates a fatal error message.
% at the start of the message represents an advisory or warning
message.
at the beginning of the message indicates a comment line.

(Note that the ONCE-only messages have been removed from this section
and placed in ONCE.RNO in the DECsystem-IO Software Notebooks.)
The
user can also employ the VERSION monitor command to determine the
program that output the message.
If the terminal is still in user
mode (i.E!., a character other than a period was output after
the
message), type the following
nC
.VERSION

(two nCs if the program is not waiting for input)

The monitor returns with the name of the program in core
(i.e.,
the
one presumed to have output the message) and the version of that
program.
After receiving the information type .CONT
to return the
terminal to user mode.
If the message was a fatal message (i.e., a
period was output after the message), nC need not be typed since the
terminal is already in monitor mode.
In most cases, the user cannot
type .CONT after a fatal error message.
The descriptive text given with the message indicates what action you
should take when you receive the message.
You can, if necessary,
notify the operator of any problems by issuing the SEND, PLEASE, or R
GRIPE command.

3-1

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
3.1

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

The typein is typed back preceded and followed by?
The monitor encountered an incorrect character (e.g., a letter in
a numeric argument). The incorrect character appears immediately
before the second ?
For example:
.CORE ABC
?CORE A?
ACCOUNTING SYSTEM FAILURE ...
A program could not append an entry
Notify the operator.
(LOGIN, LOGOUT)

the

accounting

file.

?ADDRESS CHECK FOR DEVICE dev
1.

The monitor checked a user address on a UUO and found it to
be too large
(>C(.JBREL»
or too small «C(.JBPFI»;
in
other words, the address lies outside the bounds of the user
program.

The SAVed file is too large for the core
file is not a core image file.
(GET)

assigned,

the

?ALREADY ASSIGNED TO JOB n
The device is already assigned to another user's job (job n).
unit-id ALREADY MOUNTED ON unit
You requested a drive of an already mounted file structure to be
mounted or you requested a drive other than the one on which the
file structure is mounted.
(MOUNT)
?AMBIGUOUS ABBREVIATION
A command or switch has been abbreviated to the point that it
not unique.
(COMPIL)
?dev:

APPARENT UFD PROTECTION FAILURE
Your attempt to delete a file has failed because of a UFD
(KJOB)
protection. As a result, KJOB exits to monitor level.

?ARGS ARE:

DAY, RUN, WAIT, READ, WRITE, VERSION, ALL, NONE

You either did not type an argument or typed an illegal
in the SET WATCH command string.

argument

dev:ASSIGNED
The device has been successfully assigned to the user's job.
3-2

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?ASSIGNED TO JOB n(l), n(2), ...
If there is more than one device of the type specified,
the
numbers of the other jobs that have the same type of device are
output, unless the user assigning the device has all the devices
of the specified type.
In this case, ?DEVICE ASSIGNED TO JOB is
output.
?ATTACH TO USER JOB FAILED
DAEMON could not attach to the user's job.

(DAEMON)

?BAD DIRBCTORY FOR DEVICE DTAn
The system cannot read or write the DEC tape directory without
getting some kind of error. This error often occurs when the
user tries to write on a write-locked tape or use a DECtape that
has never been written on.
?BATCH ONLY
The command issued can only be given by a batch job.
BLOCK NO~r FREE
M specifies a unit or file structure logical block
fr e(~.
(ALCFI L)

that

not

n BLOCKS ALREADY ALLOCATED
The file already exists. The new specification replaces,
than updates, the old specification.
(ALCFIL)

rather

?nlK BLOCKS OF CORE NEEDED
Your. current core allocation is less than the contents of .JBFF.
?BOMB ou~r
The location within INITIA that detected the error will be in
15 and the console lights.
(INITIA)
?BOOTSTRAP LOADER IS NOT IN COPY;

TRY/L

An attempt was made to write the bootstrap loader onto a DECtape
via the /T switch before the loader was loaded into a core buffer
and preserved with the COpy core image.
(COpy program)
?BOOTSTRAP LOADER WILL NOT FIT IN 3 BLOCKS
Your bootstrap loader is too big to fit into blocks 0, 1,
of the output DECtape.
(COpy program)

3-3

and

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?BUFFER CAPACITY EXCEEDED AND NO CORE AVAILABLE
The buffer is not large enough to handle the number of lines
required for looking ahead for matches, and additional core is
not available.
(FILCOM)
?BUSY
The terminal addressed is not communicating with the monitor
(i.e.,
it is accepting a command or returning output from a
command). The operator's terminal is never busy.
(SEND, JCONT)
?CANNOT DO I/O AS REQUESTED
Input (or output) cannot be performed on one of the devices
specified for
input (output).
For example, input may have been
requested for a device that can only do output.
(MAKLIB)
?CANNOT DO OUTPUT TO DEVICE dev
Output was attempted to a device that can only do input, or to
device assigned a logical name.
(QUEUE)

%CANNOT OVERRIDE PPN IMPLIED BY DEVICE
You specified a project-programmer number in a file specification
in his FILE F or FILE Z command that is in conflict with the
project-programmer number associated with the device.
For
example,
the file specification, NEW:POOH.BAH[12,144], would
generate this message since "NEW:" implies the project-programmer
number
[1,5]. The project-programmer number specified by you is
ignored.
(FILE)
?CANNOT PROCESS EXTERNAL SYMBOLS
External symbols were encountered while loading
loader wi th the /L swi tch.
(DTCOPY program)

the

bootstrap

?CANNOT PROCESS HIGH SEG'S
While loading the bootstrap loader with the /L
(DTCOPY program)
segment code was encountered.

switch,

high

?CANNOT REATTACH FROM A BATCH SUBJOB
Batch jobs are not allowed to reattach their jobs.

(REATTA)

?CAN'T ACCESS QUEUE - name MUST NOT BE A LOGICAL NAME
The structure named contains the operator request queue (3,3.UFD)
and must not be the logical name for some other structure.
(MOUNT)

3-4

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?CAN'T ACCESS QUEUE - file structure name MUST NOT BE LOCKED OR
PROT.

WRITE

The named structure is being used to queue requests to the
operator and therefore may not be locked or write-protected.
SETSRC may be used to change the protection.
(MOUNT, DISMOUNT,
FILE)
?CAN'T ACCESS SYSTEM FILES
ACCT.SYS could not be read. Only the operator may
ACCT.SYS is ready. Consult the operator.
(LOGIN)

until

?CAN'T ADD TO YOUR FILE STRUCTURE SEARCH LIST n
n is the error code from
structure to search list.

STRUUO when
(LOGIN)

trying

add

file

?file-structure name CAN'T ADD TO YOUR FILE STRUCTURE SEARCH LIST n
"n" is the error code returned from the STRUUO which is trying to
add this structure to the user's search list. See the STRUUO UUO
error codes in the DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls manual and in the
UUOPRV specification.
This is a system error and therefore is
not a direct fault of the user.
It is typed for potential
diagnostic use. Consult the system administrator.
(MOUNT)
?CAN'T ATT TO JOB
The project-programmer number specified is not that of the owner
of the desired job, the project-programmer number was not given
when it was required, or the PASSWORD given was incorrect.
(ATTACH)
?dev CAN'T BE REASSIGNED
1.

The job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned, or

the logical name would be duplicated, or

the logical name is a physical device name in the system and
the job reassigning the device is either logged-in under a
different project-programmer number or does not have operator
pr ivileges.
(REASSIGN)

?CAN'T CONTINUE
The job was terminated due to
1.

all ERROR IN JOB messages (except for HALT},

the EXIT UUO,

the CLOSE command, or

the REA command when the device was INITed,
and the user
attempted to continue his program at the point at which I/O
was terminated. The job cannot be continued.
3-5

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
CAN'T CREATE NEW FILE STRUCTURE SEARCH LIST
The monitor cannot create a new file structure search list.
?CAN'T DECIPHER THAT
There is a syntax error in the command string.
FILE)

(MOUNT, DISMOUNT,

CAN'T DET DEV
The user is not logged-in under [1,2].
?CAN'T ENTER OUTPUT FILE n file descriptor
The ENTER to write the output file failed;
code.
(DUMP)

n is the

disk

error

expand

the

?CAN'T EXPAND TABLE xxxx
The DUMP program ran out of core
indicated table.
(DUMP)

attempting

?CAN'T FIND INPUT FILE n file descriptor
DUMP cannot locate the file specified as the input
the disk error code.
(DUMP)

file;

?CAN'T FIND FILE file.ext
The specified file could not be found.
?CAN'T FIND STRLST.SYS
The system is unable to locate or access STRLST.SYS,
the system
file that contains necessary information about the structures
known to the system. Consult the system administrator.
(MOUNT)
?CAN'T GET SWAPPING PARAMETERS
DAEMON tried to obtain the job's swapping parameters and
(DAEMON)

failed.

?CAN'T GET SWAPPING POINTER FOR JOB
DAEMON tried to obtain the pointer to the user's job on the
swapping space and could not because the GETTAB UUO failed.
(DAEMON)
?CAN'T GET USERS PPN
DAEMON tried to obtain the user's project-programmer
could not because a GETTAB UUO failed.
(DAEMON)

3-6

number

and

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?CAN'T OPEN file structure name
The file structure is mounted but cannot be opened.
created, though one may already exist.
(LOGIN)

UFO

?file-structure name CAN'T OPEN
The specified device cannot be OPENed;
either because
not exist or because the OPEN UUO failed.
(MOUNT)

does

?CAN'T OPEN DEVICE dev
The specified device does not exist or it is assigned to
user.
(DAEMON)

another

?Cl\N I T OPEN SWAP UNIT abc
DAEMON attempted to use the indicated swapping unit
(DAEMON)

and

failed.

?Cl\N I TREAD STRLST. SYS
A read error occurred when the system tried to read STRLST.SYS,
the system file
that contains necessary information about the
structures
known
to
the
system.
Consult
the
system
administrator.
(MOUNT)
?file structure name CAN'T REDEFINE FILE STRUCTURE n
"n"
is the error code returned from the STRUUO which
is
attempting to redefine the structure to include the user.
See
the STRUUO UUO error codes in the DECsystem-IO Monitor Calls
manual and in the UUOPRV specification.
This is a system error
and therefore is not a direct fault of the user.
It is typed for
potential diagnostic use.
Consult the system administrator.
(MOUNT)
?file structure name CAN'T REMOVE FILE STRUCTURE FROM SEARCH LIST n
"n"
is the error code returned from the STRUUO which
is
attempting to remove the structure from the user's search list.
See STRUUO UUO error codes in the DECsystem-IO Monitor Calls
manual and in the UUOPRV specification. This is a system error
and therefore is not a direct fault of the user.
It is typed for
potential diagnostic use.
Consult the system administrator.
(DISMOUNT)
?Cl\N IT RENAME-FILE PRESERVED
An attempt was made via the /DISPOSE:RENAME switch to delete a
preserved file (i.e., a file whose owner's field is greater than
0).
(QUEUE)

3-7

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?CAN'T SET OUR SEARCH LIST
DAEMON tried to set its search list and failed
(DAEMON)

its

attempt.

?CAN'T SET SEARCH LIST = USER'S
DAEMON attempted to set its file structure search list to be
same as the user's search list.
(DAEMON)

the

?CMLLRE (n) FILE WAS NOT FOUND - filename
The specified was not found on the user's directory.
?COMMAND ERROR
General catch-all error response for most commands.
The syntax
of the command is in error, and the command cannot be deciphered.
In FILCOM, one of the
command string typed.

following

errors

occurred

the

last

- or =) between the output and

input

There is no separator
specifications.

The input specification is completely nulL.

The two input files are not separated by a comma.

A file descriptor consists
alphanumeric characters.

FILCOM does not recognize the specified switch.

The project-programmer number
i.e., [proj,prog].

The value of the specified switch is not octal.

The first input file is followed by a comma
input file is nUll.

characters

not

other

standard

but

than

format,

the

second

command

code.

?COMMAND SWITCH REQUIRED
The given
(MAKLIB)

command

string

requires

MAKLIB

?COMMAND SYNTAX ERROR
TYPE /H FOR HELP
An illegal command string was entered.

(GLOB)

n COMMANDS IN QUEUE
The request typed by you has been placed in a queue to be
performed when possible.
n is the number of requests in the
queue for all users.
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)

3-8

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?COMMA REQUIRED IN DIRECTORY
A project-programmer number has
separating comma.
(DUMP, QUEUE)

been

specified

without

the

CONT BY aPR
The job has been continued by the operator.
on the console of the job being continued.

This message appears
(JCONT)

?CONTROL AND LOG FILES MUST BE DISTINCT
The control file cannot
(QUEUE)
?2K

the

same

file

the

log

file.

FILCOM needs 2K of core to initialize I/O devices and
is not available from the monitor.
(FILCOM)

this

core

CORE NEEDED AND NOT AVAILABLE

%CPUn OPRI ACTION REQUESTED
The Job's CPU specification includes a CPU which is not running
or
is
not
scheduling
jobs.
The monitor remembers the
specification and uses the CPU as soon as it is started.
If at
least one CPU is running, the message is printed only once, since
the job can run on another CPU.
?DAEMON FILE MUST BE WRITTEN ON A DISK
The device specified was a nondisk device.

(DAEMON)

?DAEMON NOT RUNNING
The DAEMON program has not been initialized.
It must be started
by the operator to allow the DUMP and DCORE commands to operate.
(DUMP, DCORE)
?DETACH UUO FAILED
DAEMON could not detach itself from the TTY.
Note that DAEMON
does not detach itself if it is loaded with DDT.
(DAEMON)
?DATA ERROR ON DEVICE PTR
A read error has occurred on the paper-tape reader.
?DESTINATION DEVICE ERROR
An I/O error occurred on the output device.

3-9

(GLOB)

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?DEVICE CAN'T BE REASSIGNED
1.

The job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned,

the logical name would be duplicated, or

the logical name is a physical device name and the
job
reasslgnlng the device is either logged in under a different
project-programmer number or is not the operator.

?DEVICE ERROR ON OUTPUT DEVICE
A write error has occurred on the output file.

(MAKLIB)

?DEVICE INIT FAILURE
The specified device has been assigned to another job or does not
exist.
?DEVICE MUST BE A DECTAPE
The only device that can
string is the DECtape.

specified

the

DTCOPY

command

?DEVICE NOT ASSIGNABLE
A non-privileged user cannot assign the requested device because
it belongs to the restricted pool of devices.
The user should
try to assign the device with the MOUNT command.
(ASSIGN)
?DEVICE NOT AVAILABLE
Specified cannot be initialized because another user is using
or because it does not exist.

?DEVICE WILDCARD ILLEGAL
The wildcard construction cannot
(DUMP, QUEUE)
specification.

used

the

device

?DIALOG MODE NOT SUPPORTED
The capability of interactive dialogue with the user has not been
implemented.
(QUEUE)
?DIRECTORY FULL ON OUTPUT DEVICE
There is no room in the file directory on the outut device to add
the updated file (nondisk devices only).
(MAKLIB)
device name DISMOUNTED
The DISMOUNT command has completed.

3-10

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?device name DISMOUNT INCOMPLETE
The DISMOUNT command was unsuccessful.
In most cases,
the
reasons
for failure have already been listed by nonerror
messaqes.
DON'T KNOW CITY LINE NUMBER
The DeORE command cannot be typed on CTY.

(DAEMON)

?DOUBLE DEVICE ILLEGAL
Two device names appeared in a row without an intervening
filename,
or two colons appeared in a row, e.g., LPT:PTP:
or
DSKA :: FI LEX.
(DUMP, QUEUE)
?DOUBLE DIRECTORY ILLEGAL
Two directory names cannot
filename.
(DUMP, QUEUE)

appear

without

intervening

?DOUBLE EXTENSION ILLEGAL
Two extensions cannot appear without an intervening
comma.
(DUMP, QUEUE)

filename

?DOUBLE FILENAME ILLEGAL
Two filenames appeared in a row, or two
row;
e.g., Q TESTl TEST2 or TESTX.MACJ

periods appeared
(DUMP, QUEUE)

?DPA n ILLEGAL UNIT
The user has specified a drive that does not exist in the system.
(MOUNT)
%DRTLKE NON-EXISTENT FILE filename
A file was specified in the command string that is not present in
the user's default directory.
?DSK CAN'T BE REASSIGNED
An attempt was made to reassign the prototype
block (DDB).

disk

device

data

disk

?DSKCHR FAILURE n ON UNIT abc
The DSKCHR UUO gave an unexpected error return;
n
error code. Notify the operator.
(DAEMON, KJOB)

3-11

the

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?ENTER ERROR n
?DIRECTORY FULL
No additional files can be added to the directory of
devicei n is the disk error code.
(GLOB)

the

output

?ENTER FAILURE
The DECtape directory is full (i.e., there is
file to be written on the DECtape).

room

for

the

?ENTER FAILURE n
The output filename is nUlli
n is the error code for an
filename (nondisk devices only).
(MAKLIB)

illegal

?ENTER FAILURE IN QUEUE MANAGER
QUEUE was unable to
(QUEUE)

enter

the

files

into

the

output

queue.

?ENTER FAILURE n ON DAEMON FILE
The ENTER to write the file failedi

n is the disk error code.

?ENTRY BLOCK TOO LARGE PROGRAM name
The entry block of the named program is too large for the MAKLIB
entry table, which allows for 100 entry names. MAKLIB can be
reassembled wi th a large r table.
(MAKLIB)
?ERROR CLOSING OUTPUT, STATUS = n
An I/O error occurred while closing the file on diski
disk error code (DUMP).

the

?ERROR IN JOB 0
Usually this message indicates an error has occurred in the
monitor.
The message appears on either the user's terminal or
the operator's terminal and precedes a one-line description of
the error.
?ERROR IN DETACHED JOB n [prog name]
A fatal error occurred in the detached job or in the monitor
while servicing the job.
This message appears only on the
operator's terminal (OPR) and precedes a one-line description of
the error.
?ERSATZ DEVICE ersatz device
Attempt was made to remove an ersatz device from the search
with R.
(SETSRC)

3-12

list

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?EXCEED LOG-OUT m QUOTA BY n BLOCKS
The total number of blocks for all the user's files exceeds the
maximum permitted value (mmm) by the indicated amount (nnn).
If
you are the operator, the DISMOUNT proceeds.
Otherwise,
this
message is followed by the message "?DISMOUNT INCOMPLETE". Then,
you may use PIP or the DELETE command to remove files.
But,
until the number of blocks is under the limit, you cannot
dismount a structure or log out.
(DISMOUNT)
?EXECUTION DELETED
A program is prevented from being executed because of errors
detected during assembly,
compilation, or loading.
Loading is
performed, but the loader exits to the monitor without starting
execution.
(LOADER)
?EXPECTED FORMAT IS nnnK

= 16K to 256K

The core-bank specified while processing the IT switch is not
within the acceptable range or does not terminate with the letter
Ki
e.g., 32 is not acceptable;
32K is.
(COpy program)
file structure name FILE ERRORS EXIST
One of the files in a file structure has an error
flagged in the UFD of that file structure.
(LOGIN)

status,

without

?FILENAME ALREADY IN USE
The specified file already exists.

(COMPIL)

?FILENAME REQUIRED FOR INPUT QUEUE
A file cannot be entered into the Batch
filename.
(QUEUE)

input

queue

?filename FILE NOT FOUND
File specified cannot be located.
?FILE n NOT IN SAV FORMAT
You indicated via the IX switch that the file is to be expanded
but the specified file is not in compressed file format.
n is
either 1 or 2 indicating the first file or the second file.
(FILCOM)
?FILE n READ ERROR
An error has occurred on either the first or second input device.
(FILCOM)

3-13

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?FILE REQUEST NOT QUEUED
Your file request
reasons.
(FILE)
?FILE R ILLEGAL IF DSK:

was

not

queued.

Other

messages

give

the

CONTAINS NO UFD

You tried to do a FILE R command with a search list that has no
device that is eligible to receive the recalled files.
You
should have at least one structure in your active search list
that contains both a UFD and the status of jCREATE and jWRITE.
You should adjust your search list with the SETSRC command and
retry the FILE command.
(FILE)
%FILES ARE DIFFERENT
The two input files specified in the command string are different
(i.e.,
the two files are not two versions of the same file but
are two different files).
(FILCOM)
?FILE SWITCHES ILLEGAL IN OUTPUT FILE
File switches cannot appear on the left of the equal sign,
in the output specification.
(QUEUE)

i.e.,

?(3) FILE WAS BEING MODIFIED-file.ext
Another user is modifying the file.

(COMPIL)

?(O) FILE WAS NOT FOUND-file.ext
The named file could not be located.

(COMPIL)

?FORMAT OR READ ERROR IN AUXACC.SYS
LOGIN unexpectedly found an end-of-file
AUXACC.SYS. Notify the operator.
(LOG~N)

error

The file in the file structure has an error status as flagged
the UFD of the file structure.
(LOGIN)

file. ext FOUND BAD BY FAILSAFE READING MTA

FROM JOB n
An informative message telling you the job number to which the
console was attached or from which the console is detaching.
(ATTACH, DETACH)
?GIVING BACK TOO MUCH CORE
An internal problem in the DUMP program.
programmer or software specialist.
(DUMP)

3-14

Notify

your

system

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?HALT AT USER adr
Your program executed a HALT instruction at adr.
Typing CONTINUE
resumes
execution
at
the effective address of the halt
instruction.
file.ext HARDWARE DATA READ ERROR DETECTED
The file has a hardware data read error flagged in the UFO of the
file structure.
(LOGIN)
file.ext HARDWARE DATA WRITE ERROR DETECTED
The :file has a hardware data write error flagged in
the :Eile structure.
(LOGIN)

the

UFO

%structure name HAS OTHER USERS-/REMOVE IGNORED
The specified structure is still being used by other
jobs.
The
structure is removed from your search list but is not physically
dismounted.
(DISMOUNT)
?Hl\VE OPERATOR START OMOUNT, THEN TRY AGAIN
The command area where your requests are stored does
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)

not

exist.

?HUNG DEVICE dev
If a device does not respond within a certain period after it is
referenced, the system decides that the device is not functioning
and outputs this message.
?ILLEGAL BLOCK TYPE dev:file.ext
The block type used is not in the range 0-77.

(MAKLIB)

?ILLEGAL BLOCK TYPE
an
While loading the bootstrap loader with the /L switch,
(DTCOPY
unrecognizable block type was encountered by DTCOPY.
program)
?ILLEGAL COMMAND SYNTAX CHARACTER x
The character x
(QUEUE)

used

incorrectly

the

command

string.

The data mode specified for a device in your program is
such as dump mode for the terminal.
(MAKLIB)

illegal,

?ILLEGAL DATA MODE FOR dev

3-15

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?ILLEGAL DEVICE - dev:
(FILE)

you specified a file structure name that is not a disk.
drive ILLEGAL DRIVE NAME
The drive requested by the user is
system.
(MOUNT)

not

one

recognized

the

?drive ILLEGAL DRIVE NAME
The drive specified by the user is in conflict with the unit or
controller type required by the units of the file structure.
(MOUNT)
?(O) ILLEGAL FILENAME
A filename of zero was specified.

(MAKLIB)

?ILLEGAL IN BATCH JOB
The ATTACH, DETACH, SEND, CCONT,
cannot be used by a batch job.

and

CSTART

monitor

commands

not

defined

?ILLEGAL JOB NUMBER
The job number
configuration.

too

large

that

does

this

?ILLEGAL NAME - name
You specified a structure name
DISMOUNT)

not

exist.

(MOUNT,

?ILLEGAL QUEUE DEVICE
The queue name specified cannot be used with
(QUEUE)

the

given

switch.

The queue is not of the system queues, or the queue is a
name.
(QUEUE)

logical

?ILLEGAL QUEUE NAME xxx

?ILLEGAL SWITCH
A non-recognizable switch was used in the command string.

(GLOB)

?ILLEGAL TO CREATE REQUEST FOR SOMEONE ELSE
Only the operator logged in under 1,2 can create queuing
for other users.
(QUEUE)

3-16

request

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?drive name ILLEGAL UNIT
The drive specified by the
(MOUNT, DISMOUNT)

user

not

valid

drive

name.

?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER adr
An illegal UUO was executed at user location adr.
?ILL INST.

AT USER adr

An illegal operation code was encountered in your program.
?ILL MEM REF AT USER adr
An illegal memory referenc~ was made by your program.
If this
message occurred on a memory write, the error is at adr-l since
the program counter has been advanced.
If it occurred on a
memo:ry read, then the illegal instruction is probably in location
adr.
You should use the E command to first exam{ne location
adr-l and then location adr in order to determine the illegal
instruction. The index registers may also have to be examined.
?INCORREC'r VALUE FOR /WRITE SWITCH:xxx
You specified the value "xxx" with the /WRITE switch.
acceptable values are YES and NO.
(MOUNT)

The

only

?INPUT AND OUTPUT DECTAPES MAY NOT BE THE SAME DEVICE
The COpy program prforms its operations on an input DEC tape and
an output DECtape. These DECtapes cannot be the same.
(DTCOPY
program)
?INPUT (or OUTPUT) BLOCK TOO LARGE
A DECtape block number greater than 1101 (octal) was encountered.
(DTCOPY program)
?INPUT (or OUTPUT) CHECKSUM OR PARITY ERROR
A read (or write) error has been detected.

(DTCOPY program)

?INPUT DEVICE dev CANNOT DO OUTPUT AT USER adr
Output was attempted on a device that can only
the card reader).

input

(e.g.,

?INPUT (or OUTPUT) DEVICE ERROR
The DECtape control unit has detected
mi ssed block.
(DTCOPY progr am)

3-17

the

loss

data

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?INPUT DEVICE NOT A DISK
The input specifications in a QUEUE command must be
(QUEUE)

disk

files.

?INPUT ERROR
An I/O error occurred while reading a temporary command file from
the disk.
File should be rewritten.
(COMPIL)
?INPUT ERROR - file.ext FILE NOT FOUND
The specified file could
(FILCOM)
?INPUT ERROR ON DEVICE dev:

not

STATUS

found

the

input

device.

(nnnnnn)

A data or device error occurred on input.

(MAKLIB)

?INPUT ERROR, STATUS = n
n is the
An I/O error occurred while reading the file from disk;
disk error code.
A new INPUT command causes a new LOOKUP to be
done.
(DUMP, DAEMON)
?INPUT (or OUTPUT) PREMATURE END OF FILE
When copying a DECtape, DTCOPY encountered the end of file before
it expected it.
This may happen when copying a PDP-9 DECtape to
a DECsystem-lO DECtape.
(DTCOPY program)
?INSUFFICIENT CORE FOR QUEUE
There is no enough core in system at the time of the KJOB command
to make an output queue entry.
(QUEUE)
?INVALID ENTRY - TRY AGAIN

#
An illegal project-programmer number or password was entered and
did not match
identification in system.
The user is to retype
his project-programmer number and password.
(LOGIN)
?I/O TO UNASSIGNED CHANNEL AT USER adr
An attempt was made to do an OUTPUT,
INPUT, OUT,
or
device that the user's program has not initialized.

?x IS AN ILLEGAL CHARACTER SWITCH
An illegal character or switch was
s tr ing.
(MAKLIB)

3-18

encountered

the

command

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?symbol IS A MULTIPLY DEFINED LOCAL
The named symbol is in more than one symbol table with
values.
(DUMP)

different

?symbol IS AN UNDEFINED SYMBOL
The named symbol is not in DUMP's symbol table.

(DUMP)

?symbol IS AN UNDEFINED SYMBOL TABLE NAME
The named symbol
command.
(DUMP)

table

has

not

been

loaded

with

XTRACT

?JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED
1.

This message is received by a user who attempts to login
after the maximum number of jobs that the system has been set
to handle has been initiated.
The user should login at a
later time.
(LOGIN)

This message is received when a system program must create a
job in order to perform its operation and the maximum number
of jobs has been ini tiated.
(SYSTAT, HELP, ATTACH)

This message may appear on rare occasions when an error made
by the system hardware causes a reduction in the job capacity
of the system.

?JOB NOT WAITING
The job specified is not waiting to be continued.

(JCONT)

aOB SAVED
The output is completed.
JOBn USER [p,p] LOGGED OFF TTY n AT hhmm dd-mm-yy
DELETED (ALL) n FILES
SAVED (ALL) n FILES m TOTAL BLOCKS USED
ANOTHER JOB STILL LOGGED IN UNDER [p,p]
IWNTIME n MIN m SEC
This information is typed as you log off successfully.
Note that
m is total blocks allocated as opposed to blocks written.
Therefore, it is always greater than or equal to the number of
blocks written.
Files are allocated in units of blocks called
clusters.
The system administrator selects the cluster size for
each file structure,
usually one block per cluster for FH file
structures,
and 5 or 10 blocks per cluster for DP
file
structures.
(KJOB)
:~LANGUAGE

PROCESSOR CONFLICT

The use of the + construction has resulted in a mixture of source
languages.
(COMPIL)

3-19

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?LEVEL 0 ONLY
The command issued is available only in 5-series monitors.
[LGNQTA structure IN:

iiiiii OUT:

000000

USED;

nnn]

The monitor has computed the disk usage on structure to be iiiiii
input file quota, 000000 output file quota, and nnn blocks used.
[LGNRDU RECOMPUTING DISK USAGE]
The monitor is recomputing the disk usage on
directory, before the user can successfully LOGIN.

the

default

?LGTISK ILLEGAL SYNTAX IN KJOB COMMAND
An illegal command syntax has been specified
KJOB.
(LOGOUT)

for

command

?LGTCSK CONFLICTING SWITCHES IN KJOB COMMAND
Conflicting switch-types have been specified to the KJOB command.
(LOGOUT)
%LGTURS UNRECOGNIZED SWITCH switch - IGNORED
An illegal (unrecognizable) switch has been specified
it is ignored.
(LOGOUT)

for

KJOB,

%LGTJWF JOBSTR UUO FAILED - NO QUOTA ENFORCED
The JOBSTR monitor call was executed, and it failed;
no quotas are in effect.
(LOGOUT)

therefore,

%LGTCCW CAN'T CLEAR SOFTWARE WRITE-LOCK ON STRUCTURE structure
You had structure software write-locked, and the STRUUO to clear
this condition failed.
This message is usually found by a
%LGTURF message.
(LOGOUT)
[LGTWFI WAITING FOR structure UFO INTERLOCK]
LOGOUT attempts to set the monitor UFO interlock before doing
quota enforcement.
If another job has it interlocked already,
LOGOUT will wait.
(LOGOUT)
[LGTRDU RECOMPUTING DISK USAGE ON structure]
Disk usage
(LOGOUT)

being

recomputed

3-20

the

specified

structure.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?LGTOUF OPEN UUO FAILED FOR structure
The specified structure tried to execute an
but it failed.
(LOGOUT)

OPEN

monitor

call,

?LGTLQE structure LOGGED-OUT QUOTA nnn EXCEEDED BY nn BLOCKS
Your allocation on the file structure named is greater than your
logged out quota.
The user must go through the CONFIRM dialogue
and delete files until you are under the quota allowed to log
off.
(KJOB, LOGOUT)
%LGTULF ZSTRUCTURE UFD LOOKUP FAILURE nn
A LOOKUP was executed on the specified structure, and it failed.
%LGTURF structure UFD RENAME FAILURE nn
A RENAME was executed on the specified structure, and it failed.
DAEMON NOT RUNNING
?LGTASF ACCOUNTING SYSTEM FAILURE DAEMON UUO FAILED
ERROR CODE NO.
An error occurred in the system accounting files, and the DAEMON
UUO failed.
Call the operator if you receive such a message.
If
the operator receives the message, continue the system for system
debugging.
?LINKAGE ERROR - RUN UUO
An I/O error occurred while reading a
SYS: •
(COMP IL)

program

from

the

device

%LISTING DEVICE OUTPUT ERROR, STATUS =
The device specified for the output has an error.
A new OUT
command selecting a
new file can be given or an OUT and APPEND
command sequence to try again.
(DUMP)
?LISTING ENTER FAILURE n
The ENTER to write the output file failed:
code.
(QUEUE)

n is the

disk

error

?LISTING OPEN FAILURE ON DEVICE dev
The OPEN failed on device dev.

(QUEUE)

?file structure LOCKED OUT BY OPERATOR
The operator has locked this structure,
accesses, in order that it may be removed.

3-21

preventing
(MOUNT)

any

new

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
%LOG FILE DEVICE IS NOT DSK OR SPOOLED;
The log file device is not a disk or
assumes TTY.
(KJOB)

WILL USE TTY
therefore,

spooled;

KJOB

file structure name LOGGED OUT QUOTA n EXCEEDED BY m BLOCKS
Your allocation on the file structure named is greater than your
logged out quota.
You must go through the CONFIRM dialogue and
delete files until you are under the quota allowed to log off.
(KJOB, LOGOUT)
%LOGICAL NAME WAS IN USE, DEVICE dev ASSIGNED
You previously assigned this logical name to another device.
The
logical name is cleared from the first device and assigned to the
second.
LOGICAL NAME IN USE (NAME IGNORED)
You specified a logical name in your MOUNT command
that is
currently in use by the same job.
MOUNT creates a unique logical
name of the form "Mnnnnn" for this MOUNT request.
(MOUNT)
?LOGIN PLEASE
A command that requires you to be logged in has been typed to the
monitor;
it cannot be accepted until your perform a LOGIN.
?LOGIN PLEASE TO USE SWITCH CREATE
You must be logged in to make a new entry into
(QUEUE)

system

queue.

?LOOKUP ERROR n
?file.ext FILE NOT FOUND
The named file cannot be found in the directory on the
device.
(GLOB)
?LOOKUP FAILED,

specified

'BSLDR.REL'

While processing the /L switch, COpy could not find the bootstrap
loader named BSLDR.REL.
(COpy program)
?LOOKUP FAILURE
The LOOKUP to read the disk file
failed.
This message
is
(MAKLIB)
followed by a line explaining the reason for failure.
?fiLe structure name LOOKUP FAILURE n
The LOOKUP to read the file failed;

3-22

n is the disk error code.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
LOOKUP FAILURE FOR AUXACC.SYS
The system was unable to find AUXACC.SYS
(one of the system's
master accounting files).
The system is unable to determine
quotas on your file structure.
For MOUNT commands this means
that no UFD can be created.
(MOUNT, DISMOUNT)
?LOOKUP FAILURE FOR INPUT FILE n file
DUMP cannot read the input file.

(DUMP)

?LOOKUP FAILURE n ON DAEMON FILE
The LOOKUP to read the DAEMON file failed;
code.
(DAEMON)

n is the

disk

error

%LOOKUP FOR HOME BLOCKS FAILED
The system is unable to locate or access HOME.SYS on the mounted
structure.
Your job will continue, this allowing unformatted
structures to be accessed.
(MOUNT)
?MAKLIB SYNTAX ERROR
An illegal command string was entered;
for example,
the equal
sign was omitted or a program name was specified for the output
file.
(MAKLIB)
n

?Ml~X

A value was specified for an argument that is
maximum value (n) allowed.
(DUMP)

greater

than

the

number

the

number

?MllY NOT LOG I N AS MFD PPN
No

one

can

proj(~ct-programmer

?MJI.Y NOT LOGIN

as
[1,1]
because this
number of the MFD.
(LOGIN)

LOCAL
REMOTE
DATA SET
BATCH JOB SUBJOB
REMOTE CTY
OPR

ACCT.SYS entry does not permit the project-programmer
login at the terminal that is being used.
(LOGIN)
?MAY NOT LOGOUT WITH FILE STRUCTURES FOR LOGICAL NAMES

A file structure in the job's search list is assigned a logical
name, and only physical device names are recognized. The user
should deassign the logical names.
(KJOB, LOGOUT)

3-23

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?MEM PAR ERROR AT USER PC adr
The processor detected a memory parity error in the low or high
segment while the job was executing. The adr is the address of
the PC stored by the hardware rather than the user address of the
parity error.
The operator also receives an error message giving
the range of absolute addresses in case memory reconfiguration is
necessary.
DAEMON is awakened in order to record the pertinent
information about the error for field service personnel.
You must start a new copy of your program by typing the
appropriate monitor command R, RUN, or GET. You should not start
the program over by typing START, since the error is likely to
reoccur or the program operate with incorrect data.
?MKLBTL ENTRY BLOCK TOO LARGE, PROGRAM name
The entry block of the named program is too large for the MAKLIB
entry table, which allows for 1000 entry names.
MAKLIB can be
reassembled wi th a larger table.
(MAKLIB)
?MKLDFO DIRECTORY FULL ON OUPUT DEVICE
There is no room in the file directory on the output
add the updated (non-disk devices only).
(MAKLIB)

device

?MKLDNA dev NOT AVAILABLE
The specified device does not exist or
user.
(MAKLIB)

assigned

another

?MKLEFI ENTER FAILURE
The ENTER to
followed by
(MAKLIB)

This message
is
for
the failure.

write the disk file failed.
a line explaining the reason

?MKLEFO ENTER FAILURE n
The output filename is null;
n is the error code for an
filename (non-disk devices only).
(MAKLIB)

illegal

?MKLEOD DEVICE ERROR ON OUTPUT DEVICE
A writer error has occurred on the output file.

(MAKLIB)

?MKLIBT ILLEGAL BLOCK TYPE dev:file.ext
The block type used is not in the range 0-77, 1000-1777, or ASCII
text from .TEXT pseudo-op.
(MAKLIB)
?MKLIDM ILLEGAL DATA MODE FOR dev
The data mode specified for a device in the
illegal, such as dump mode for the terminal.

3-24

user's program
(MAKLIB)

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES

?MKLIFN (0) ILLEGAL FILENAME
A filename of zero was specified.

(MAKLIB)

?MKLMSE MAKLIB SYNTAX ERROR
An illegal command string was entered;
for example,
the left
arrow was omitted or a program name was specified for the output
file.
(MAKLIB)
?MKLNEA NOT ENOUGH ARGUMENTS
An insufficient number of files of one type has
(MAKLIB) •

been

specified.

%MKLNIN WARNING NO INDEX ON OUPUT FILE-CONTINUING
The user has changed the structure of the indexed library file
when deleting, appending, or inserting, thereby invalidating the
index. The index has been removed from the new file.
Reindexing
is required.
(MAKLIB)
?MKLNIO CANNOT DO I/O AS REQUESTED
Input (or output) cannot be performed on one of the devices
speci.fied for
input (output).
For example, input may have been
requested for a device that can only do output.
(MAKLIB)
?MKLNPS dev:file.ext/switch: ( ) NO PROGRAM NAME SPECIFIED
The switch (/D or /R) used in the command string requires that
program name be given.
(MAKLIB)

?MKLTEI TRANSMISSION ERROR ON INPUT DEVICE dev
A transmission error has occurred while
spec i f ied device.
(MAKLIB)

reading

data

from

the

?MKLTMN TOO MANY FILENAMES OR PROGRAM NAMES
More than 40 program names or filenames were specified in the
command string.
The user should separate the job into several
segments.
(MAKLIB)
?MKLUMT UNEQUAL AMOUNT OF MASTER AND TRANSACTION PROGRAMS
On a replace request, the number of master programs
(or files)
does not equal the number of transaction program (or files).
(MAKLIB)
MONITOR MUST BE 5.03 or later
This version of UMOUNT must be run on a 5.03
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)

3-25

later

monitor.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?MORE THAN ONE OUTPUT FILE ILLEGAL
Only one output queue-name may be specified in the QUEUE
str ing.
(QUEUE)

command

?device MOUNTED
The device is mounted and ready for use.
The MOUNT command has
completed.
If a file structure was mounted, a list of the unit
ID's and the dr ives on which they are mounted is output.
(MOUNT)
?MOUNT INCOMPLETE
UMOUNT was unable to complete the user's
messages give the reasons.
(MOUNT)

MOUNT

Other

request.

?MOUNT UNSUCCESSFUL
UMOUNT was unable to process the MOUNT request.
accompany this one to give the reasons.
(MOUNT)

Other

messages

?MUST BE IN OWNER'S PROJECT TO REQUEST SINGLE ACCESS
You may not request single-access
(/SINGLE switch)
unless you
have the same project number as the owner of the file structure.
This requirement is enforced since a user with single access may
execute super-USETI/USETO UUOs.
(MOUNT)
?MUST BE LOGGED IN
You must be logged in to queue MOUNT, DISMOUNT,
and FILE
requests.
(Note that with a change to the monitor, these
commands may be used with the check or HELP functions without you
being logged in.)
(MOUNT)
NAME:
The ACCT.SYS entry for this project-programmer number requires
you to type a name which matches the one in ACCT.SYS in order to
log in.
(LOGIN)
?NEED 5.03 OR LATER FOR REATTACH COMMAND
The REATTA program depends on UUOs available in the 5.03 release
of the monitor.
The user attempted to run the program using an
older moni tor.
(REATTA)
?NESTING TOO DEEP
The @ construction exceeds a depth of nine and may be
loop a @ command files (COMPIL).

3-26

due

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?NETUNN _. UNDEFINED NETWORK NODE
A node/station has been specified that is not in contact with the
command decoder.
NO COMMANDS IN QUEUE
There are no requests (of the specified type;
MOUNT, DISMOUNT,
or FILE) in the queue from any of the users.
This message may be
issued in response to anyone of the following commands:
MOUNT
/CHECK, DISMOUNT /CHECK, or FILE C.
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)
?NO CORE ASSIGNED
No core was allocated when the GET command was given and no
argument was specified in the GET.

core

iNO DEVICE FOR DIRECTORY
A FILE command has been issued and you have no device in your
active search list that is eligible to have the directory written
on it. That is, the search list does not contain a structure
that has both a UFD for you and a status of /CREATE and /WRITE.
The command is processed but no directory is created.
(When
UMOUNT writes directories, it attempts to put them on the first
structure in your search list that has both a UFD and a status of
/CRE:ATE and /WRITE.)
(FILE)
NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED
(FILCOM)

No differences were found between the two input files.
?(l) NO DIRECTORY FOR PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBER - file.ext

A UFD does not exist for the requested project-programmer number.
(COJ.VIPIL)
?NO END BLOCK ENCOUNTERED
The last block of the bootstrap loader program must
block (refer to the MACRO manual).
(DTCOPY program)

end

?NO ENTRY IN AUXACC.SYS
NO SEARCH LIST OR UFDS CREATED
If you have no entry in AUXACC.SYS, LOGIN does not create UFOS or
a search list.
You are logged-in and have UFDs if they existed
previously.
You may write only on file structures that have UFDs
or read all file structures.
You may also create a file
structure search list with SETSRC. You can create UFOs on those
file structures for which you have an entry in QUOTA.SYS by using
the MOUNT command.
(LOGIN)

3-27

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
NO ENTRY IN QUOTA.SYS OR AUXACC.SYS
You do not have a UFO on the specified structure.
Your ability
to access and create files on the structure depends on the
individual protection of the structure's other UFOs and files.
(MOUNT)
%NO INFO ON name
You specified a feature
(HELP)

that

has

available

documentation.

?NO MODIFIER ALLOWED IN SWITCH switch
The switch specified cannot have an argument.

(QUEUE)

NONE PENDING FOR YOUR JOB
You have specified the WAIT or CHECK option in your FILE, MOUNT,
or DISMOUNT command and there are no pending requests in the
queue.
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)
?NON-EXISTENT DRIVE DPAm
The user has specified a drive that does not exist in the system.
(MOUNT)
%NON-EXISTENT FILE input specification
The file specified for input could not be found.
This message is
not output if the /NEW switch is specified for the file.
(QUEUE)
?NON-EX MEM AT USER adr
Usually due to an error in the monitor.
?NO OPR.JOB FOR THIS REQUEST
An operator request has been issued,
but there is no OMOUNT
running and enabled to service the request. The request is still
queued unless the /PAUSE switch was given.
?NO PRIVILEGES TO SET CPU
You do not have the privilege set by LOGIN from ACCT.SYS to
change the CPU specification.
You should request that these
privilege bits be set by the system manager.
?NO PRIVS TO SET PRIORITY THAT HIGH
You do not have privileges to set such a high priority.

3-28

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC

MESS~GES

AND ERROR CODES

?NO PRIVS TO UNSPOOL
You do not have privileges to unspool devices, and
has not set bit 28 in the STATES word.
?dev:file.ext

the

operator

< NO PROGRAM NAME SPECIFIED>

The switch (/D or IR) used in the command string requires that
pro9ram name be given.
(MAKLIB)
?NO

REMO,]~E

USERS.

TRY AGAIN LATER

The operator has used the SET SCHEDULE command to prevent LOGINs
from remote terminals.
The message Of the day is still typed.
(LOGIN)
NO ROOM IN QUEUE, TRY AGAIN LATER
There is no room in the queue for your request to be sent to
operator.
(MOUNT)

the

?NO ROOM IN QUEUE, TRY AGAIN LATER
The [3,3] command area (where your requests are stored)
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)

full.

There is no room on the file structure or your quota on the
structure has been exceeded.

file

?(14) NO ROOM OR QUOTA EXCEEDED - file.ext

%NO RUNNING CPUS IN SPECIFICATION
If none of the CPUs in the job's CPU specification are running,
the user
receives this message every minute until the CPU is
started or he types a new SET CPU command.
?NO START ADR
Starting address or reenter address is zero,
because the user
failed to specify the starting address in the END statement of
the source program or in the START command.
However, an implicit
starting address of 0 may be specified.
?NO STRUCTURE NAME
You did not
(DISI\10UNT)

specify

device

your

DISMOUNT

command.

?NO SUCH DEVICE
The device name does not exist or was not assigned to this job.

3-29

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?NO SUCH JOB
An attempt was made
initialized.

attach

job

that

has

not

been

?NO SUCH STR
A nonexistent file structure was specified.

(KJOB)

?NO SUCH TTY
The terminal number is not part of the system configuration.
?NO SUCH UNIT
The unit does not exist or all units of this type are in use.
?NO SYS
This is a system error and therefore is not a direct fault of the
user.
It
is typed for potential diagnostic use.
(FILE, MOUNT,
DISMOUNT)
?NOT A JOB
The job number is not assigned to any
(ATTACH, DSK, JCONT).
There is no
terminal.
(CONTINUE)

currently running job.
job logged in at this

?NOT A SAVE FILE
The file is not a core image file.
?NOT A SPOOLING DEVICE
The device specified is not one of
CDP, CDR, PTP, PLT).

the

spooling

devices

(LPT,

?NOT A STR - TRY AGAIN
The file structure specified is not recognized by the monitor.
?NOT A TTY
The device name given is not a terminal.

(REATTA)

?NOT AVAILABLE
The operator has restricted use of the specified feature, or the
console switches are set to disallow the use of a programmable
address break.

3-30

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?drive NOT AVAILABLE
The drive indicated by you is not currently available.

(MOUNT)

?command NOT CODED
A command that is not in this version of DUMP
the command string.
(DUMP)

was

specified

?NOT ENOUGH ARGUMENTS
An :insufficient number of files of one type has
(MAKLIB)

been

specified.

?NOT ENOIJGH CORE
The system cannot supply enough core to use as buffers or to read
in a system program.
(COMPIL)
NOT ENOUGH DRIVES AVAILABLE
There are currently not enough drives of the right type to
the file structure.
(MOUNT)

mount

NOT ENOUGH TABLE SPACE FOR SWAPPING UNITS
There are more swapping units than DAEMON
should be reassembled.
(DAEMON)

allowed

for.

DAEMON

?dev file.ext program NOT FOUND
The file or the program was not found on the device or
in the
file specified.
If a program name is printed, this message may
indicate that the program names in the command string appear in a
sequence
different
from
their sequence within the file.
The]~efore, the program may actually exist but missed
because of
the incorrect sequence in the command string.
(MAKLIB)
?file.SAV NOT FOUND
The program file requested cannot be found on the
or the specified device.

system

device

unit-id NOT MOUNTED
The file structure is mounted but the specified unit is not.
According to STRLST.SYS, the unit should belong to the structure.
Consult the system administrator.
This message is followed by
the message "REQUEST QUEUED TO READY DRIVES." (MOUNT)
drive NO']? READY
The indicated drive is either off-line or physically write-locked
when write-enabled was requested.
The operator will be notified.
(MOUNT)
3-31

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
unit-id NOT READY
The requested file structure exists but the unit is not ready.
This message is followed by the message "REQUEST QUEUED TO READY
DRIVES." (MOUNT)
?NOT YET SUPPORTED COMMAND CODE switch
A switch has been specified that is not implemented.

(QUEUE)

NO UFD CREATED
You cannot have a UFD on this structure. Your ability to access
and create files on the structure depends on the individual
protection of the structure's other UFDs and files.
(MOUNT)
NO UFD CREATED
You may access the file structure, but you cannot write
disk area since you have no UFD.
(MOUNT)

your

?NULL DEVICE ILLEGAL
A colon has been found without a preceding device name.

(QUEUE)

?NXM adr
While computing the value of an expression, a non-existent
location was specified when referencing the input file.
(DUMP)
?nK OF CORE NEEDED or ?nP OF CORE NEEDED
There is insufficient free core to load the files;
n is the size
being requested for the segment that failed (either high or low
segment, not the sum of the high and low segments). This message
occurs when the virtual core for the system has been exceeded or
the core for this job has been executed. You should type CORE,
to determine what core has been exceeded, and whether the high or
low segment was too big. K denotes 1024 words which is the unit
of core allocation on a KAIO-based system, and P denotes 512
words (one page) which is the unit of allocation on a KIlO-based
system.
?OFFSET

= 1000 TO 777600 (OCTAL)

The offset specified by the user is
range.
(DTCOPY program)
?ONLY BATCH USERS MAY LOGIN.

not

within

the

acceptable

TRY AGAIN LATER

The operator has used the SET SCHEDULE command to prevent LOGINs,
except for BATCH jobs. The message of the day is still typed.
(LOGIN)

3-32

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?OPEN FAILURE ON DATA DEVICE dev
The OPEN on the specified device failed.

(DUMP)

OPERATOR BUSY, HANG ON PLEASE.
The user must wait for the operator to become available.
OPERATOR NOTIFIED
1.

The operator is available and the user
his message.
(PLEASE)

may

continue

A request is queued to the operator to
action.
(MOUNT, DISMOUNT)

perform

typing

specified

OPERATOR NOT ON DUTY
SCHED 400 is set (i.e., there is no operator on duty to handle
MOUNT and DISMOUNT requests).
If you did not specify the /SHOVE
switch in your request, then the MOUNT or DISMOUNT cannot be
completed.
If you did specify the /SHOVE switch then you receive
the message, "SHOVING REQUEST ANYWAY ••. " and normal processing
reSUlmes.
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)
OPERATOR NOT ON DUTY - /REMOVE IGNORED
The specified structure will be removed from your search list but
will not be physically removed from the drive.
(DISMOUNT)
OTHER USER - CANNOT SINGLE ACCESS
You issued a MOUNT command with the /SINGLE switch specified and
others have use of the drive. The MOUNT will proceed and the
/SINGLE swi tch will be ignored.
(MOUNT)
OTHER USERS SAME PPN
A program has determined that other jobs are currently logged-in
under the same project-programmer number.
(LOGIN, KJOB)
?OUT OF BOUNDS
The specified adr is not in your core area, or the high segmenet
is write-protected and you do not have privileges to the file
that initialized the high segment.
(D,E)
?OUTPUT DEVICE dev CANNOT DO INPUT AT USER adr
An attempt was made to input from an
linE! printer).

output

device

?OUTPUT DEVICE ERROR
An error has occurred on the ouput device.
3-33

(FILCOM)

(e.g.,

the

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?OUTPUT ERROR
An I/O error occurred while writing a temporary command
di sk.
(COMPIL)
?OUTPUT ERROR, STATUS

file

the

An I/O error occurred while writing the file on disk;
disk error code.
(DAEMON)

?OUTPUT INITIALIZATION ERROR
The output device cannot be initialized for one of the
reasons:

following

The device does not exist or is assigned to another job.

The device is not an output device.

The file cannot be placed on the output device.

(FILCOM)

PASSWORD:
You must type a PASSWORD which matches that in the ACCT.SYS entry
for this project-programmer number.
Echoing is suppressed to
preserve PASSWORD security.
If the user is at a half-duplex
(local copy) terminal, this message is replaced by a sequence of
random over-typed characters, over which the user types his
PASSWORD.
(LOGIN)
PAUS& ... (-C TO QUIT, CR TO CONT)
The /PAUSE switch has been specified, and an operator action is
about to be requested.
-C aborts the command before the request
is queued to the operator. Carriage return-line feed allows the
command to continue, and the request is queued to the operator.
(DISMOUNT)
?PC OUT OF BOUNDS AT USER adr
An illegal transfer has been made by the
location adr.

user

program

user

?PLEASE KJOB OR DETACH
Attempt was made to LOGIN a job when
initialized at that terminal.
(LOGIN)

you

already

had

job

DAEMON

?PLEASE LOGIN AS [OPR]
The operator is the only person that
typing R DAEMON.

3-34

can

initialize

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?PLEASE TYPE ftC FIRST
A command which would start a job has been issued after a
or CCONT.

CSTART

?PPN HAS EXPIRED
The current date is greater than the expiration date of the
project-programmer
number.
The user may not login until
expiration date is changed by the system manager.
(LOGIN)
?PPN OR DEVICE PERMITTED ONLY ON FILE F OR FILE Z CMDS.
You specified a project-programmer number or a device with an
implied project-programmer number (e.g., NEW:) in a FILE command
that does not permit specification of a project-programmer
number. A project-programmer number may be specified only on the
FI LE F and FI LE Z commands.
(FI LE)
?PROGRAM ERROR WHILE RESETTING MASTER DEVICE
FUDGE2 cannot find the master device or cannot find
on the master device.
(FUDGE2)

the

program

?PROGRAM NOT PRIVILEGED - IGNORED!
UMOUNT must be run from SYS: or NEW:, or the user must be
[1,2]
in order for the user to queue requests.
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)
?PROJECT 1 MAY NOT BE PTY
Project 1 is never allowed to login over a pseudo-TTY.

(LOGIN)

?PROTECTION FAILURE file-specification
The user does not have privileges to access
(file specification).
(FILE)

the

indicated

file

?(2) PROTECTION FAILURE - file.ext
There was a protection failure or the directory on DEC tape had no
room for the file.
(COMPIL)
?PTR INIT FAILURE
The logical device PTR is not available or could not otherwise be
initialized.
(DTCOPY program)
?QUENFI NO FILES IN REQUEST
An illegal queue request
request.

was

made;

3-35

the

monitor

aborted

the

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
QUOTA.SYS LOOKUP FAILURE
The LOOKUP to read QUOTA.SYS failed.

(MOUNT)

QUOTA.SYS NOT ON STRUCTURE
QUOTA.SYS is not part of this structure. The user may still
the file structure, but no UFO will be created.
(MOUNT)

use

QUOTA.SYS READ ERROR
An I/O error occurred while reading QUOTA.SYS.

(MOUNT)

QUOTA.SYS OR AUXACC.SYS READ ERROR
An I/O error occurred while QUOTA.SYS or AUXACC.SYS was being
read.
For MOUNT commands this means that no UFO can be created.
(MOUNT)
QUOTA.SYS WRONG FORMAT VERSION
Wrong version of QUOTA.SYS is on the
mounted. Consult the operator.
(MOUNT)

file

structure

being

%REASSIGN ILLEGAL FOR RESTRICTED DEVICE - /RELEASE ASSUMED
The user may not reassign a restricted device.
If he attempts to
do so,
the device is released from his job and returned to the
pool of restricted devices.
(DISMOUNT)
%REASSIGN JOB # NOT ASSIGNED - /RELEASE ASSUMED
The user attemped to reassign a device to a job that
(DISMOUNT)
exist. The device is released from his job.

doesn't

?/REELID REQUIRES MAGTAPE
The user specified a /REELID switch but the device he requested
to be mounted is not a magnetic tape. The /REELID switch may be
specified only when mounting magnetic tapes.
(MOUNT)
?file structure name RENAME FAILURE n
The RENAME to change the protection of the file failed;
disk error code.
(KJOB, LOGOUT)

n is the

?(4) RENAME FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS - file.ext
The new filename on a RENAME command already exists.

(COMPIL)

REQUEST QUEUED
Your request to perform a specified action has been queued to the
operator.
(FILE, DISMOUNT, and MOUNT for non-file structures).
3-36

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES

REQUEST QUEUED TO MOUNT UNITS
A request is queued to the operator to mount and ready the
on the proper drives.
(MOUNT)

packs

REQUEST QUEUED TO READY DRIVES
The requested structure is mounted but one or more dr ives
(as
specified by previous messages)
are not ready.
A request is
queued to the operator.
(MOUNT)
?REQUIRES DEVICE NAME
The device name or file structure name is required with the MOUNT
and DISMOUNT commands.
?REQUIRES "/REELID" SWITCH
You must include the /REELID switch and its argument in the
command string when you want to have a magnetic tape mounted.
(MOUNT for magnetic tapes)
?REQUIRES /VID SWITCH
You must include the /VID switch and its argument in your MOUNT
(MOUNT for
command for DECtapes and for all input-only devices.
DECtapes and all input-only devices.)
%RESPONSE MUST BE SINGLE LETTER WITH OPTIONAL STR LIST
You have not followed the correct format for a response to
CONFIRM:.
Responses are limited to a single letter or a single
switch, optionally followed by a space or tab and a list of file
structures. A new response will be requested.
(KJOB)
?RIGHT BRACKET REQUIRED IN DIRECTORY
The project-programmer
br ackets.
(QUEUE)

number

must

enclosed

square

?SCNDFN DOUBLE FILE NAME ILLEGAL
A double file name has been specified (sometimes through

use

A null SFD has been specified in the command string, and its
is illegal.

use

*) •

?SCNNSF NULL SFD ILLEGAL

?SCNSVR SWITCH VALUE REQUIRED ON SINCE
A /SINCE was specified with no argument.

3-37

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?SCNUDN UNRECOGNIZED NAME IN DATE/TIME
An illegal character appears after a
(e.g., /SINCE:L-APR-L97l.)

time/date

type

switch.

?SCNUKS UNKNOWN SWITCH switch
An unknown switch has been specified in the command string.
%SEARCH LIST DOES NOT ALLOW CREATES
There are no file structures available to the user on which he
can write.
Run MOUNT or SETSRC to modify the search list as
necessary.
(LOGIN)
%SEARCH LIST IS EMPTY
There are no file structures in the DSK:
search list that are
available to the user.
He can run the SETSRC program to modify
his search list.
(LOGIN)
SHOVING REQUEST ANYWAY .•.
SCHED 400 is set (i.e., there is no operator on duty to handle
MOUNT and DISMOUNT requests). However, the user has specified
the /SHOVE switch so the request will be queued even though there
may be no one at the computer to MOUNT or DISMOUNT the device(s).
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)
?SINGLE ACCESS BY JOB n
You requested to have a structure mounted that is already mounted
by job n with the /SINGLE switch specified.
(FILE, MOUNT)
file.ext SOFTWARE CHECKSUM OR REDUNDANCY ERROR
The file has no error
structure.
(LOGIN)

flagged

the

UFD

the

file

should

try

?SOME OTHER TIME
You are not scheduled to LOGIN at this time.
again when you are allowed to login.
(LOGIN)

You

?SORRY, CAN'T OPEN DSK, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
'rhis message is returned from the GRIPE program.
?SORRY, CAN'T WRITE IN COMPLAINT AREA, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
This message is returned from the GRIPE program.

3-38

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?SORRY, COMPLAINT BASKET IS FULL, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
This message is returned from the GRIPE program.
?SORRY, NO UFD FOR COMPLAINT BASKET, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
This message is returned from the GRIPE program.
%SPECIFIED LOGICAL NAME WAS IN USE
You specified a logical name in your MOUNT command that was
already in use by the same job.
The device with which the
logical name was previously associated is no longer associated
with the logical name. The logical name is now associated with
the newly mounted device.
(MOUNT)
?S~rATION

NUMBER INVALID

The requested station number is not
(LOCATE)

recognized

the

system.

STR HAS ONLY n UNITS
You have requested more drives than are necessary to accommodate
the structure. The MOUNT proceeds with only the number of drives
necessary.
(MOUNT)
STRUCTURE ALREADY MOUNTED
[MOUNT COUNT = n]
The requested file structure already exists and does not need to
be physically mounted.
"n" is the number of users (not including
thi s one) who cur ren tly have the structure moun ted.
(MOUNT)
?STRUCTURE NOT MOUNTED
The specified
You requested that a structure be dismounted.
structure either is not a valid name or it is not mounted.
(DISMOUNT)
?S,]~RUUO

FAILURE

The STRUUO UUO
(KJOB, LOGOUT)

gave

error

return.

Notify

the

operator.

%SUPERSEDING EXISTING FILE
A warning message indicating that a file already exists with
specified name. This file is being superseded.
(TECO)
%SWIAP READ ERROR UNIT abc STATUS

the

An I/O error occurred while reading the swapping space.
is wr it ten in to the DAEMON file as read.
(DCORE)
3-39

The data

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?SWITCH ERROR
(COpy program)

An illegal switch specification was given.
?switch SWITCH ILLEGAL
The switch specified cannot be used with the
(QUEUE)

given

queue

name.

?SWITCH VALUE TOO LARGE x
The value given to the switch exceeds the maximum value.

(QUEUE)

?SYNTAX ERROR
There is a
syntax error
in the command string.
incorrect parentheses or two operators in a row.

Check

for

?SYSSTR FAILURE
The SYSSTR UUO
(KJOB, LOGOUT)

gave

error

return.

Notify

the

operator.

?SYSTEM ERROR - xxxxxx
System errors designate operator or system errors and are not adirect fault of the user.
They are typed for possible diagnostic
use.
SYSTEM ERROR AT LOC nnn
This is a system error and therefore is not a direct fault of the
user.
It is typed for potential diagnostic use.
(FILE, MOUNT,
DISMOUNT)
?file structure name SYSTEM ERROR - DSKCHK UUO FAILED
This is a system error and therefore is not a direct fault of the
user.
It is typed for potential diagnostic use.
(MOUNT,
DISMOUNT)
?file-structure name SYSTEM ERROR - JOBSTR UUO FAILED
This is a system error and therefore is not a direct fault of the
user.
It is typed for potential diagnostic use.
(MOUNT,
DISMOUNT)
?SYSTEM ERROR - SYSPHY UUO FAILED
This is a system error and therefore is not a direct fault of the
user.
It is typed for potential diagnostic use.
(FILE, MOUNT,
DISMOUNT)

3-40

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?SYSTEM ERROR - WRONG FORMAT VERSION NUMBER IN STRLST.SYS
STRLST.SYS is not in a format that is understood by MOUNT.
This
is a system error and therefore is not a direct fault of the
user.
It is typed for potential diagnostic use.
(FILE, MOUNT,
DISMOUNT)
?SYSTEM I/O ERROR AT loc STATUS = code
An unexpected I/O error occurred at location "loc".
"code"
is
the status code returned by the GETSTS UUO.
This is a system
error and therefore is not a direct fault of the user.
It is
typed
for
potential
diagnostic use.
Consult the system
administrator.
(FILE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT)
?SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE
The operator has used the SET SCHED
from timesharing terminals.
The
typed.
(LOGIN)

command
message

to prevent LOGINs
of the day is still

?TABLE OVERFLOW - CORE UUO FAILED TRYING TO EXPAND TO xxx
The GLOB program requested additional core from the monitor,
none was available.
(GLOB)

but

?THIS MONITOR WAS BUILT FOR A xxx AND WILL NOT RUN PROPERLY ON A yyy
The monitor is not running on the machine for which it was built.
xxx and yyy are PDP-6, KAlO, or KIlO.
?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED
The time limit allocated for the job has been reached.
The
is stopped and the terminal is returned to monitor mode.

job

TIMESHARING WILL CEASE IN m HOURS n MINUTES
The KSYS command (OPSER) or SET KSYS UUO has been issued in order
to stop timesharing on the system at the indicated time.
?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
A command has been typed, but necessary arguments are missing.
?TOO MANY FILENAMES OR PROGRAM NAMES
More than 40 program names or filenames were specified in the
command string.
The user should separate the job into several
segments.
(MAKLIB)

3-41

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
?TOO MANY FILES, LAST PROCEED IS file.ext
The user requested (either explicitly or implicitly) more than 22
files to be filed onto or recalled from DECtape. The request is
processed up to the point where "file.ext" is transferred.
(FI LE)
?TOO MANY FILE STRUCTURES
The number of file structures exceeds the capacity of the monitor
data base. The current limit is 14 (decimal).
(ONCE ONLY)
?TOO MANY NAMES or ?TOO MANY SWITCHES
Command string complexity
program.
(COMPIL)

exceeds

table

space

the

COMPIL

?UNKNOWN COMMAND
The monitor passed a command to
recognize.
(COMPIL)

COMPIL

which

COMPIL

the

specified

does

not

?UNKNOWN DEFAULT FOR SWITCH switch
The default condition is not
(DUMP, QUEUE)

known

for

switch.

?UNKNOWN DEVICE OR STRUCTURE NAME
The device or file structure name does not exist in the system
therefore,
is not
administrator's
file SYS:STRLST.SYS and,
defined for the system. The operator or administrator may be
requested to define the file structure by adding it to STRLST.SYS
with the REACT program.
(MOUNT)
?UNKNOWN SWITCH switch
The switch named has been mistyped.

(DUMP, QUEUE)

?UNKNOWN SWITCH VALUE n
The argument specified with the switch has been mistyped.
QUEUE)

(DUMP,

?UNRECOGNIZABLE SWITCH
An ambiguous or undefined word followed a slash.

(COMPIL)

?UUO AT USER adr
This message accompanies many error messages and indicates the
location of the UUo that was the last instruction the user
program executed before the error occurred.

3-42

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
n VERIFICATION ERRORS
On a word by word comparison requested via the /V switch,
n
discrepancies have been detected between the input DEC tape and
output DECtape.
(DTCOPY program)
WAITING ... 2 CiS TO EXIT
A request has been queued to the operator and the command is
waiting for the operator to complete the request.
If you do not
want to wait for completion of the operator's action, you can
type two CTRL/Cs without aborting the command. The operator
action will still be completed.
Later a DISMOUNT/CHECK or
MOUNT/CHECK can be given to check for completion.
(Note that
this message is not issued when the
/NOWAIT
switch
is
specified.)
(MOUNT, DISMOUNT)
WAIT PLS
The system's primary accounting file FACT.SYS was busy.
It is
retried for
ten seconds before FACT.XOI is tried. This message
can appear if many users are logging in simultaneously.
(LOGIN,
KJOB, LOGOUT)
%WARNING - INPUT REQUEST USES ONLY TWO ENTRIES
Only two files can be specified in the input queue
control file and the log file.
(QUEUE)

request,

the

!WARNING NO INDEX ON OUTPUT FILE-CONTINUING
You have changed the structure of the index library file when
deleting,
appending,
or inserting,
thereby invalidating the
index. The index has been removed from the new file.
Reindexing
is required.
(MAKLIB)
?d-:v WASN'T ASSIGNED
The device is not currently assigned to your job
deassigned or reassigned by the job.

and

cannot

specifying

the

output

queue

?WASN'T DET
The specified device is not detached.
NAME
DIRECTORY
EXTENSION

?WILDCARD ILLEGAL IN INPUT QUEUE FILE
The wildcard construction cannot
Batch input queue.
(QUEUE)

used

when

The wildcard construction cannot be
specification.
(QUEUE)
3-43

used

?WILDCARD ILLEGAL IN OUTPUT

NAME
DIRECTORY
EXTENSION
the

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES
%WLDNSF NO SUCH FILES AS file spec
A file has been specified which does
default directory.

not

exist

the

user's

?WRITE LOCK ERROR
An attempt was made to write on a write-locked DECtape.
program)

(DTCOPY

?WRONG FORMAT FOR SYMBOL
A symbol was given in the format program : symbol and a symbol
name did not follow the coloni
in other words, the colon must be
followed by a symbol.
(DUMP)
?WRONG FORMAT VERSION NUMBER IN SYSTEM FILES
Wrong version of ACCT.SYS or AUXACC.SYS is on the system.
Consult the operator so that he can REACT to change the
accounting files.
(LOGIN)
drive WRONG UNIT TYPE
The user has requested a drive which is inappropriate for
the
pack to be mounted.
(For example, an RP03 pack cannot be mounted
on an RP04 drive.) (MOUNT)
YOU ARE LOGGED IN AS n,m
When you log in with a unique programmer number
(project,
i),
this message
informs you of the project-programmer number that
LOGIN assigned.
(LOGIN)
DAEMON
?YOU DON'T HAVE PRIVILEGES TO WRITE

FILE
CCL

You attempted to write in a
access.
(DAEMON)
?1+lnK CORE
VIR. CORE LEFT

file

which

you

did

not

have

The swapping space or the core allocated to timesharing is all in
use
(i.e., there is no available virtual core).
The user should
wait a few minutes, and then attempt to login again.
If this
message still appears, it should be reported to the operator.
m+n/p CORE
VIR. CORE LEFT
Key: m

= v
number of blocks in low segment.

n = number of blocks in high segment.

3-44

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES

maximum core per job.
{Maximum physical user core
unless limited by operator, or there are jobs locked in
core {refer to DECsystem-IO Monitor Calls.}}

= number of

K blocks
swapping device.

unassigned

core

and

the

Note that nK represents I024-word blocks which is the unit of
core allocation on a KAIO-based system,
and nP represents
512-word blocks which is the unit of allocation on a KIlO-based
system.

APPENDIX A
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES

A.l

FILENAME EXTENSIONS

Table A-I lists the filename extensions that have specific meanings in
the DECsystem-lO.
Table A-I
Filename Extensions
, . . . . - - - - - - - - - . , - . _ - - - - - - - - - - - , - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ .__._-_._---_.

Filename
Extension

Type of File

ABS
AID
ALG
ALP
ATO
AWT
BIO
Bll
BAC

Object
Source
Source
ASCII
ASCII
Binary
Source
Source
Object

BAK
BAS
BCM

Source
Source
ASCII

BCP
BIN
BLB
BLI
BUG
BWR

Source
Binary
ASCII
Source
Object
ASCII

CAL
CBL
CCL

Object
Source
ASCII

CCO

ASCII

CDP
CFC

ASCII, Binary
ASCII

CKP

Binary

CHN

Object

__. - - - -

Meaning

Absolute (nonrelocatable) program
Source file in AID language
Source file in ALGOL language
Printer forms alignment
OPSER automatic command file
Data for automatic wire tester
Source file in BLISIO
Source file in BLISS-II
Reserved for output from the BASIC
Compiler
Backup file from TECO or LINED
Source file in BASIC language
FILCOM
Listing file created
by
(binary compare)
Source file in BCPL language
Binary file
Blurb file
Source file in BLISS language
Saved to show a program error
Beware file listing warnings about a
file or program
CAL data and program files
Source file in COBOL language
Alternate convention for
command
file
(@ command file construction
for programs other than COMPIL)
Listing
of
modifications
to
nonresident software
Spooled output for card punch
Compressed file compare.
Group of
.SCM files combined with PIP.
Checkpoint core image file created
by COBOL operating system
CHAIN file

A-I

STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions
Filename
Extension

Type of File

CMD

ASCII

CMP
COR
CRF
CTL
DAE

ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
Binary

DAT
DDT
DCT
DIR

ASCII, Binary
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII

DMP
DOC

ASCII
ASCII

DRW
DSE
DSF
ERR
EXE
F4

Binary
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
Object
Source

FAI
FCL
FFS
FLO
FOR
FRM
FTP
FUD
GND

Source
Source
ASCII
ASCII
Source
ASCII
Source
ASCII
ASCII

HGH

Object

HLP

ASCII

IDA
IDX
INI
LAP
LIB
LOG
LOW

ASCII, Binary
ASCII, SIXBIT
ASCII, Binary
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
Object

LPT
LSD
LSP
LSQ

ASCII
ASCII
Source
ASCII

LST

ASCII

MAC
MAN
MAP

Source
ASCII
ASCII

Meaning

Command file for
indirect commands
(@ construction for COMPIL)
Complaint file by GRIPE
Correction file for SOUP
CREF (cross-reference) input file
MpnB control file
Default output for DAEMON-taken core
dumps
Data (FORTRAN) file
Input file to FILDDT
Dictionary of words
Directory from FILE
command
or
DIRECT program
COBOL compiler dump file
Listing of modifications to the most
recent version of the software
Drawing for VBIOC drawing system
Directory sorted by extension
Directory sorted by filename
Error message file
Executable program
Source
file
in
F40
(FORTRAN)
language
Source file in FAIL language
Source file in FOCAL language
Fast FORTRAN stream
English language flowchart
Source file in FORTRAN-IO language
Blank form for handwritten records
FORTRAN test programs
FUDGE2 listing output
List of ground pins for automatic
wiretap
Nonsharable high
segment
of
a
two-segment program (created by SAVE
command)
Help
files
containing
switch
explanations, etc.
COBOL ISAM data file
Index file of a COBOL ISAM file
Initialization file
Output from the LISP compiler
COBOL source library
MPB or LINK-IO log file
Low segment of a two-segment program
(created by SAVE command)
Spooled output for line printer
Default output for DUMP program
Source file in LISP language
Queue listing created
by
QUEUE
program
Listing data created by assemblers
and compilers
Source file in MACRO language
Manual (documentation) file
Loader or LINK-IO map file
A-2

STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions
J~ ilename
Extension

Type of File

)\1EM

ASCII

IMID

Source

)\1IM
)\1SB
)\1US
N
NEW
OBJ
OLD
OPR

Binary
Object
Source
Source
All
Object
Source, Object
ASCII

OVR
Pll
PAK

Object
Source
ASCII

PAL

Source

PLI
PLM
PLO
PLT
PPL
PTP
IQXX
QUD
QUE
QUF
REL
RIM
RMT
RNB

Source
ASCII
Binary
ASCII
Source
ASCII, Binary
ASCII
ASCII, Binary
Binary
Binary
Object
Object
Object
ASCII

RNC

ASCII

RND

ASCII

RNE
RNH

ASCII
ASCII

RNL

ASCII

RNM

ASCII

RNO

ASCII

RNP

ASCII

RNS

ASCII

RSP
RSX
RTB

ASCII
All
Object

SAl

Source

Meaning

output
Memorandum file typically
from RUNOFF
Source file in MIDAS (MIT Assembler)
language
Snapshot of MIMIC simulator
Music compiler binary output
Music compiler input
Source file in NELIAC language
New version of a program or file
PDP-II relocatable binary file
Backup source program
assembly
and
Installation
instructions
COBOL overlay file
Source program in MACYll language
Files compressed by PACK.TEC to save
disk space
(PDP-8
PALlO
in
file
Source
assembler)
Source file in PLI language
Program Logic Manual
Compressed plot output
Spooled output for plotter
Source file in PPL language
Spooled output for paper-tape punch
Edit backup file, like .BAK (all xx)
Queued data file
Queue request file
Master queue and request file
Relocatable binary file
RIM loader file
Read-:in mode (RIM) format file (PIP)
.BLB
RUNOFF input for producting a
file
.CCO
RUNOFF input for producing a
file
.DOC
RUNOFF input for producing a
file
RUNOFF input for error message text
.HLP
RUNOFF input for producing a
file
logic
program
RUNOFF input for
manual
. MAN
RUNOFF input for producing a
file
Programming specifications in RUNOFF
input
.OPR
RUNOFF input for producing a
file
of
file
text
RUNOFF input for
standards
Script response time log file
Files for RSX-IID
(RIMIOB)
format file
Read-in mode
(PIP)
Source file in SAIL language
A-3

STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions
Filename
Extension

Type of File

SAV

Object

SCD
SCM

ASCII
ASCII

SCP
SEQ

ASCII
ASCII, SIXBIT

SFD
SHR

Binary
Object

SMP
SNO
SNP
SPC
SPD
SPM

Source
Source
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII

SPU

ASCII

SPX

ASCII

SRC
STD
SVE

ASCII
ASCII
Object

SYM
SYS
TEC
TEM
TMP
TPB

Binary
Binary
ASCII
ASCII, Binary
ASCII, Binary
ASCII

TPC

ASCII

TPD

ASCII

TPE

ASCII

TPH

ASCII

TPL

ASCII

TMP
TPO

ASCII
ASCII

TPP

ASCII

TST
TXT
UFD
UPD

All
ASCII
Binary
ASCII

Meaning

Low segment from
a
one-segment
program (created by SAVE command)
Differences in directory
Listing file created
by
FILCOM
(source compare)
SCRIPT control file
Sequential COBOL data file, input to
ISAM program
Subfile directory (reserved usage)
Sharable high segment file of a
two-segment
program
(created by
SSAVE command)
Source file in SIMPLE language
Source file in SNOBOL language
Snapshot of disk by DSKLST
Corrected file for SPELL program
Dictionary for SPELL program
File of misspelled words for SPELL
program
File of upper case words for SPELL
program
File of exception (error) lines for
SPELL program
Source files
Standards
. SAVed file from a single
user
monitor
LINK-IO symbol file
Special system files
TECO macro
Temporary files
Temporary files
Typeset input for producing a
.BLB
file
Typeset input for producing a
.CCO
file
Typeset input for producing a
.DOC
file
Typeset input for producing error
message text
Typeset input for producing a
.HLP
file
Typeset input for producing a logic
manual
Typeset for producing a .MAN file
Typeset input
for
producing
a
programming specification
Typeset input for producing an .OPR
file
Test data
Text file
User file directory (reserved usage)
Updates flagged in margin (FILCOM)

A-4

STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions
Filename
Extension

Type of File

VMX

Object

WCH
WRL
XOR
XPN

ASCII
ASCII
Binary
Object

Zxx

ASCII

A.2

Meaning

Expanded save file starting at a
location greater than zero and used
as a special support program for
virtual memory
SCRIPT monitor (WATCH) file
Wirelist
Module data for XOR tester
Expanded save
file
(FILEX
and
LINK-IO)
Edit original file (all xx)

RESERVED PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBERS

Table A-2 itemizes the project-programmer numbers that
for specific functions in the DECsystem-lO.

are

allocated

Table A-2
Project-Programmer Numbers
Number

Meaning

1---------+------------------------------

1,1
1,2
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,6
2,*
2,5
3,3
4,*
4,4
4,5
5,*
5,1
5,2
5,3
5,4
5,5
5,6
5,7
5.10
5,11
5,12
5,13
5,14
5,15

Master File Directory (MFD)
Operator functions
Old or superseded versions of system programs
(device OLD:)
System library (device SYS:)
New or experimental versions of system programs
(device NEW:)
User maintained library (device PUB:)
Recommended for operator's use
Storage for help text files (*.HLP) (device HLP:)
System and Multiprogram Batch (MPB)~ queues
Test and performance analysis systems
FAILSAFE testing
FAILSAFE testing
Libraries
BASIC source library (device BAS:)
COBOL source library for COpy verb (device COB:)
PDP-II source library (device MXI:)
ALGOL source library (device ALG:)
BLISS source library (device BLI:)
FORTRAN source library (device FOR:)
MACRO source library (device MAC:)
Text editor library (device TED:)
ReI file library (device REL:)
RUNOFF library (device RNO:)
SNOBOL library (device SNO:)
Doc file library (device DOC:)
FAIL library (device FAI:)
A-5

STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
Table A-2 (Cont.)
Project-Programmer Numbers
Number

Meaning

5,16
5,17
5,20
5,21
5,22
5,23
6,*
7,7
10,1
10,6
10,7

A.3

MUSIC library (device MUS:)
MACRO universal files (device UNV:)
NELIAC (device NEL:)
DUMP (device DMP:)
POP2 (device POP:)
Test library (device TST:)
Field service and hardware diagnostics
Software acceptance
Special
system
programming
storage
region
containing copies of SYS:CRASH.SAV (device XPN: )
Software distribution
Software distribution (device DEC:)

RESERVED DEVICE NAMES

Table A-3 lists logical device
predefined in the DECsystem-lO.

names

(ersatz

devices)

that

are

To avoid confusion, it is recommended that these names not be used for
private file structures.
Table A-3
Device Names
Name

Use

UFD

Search List

ALG:
ALL:

ALGOL library

[5,4]
User's

BAS:
BLI:
COB:
DEC:

BASIC library
BLISS library
COBOL library
DEC supplied
software
DOC file library

[5,1]
[5,5]
[5,2]
[10,7]

System
All currently
mounted structures
System
System
System
System

DOC:
DSK:
FAI:
FOR:
HLP:
LIB:
MAC:
MUS:
MXI:
NEW:
NUL:
OLD:
PUB:
REL:
RNO:

FAIL library
FORTRAN library
HELP library
User defined library
MACRO library
MUSIC library
PDP-II library
New system library
Old system library
User maintained
library
ReI file library
RUNOFF library

[5,14]
User's
[5,15]
[5,6]
[2,5]
Set by each user
[5,7]
[5,16]
[5,3]
[1,5]
None
[1,3]
[1,6]

System
System

[5,11]
[5,12]

System
System

A-6

System
Job
System
System
System
System
System
System
System
System

STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
Table A-3 (Cant.)
Device Names
Name

Use

UFO

Search List

SNO:
STD:
SYS:
'TED:
'TST:
UNV:

SNOBOL 11'brary
Standard Software
System 11'brary
Text edit or library
Test libr ary
MACRO un1 versal
library
Crash lib rary

[5,13]
[1,4]1
[1,4]
[5,10]
[5,23]
[5,17]

System
System
System
System
System
System

[10,1]

System

XPN:

A-7

APPENDIX B
CARD CODES

Table B-1
ASCII Card Codes
--

ASCII
Character

Octal
Code

ASCII
Character

Card
Punches

-NULL
crRL-A
C~rRL-B
c~rRL-C
C~rRL-D

C~rRL-E
C~rRL-F

C~rRL-G

crRL-H
TAB
L]~

v~r
F]~

CR
CrRL-N
C~rRL-O
c~rRL-p

C~rRL-Q
c~rRL-R
c~rRL-S

C~rRL-T
C~rRL-U
c~rRL-V

C~rRL-W
c~rRL-X
C~rRL-Y
c~rRL-Z

ESCAPE
C~~RL-\
C~rRL-!
C~~RLC~~RL-

SPACE

Octal
Code

Card
Punches

- - ----------- --- ------_._--_._---

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40

12-0-9-8-1
12-9-1
12-9-2
12-9-3
9-7
0-9-8-5
0-9-8-6
0-9-8-7
11-9-6
12-9-5
0-9-5
12-9-8-3
12-9-8-4
12-9-8-5
12-9-8-6
12-9-8-7
12-11-9-8-1
11-9-1
11-9-2
11-9-3
9-8-4
9-8-5
9-2
0-9-6
11-9-8
11-9-8-1
9-8-7
0-9-7
11-9-8-4
11-9-8-5
11-9-8-6
11-9-8-7

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

L
M

P
Q
R
S
T
U

V
W
X
Y
Z
[

]

100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
110
III

112
113
114
115
116
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
140

NOTE
The ASCII character ESCAPE (octal 33) is
also CTRL-[ on a terminal.

B-1

8-4
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
12-8-2
0-8-2
11-8-2
11-8-7
0-8-5
8-1

CARD CODES
Table B-1 (Cont.)
ASCII Card Codes
ASCII
Character

Octal
Code

Card
Punches

ASCII
Character

Octal
Code

Card
Punches

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

12-8-7
8-7
8-3
11-8-3
0-8-4
12
8-5
12-8-5
11-8-5
11-8-4
12-8-6
0-8-3
11
12-8-3
0-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8-2
1-8-6
12-8-4
8-6
0-8-6
0-8-7

a
b
c
d
e
f
9
h
i

141
142
143
144
145
146
147
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177

12-0-1
12-0-2
12-0-3
12-0-4
12-0-5
12-0-6
12-0-7
12-0-8
12-0-9
12-11-1
12-11-2
12-11-3
12-11-4
12-11-5
12-11-6
12-11-7
12-11-8
12-11-9
11-0-2
11-0-3
11-0-4
11-0-5
11-0-6
11-0-7
11-0-8
11-0-9
12-0
12-11
11-0
11-0-1
12-9-7

#
$
%
&
I

(
)

0
1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
:
;

<
=
>
?

j
k

1
m
n
0

P
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
Y

{

-1
DEL

'----------

NOTE
The ASCII characters} and - (octal 175
and 176)
are treated by the monitor as
ALTmode which is often considered to be
the same as ESCAPE.

B-2

CARD CODES
Table B-2
DEC-026 Card Codes

Character
SPACE
!
I

#
$
%
&
I

(
)

,
-

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;

>
?

Octal
Code
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

Card
Punches

Character
@

12-8-7
0-8-5
0-8-6
11-8-3
0-8-7
11-8-7
8-6
0-8-4
12-8-4
11-8-4
12
0-8-3
11
12-8-3
0-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

A
B
C

X
y

E
F
G
H
I

J
K

M
N

P
Q
R

S
T
U
V
W

11-8-2/11-0
0-8-2
12-8-6
8-3
11-8-6
12-8-2/12-0

[

]

octatcard
Code

Punches

100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
110

8-4
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
11-8-5
8-7
12-8-5
8-5
8-2

III

112
113
114
115
116
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137

No'rE

Octal codes 0-37 and 140-177 are the same
as in ASCII.

B-3

APPENDIX C
TEMPORARY FILES

The temporary files in Table C-I are used by various programs in the
DECsystem-IO computing system. These files are in the following form:
nnn xxx.TMP
where nnn is the user's job number in decimal, with leading zeroes
make three digits, and xxx specifies the use of the file.
Table C-I
Temporary Files
Meaning

Name
nnn ALG.TMP

nnn AS1.TMP
nnn AS2.TMP
nnn AS3.TMP
nnn BL1.TMP
nnn COB.TMP

nnn CPY.TMP
nnn CRE.TMP

nnn DAE.TMP
nnn DMP.TMP
nnn EDS.TMP

Read by ALGOL and contains one line for each
program to be compiled.
It may also contain the
command NAME! which causes ALGOL to transfer
control to the named program.
Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
input to the COBOL assembler.
Read by BLISS and contains one line for each
program to be compiled.
Read by COBOL and contains one line for each
program to be compiled.
It may also contain the
command NAME! which causes COBOL to transfer
control to the named program.
Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
copies of source files with library routines
inserted.
Read by CREF and contains commands for each file
which has produced a CREF listing on the disk.
COMPIL also reads this file each time a new CREF
listing
is
generated
to prevent multiple
requests for the same file and to prevent
discarding other requests that may not yet have
been listed.
Written by DAEMON to be read by DUMP.
Read by DUMP as an input command file.
Used by COMPIL to store the arguments of the
most recent EDIT, CREATE, TECO, or MAKE command.

C-l

TEMPORARY FILES
Table C-I (Cont.)
Temporary Files
Meaning

Name
nnn EDT.TMP

Written by COMPIL and read by LINED or TECO.
It
contains a command for each EDIT, CREATE, TECO,
or MAKE command.
For the MAKE or
CREATE
commands, it contains the command
S file.ext
For TECO
command

EDIT

S file.ext
nnn ERA.TMP
nnn FAI.TMP
nnn FOR.TMP

nnn GEN.TMP
nnn KJO.TMP
nnn LGO.TMP
nnn LHC.TMP
nnn LIN.TMP
nnn LIT.TMP
nnn LLC.TMP
nnn LLS.TMP
nnn LNK.TMP
nnn LOA.TMP
nnn MAC.TMP

nnn PII.TMP
nnn PLS.TMP
nnn PIP.TMP
nnn QUE.TMP
nnn RNO.TMP
nnn SOI.TMP

[p,p] $
commands,

contains

the

[p,p]

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and is the
error file.
Read by FAIL and contains one line for each
program to be compiled.
Read by FORTRAN and contains one line for each
program to be compiled.
It may also contain the
command NAME! which causes FORTRAN to transfer
control to the named program.
Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
the output of syntax processing.
Read by KJOB as an input command file.
Read by LOGOUT as an input command file.
Created and read by LINK-IO and contains the
overflow of the user's high segment. The file
is used to produce core images or saved files.
Created by LINED and contains output file until
the rename process.
Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
copy of the literal pool.
Created and read by LINK-IO and contains the
overflow of the user's low segment. This file
is used to produce core images or saved files.
Created and read by LINK-IO and contains the
overflow of the user's symbol file.
This file
is used to produce core images or saved files.
Read by LINK-IO and contains commands necessary
for loading.
Read by LOADER and contains commands necessary
for loading.
Read by MACRO and contains one line for each
program to be assembled.
It may also contain
the command NAME!
which causes
MACRO
to
transfer control to the named program.
Read by MACYII (the PDP-II assembler for
the
PDP-IO)
and contains one line for each program
to be assembled.
Read by PLEASE as an input command file.
Read by PIP and contains commands to implement
the COMPIL-class commands that run PIP.
Read by QUEUE as an input command file.
Read by RUNOFF and contains commands for each
file which has produced a RUNOFF listing on the
disk.
Written, read and deleted by COBOL and contains
the intermediate sorted results of the data.

C-2

TEMPORARY FILES
Table C-l (Cont.)
Temporary Files
Name

Meaning

1----------------------

nnn SVC.TMP
nnn SNO.TMP
nnn TEC.TMP
nnn TMP.TMP
nnn XFO.TMP
nnn XFR.TMP

Used by COMPIL to store the arguments of the
most recent COMPIL, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
command.
Read by SNOBOL and contains one line for each
program to be compiled.
Created by TECO and contains output file until
the rename process.
Created by LINED during the rename process.
Created by FILEX as a result of the Q switch on
the output side.
Created by FILEX as a result of the Q switch on
the input side.

C-3

APPENDIX D
SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES

---_._._------ --------

SIXBIT

Character

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Space

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

(
)

ASCII
7-Bit SIXBIT
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

8
9

070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

#
$
%
&
I

:
;

=
>

ASCII
Character 7-Bit
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107

f
9

110

III

112
113
114
115
116
117

i
j

A
B
C
D
E
F
G

K
L
M

N
0

P
Q

R
S
T
U
V

X
y

Z
[

]
t

D-1

Cha racter

120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137

a
b

c
d

k
1

m
n
o
p
q
r

s
t

v
w

x
y

z
{

}

Del ete

ASCII
7-Bit
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177

INDEX

( *) ,

as wildcard asterisk,
1-Ll

+ construction, 1-17
/6 switch, 2-62
<> construction, 1-18
= construction, 1-17
@ construction, 1-16
JI.bbrevia te,
commands, 1-6
JI.bso1ute,
a r g u mE~ nt, 1-13
JI,ccess,
protection code, 1-10
system, 1-7, 2-134
/ACTIVE p
MOUNT switch, 2-145
ADDRESS command to DUMP,
2-65
ALCFIL program, 2-9
. ALG, 2--17
/ALGOL,
LOAD switch, 2-128
/ALGOL switch, 2-18, 2-76
ALL command to DUMP, 2-65
A.11ocatE~ ,
devicE~, 2-11
space" 2-9
/ALTMODE,
LOGIN switch, 2-134
Angle brackets, 1-lU
APPEND command to DUMP,
2-65
A,rguments,
command, 1-7
date-time, 1-13
A,ssign,
devicE~, 2-144
ASSIGN command, 2-11
A.ssociat:e,
logical names, 1-8, 2-11
Asterisk (*), 1-3
as wildcard, 1-11
ATTACH command, 2-13
AUTOFORMAT command to DUMP,
2-65

.B10,2-·17
Backslashes, 1-4
Backspace,
magtape, 2-151
BACKSPACE command, 2-15
BACKUP program, 2-16

Batch,
command interpreter, 1-6
/BATCH,
KJOB switch, 2-120
/BIN,
Load switch, 2-128
/BIN switch, 2-18, 2-76
Binary compare switches,
2-88
/BLANK,
LOGIN switch, 2-134
.BLI, 2-17
/BLISS,
LOAD switch, 2-128
/BLISS switch, 2-18, 2-76
Blocks,
read, 2-61
written, 2-61
BSLDR.REL, 2-62

/C sw itch, 2-62
Card deck,
sample, 1-3
Cards,
punch, 2-26
CATEGORY command to DUMP,
2-66
.CBL, 2-17
CCONTINUE command, 2-31
.CDP extension, 2-26
CDP:, 1-8
CDR:, 1-8
Characters,
delete, 1-4
/CHECK,
MOUNT switch, 2-146
/CHECK switch, 2-57
CLOSE command to DUMP, 2-66
Cluster,
size, 2-9
.CMD extension, 1-16
/COBOL,
LOAD switch, 2-128
/COBOL switch, 2-18, 2-76
Command,
arguments, 1-7
ASSIGN, 2-11
ATTACH, 2-13
BACKSPACE, 2-15
CCONTINUE, 2-31
COMPILE, 2-17
completion, 1-3
CONTINUE, 2-23

Index-1

INDEX (CONT . )

Command (Cont.)
Copy, 2-24
CORE, 2-25
CPUNCH, 2-26
CREATE, 2-28
CREF, 2-30
CSTART, 2-31
D(eposit), 2-33
DAYTIME, 2-34
DCORE, 2-35
DDT, 2-38
DEASSIGN, 2-39
DEBUG, 2-40
DELETE, 2-46
DETACH, 2-47
DIRECT, 2-48
DISMOUNT, 2-56
DSK, 2-61
DUMP, 2-64
EDIT, 2-74
EOF, 2-75
EXAMINE, 2-73
EXECUTE, 2-76
file, 1-16
FILE, 2-98
FINISH, 2-105
format, 1-6
FUDGE, 2-106
GET, 2-107
HALT, 2-112
HELP, 2-113
INITIA, 2-117
JCONTINUE, 2-119
KJOB, 2-120
LABEL, 2-125
LIST, 2-126
LOAD, 2-127
LOCATE, 2-133
LOGIN, 2-134
MAKE, 2-143
MOUNT, 2-144
names, 1-6
NODE, 2-152
NSAVE, 2-153
NSSAVE, 2-154
OSAVE, 2-160
OSSAVE, 2-162
PJOB, 2-163
PLEASE, 2-164
PLOT, 2-166
PRESERVE, 2-168
PRINT, 2-169
PROTECT, 2-171
QUEUE, 2-173
R, 2-187
REASSIGN, 2-188
REATTA, 2-189
REENTER, 2-190

Command (Cont.)
RENAME, 2-191
RESOURCE, 2-192
REWIND, 2-193
RUN, 2-194
SAVE, 2-196
SCHED, 2-197
SEND, 2-198
SET BLOCKSIZE, 2-200
SET BREAK, 2-201
SET CDR, 2-204
SET CPU, 2-205
SET DEFAULT, 2-207
SET DENSITY, 2-208
SET DSKFUL, 2-209
SET DSKPRI, 2-210, 2-211
SET PHYSICAL, 2-212
SET SPOOL, 2-213
SErf TIME, 2-218
SET TTY, 2-220
SET WATCH, 2-227
SKIP, 2-228
START, 2-231
SUBMIT, 2-232
SYSTAT, 2-234
TECO, 2-238
TIME, 2-239
TPUNCH, 2-241
TYPE, 2-243
UNLOAD, 2-245
USESTAT, 2-246
VERSION, 2-247
WHERE, 2-249
ZERO, 2-250
Command interpreter,
batch, 1-6
Commands, 2-113
abbreviate, 1-6
COMPIL-CLASS, 1-15
continuation, 1-6
deleting, 2-1
indirect, 1-16
terminate, 1-6
Comments, 1-6
Compare,
DECtapes, 2-62
files, 2-87
COMPIL-CLASS commands, 1-15
/COMPILE,
LOAD switch, 2-128
Compile,
switches, 1-18
COMPILE command, 2-17
/COMPILE switch, 2-18, 2-77
Complaints,
operation, 2-111
Completion,
command, 1-3

Index-2

INDEX (CaNT.)

Construction,
.... , 1-17
<>, 1-18
:=, 1-17
@, 1-16
Continue,
.a job, 2-119
commands, 1-6
CONTINUE command, 2-23
Control,
character, 1-2
Control command, 1-3
processing, 1-6
Control file, 1-3
Copy,
JDECtapes, 2-62
magtape, 2-151
Core,
deposit in, 2-33
examine location, 2-73
/CORE,
LOGIN switch, 2-135
Core,
modify allocation, 2-25
CORE command, 2-25
Core image file,
load, 2-107
Correct,
typing errors, 1-4
CPUNCH command, 2-26
Create,
a file, 2-28, 2-143
files, 2-3
/CREATE,
MOUNT switch, 2-146
CREATE command, 2-28
CREDIR program, 2-29
/CREF,
LOAD switch, 2-128
CREF command, 2-30
/CREF switch, 2-19, 2-77
/CRLF,
LOGIN switch, 2-135
Cross-referenced file, 2-30
CR'TL/U, 1-4
CSTART command, 2-31
CTRL/C, 1-2, 1-4
CTRL/O, 1-4
CTRL/R, 1-5
CTRL/T, 1-5
CTY:, 1-8
D(eposit) command, 2-33
DAEMON, 2-35
Date,
arguments, 1-13
DAYTIME command, 2-34

DCORE command, 2-35
DDT command, 2-38
DEASSIGN command, 2-39
/DEBREAK,
LOGIN switch, 2-135
DEBUG command, 2-40
DECtape,
compare, 2-62
copy, 2-62
delete files, 2-98
format specifies, 2-102
identifier, 2-125
Delay,
command, 1-3
Delete,
a line, 1-4
commands, 2-1
DEC tape files, 2-98
files, 2-46
DELETE command, 2-46
DELETE key, 1-4
Density,
magtape, 2-151
DETACH command, 2-47
Device,
allocate, 2-11
assign, 2-144
attach to, 2-13
directory, 1-10
disassociate, 2-105
names of, 1-8
reassign, 2-56
restricted, 2-2
return, 2-39, 2-56
unrestricted, 2-2
DIRECT command, 2-48
Directory,
devices, 1-10
names, 1-10
DIS:, 1-8
Disassociate,
device, 2-105
logical names, 1-8
Disconnect,
terminal, 2-47
Disk,
area, 1-10
save files, 2-16
usage, 2-61
Disk files,
save, 2-16, 2-82
DISMOUNT command, 2-56
Dollar sign ($), 1-3, 1-7
DPx:, 1-8
DSK command, 2-61
DSK:, 1-8
/DSKFUL,
LOGIN switch, 2-135

Index-3

INDEX (CaNT.)

/DSKPRI,
LOGIN switch, 2-136
DTCOPY program, 2-62
DTx:, 1-8
DUMP,
ADDRESS command to, 2-65
ALL command to, 2-65
APPEND command to, 2-65
AUTOFORMAT command to,
2-65
CATEGORY command to, 2-66
CLOSE command to, 2-66
DUMP command to, 2-66
EJECT command to, 2-66
EXIT command to, 2-66
INPUT command to, 2-66
IRADIX command to, 2-67
JUSTIFY command to, 2-67
LEFTMA command to, 2-67
LINEPA command to, 2-67
MODES command to, 2-67
NUMPAGE command to, 2-68
OPTION command to, 2-68
ORADIX command to, 2-69
OUTPUT command to, 2-69
RIGHTMAR command to, 2-69
RUN command to, 2-69
SUPERSEDE command to,
2-69
SYFILE command to, 2-69
TDUMP command to, 2-70
TITLE command to, 2-70
TYPE command to, 2-70
WIDTH command to, 2-70
XTRACT command to, 2-70
DUMP command, 2-64
DUMP command to DUMP, 2-66
DUMP program, 2-65

/ECHO,
LOGIN switch, 2-136
EDIT command, 2-74
Editor,
LINED, 2-28
EJECT command to DUMP, 2-66
$EOF card, 1-1
EOF command, 2-75
Erroneous symbols,
list, 2-108
EXAMINE command, 2-73
Example,
card deck, 1-3
EXECUTE command, 2-76
EXIT command to DUMP, 2-66
Extension,
.CDP, 2-26
file name, 1-10

Extension (Cont.),
processor, 1-19
source file, 2-17

/F10,
LOAD switch, 2-129
/FI0 switch, 2-78
/FIIO switch, 2-19
.F4, 2-17
/F40,
LOAD switch, 2-129
/F40 switch, 2-78
/F40 switch, 2-20
Facility allocation,
commands, 2-1
.FAI, 2-17
FAILSA program, 2-82
/FAST,
KJOB switch, 2-120
.FCL, 2-17
/FDTA switch, 2-50
Feature test switches, 2-1
Features,
system, 2-113
FHx:, 1-8
FILCOM program, 2-87
File,
backspace, 2-15
command, 1-16
compare, 2-87
create a, 2-28, 2-143
cross-referenced, 2-30
delete, 2-46
edit a, 2-74
format specifiers, 2-102
list, 2-126
move, 2-82
preparation commands, 2-3
specifications, 1-10
structure names, 1-10
temporary, 1-15
transfer, 2-24, 2-98, 2-102
FILE command, 2-98
Files, 1-10
/FILES switch, 2-50
FILEX program, 2-102
/FILL,
LOGIN switch, 2-136
FINISH command, 2-105
. FOR, 2-17
/FORM,
LOGIN switch, 2-137
Format,
command, 1-6
Format specifiers, 2-102
/FOROTS,
LOAD switch, 2-128
Index-4

INDEX (CONT . )

/FOROTS switch, 2-77
/FORSE,
LOAD switch, 2-128
/FORTRAN,
LOAD switch, 2-128
/FORTRAN switch, 2-19, 2-77
/FUDGE,
LOAD switch, 2-128
FUDGE command, 2-106
/FUDGE switch, 2-19, 2-77
Functions,
system, 1-1

/G switch, 2-62
/GAG,
LOGIN switch, 2-137
Generic,
names, 1-8
GET command, 2-107
GLOB program, 2-108
Global symbols list, 2-108
GRIPE program, 2-111
/GUIDELINE,
LOGIN switch, 2-137

/H switch, 2-62
HALT command, 2-112
/HELP,
KJOB switch, 2-120
MOUNT switch, 2-146
HELP command, 2-113
/HELP switch, 2-50, 2-57
Hyphen, 1-6

I/O,
stop, 2-120
Identifier,
DECtape, 2-125
Indirect,
commands, 1-16
/INDIRECT switch, 2-50
INITIA command, 2-117
Initialization,
system, 2-117
Input,
terminate, 2-105
INPUT command to DUMP, 2-66
Input spooler mode, 1-3
Internal symbol table,
2-108
Interpreter,
batch command, 1-6

Interrupt,
prog r am, 1-4
lRADIX command to DUMP,
2-67

JCONTINUE command, 2-119
Job,
attach to, 2-13
continue a, 2-119
initialization, 1-1, 2-1
maximum number, 1-2
stop, 2-112, 2-120
terminate, 2-7
JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED, 1-2
$JOB card, 1-1
Jobs,
initiate, 1-1
JUSTIFY command to DUMP,
2-67

/K?10 switch, 2-20
/KAI0,
LOAD switch, 2-129
/KAI0 switch, 2-78
/KEEP switch, 2-57
Key,
control, 1-2
DELETE, 1-4
/KII0 siwtch, 2-78
KJOB command, 2-120
KJOB switch,
/BATCH, 2-120
/FAST, 2-120
/HELP, 2-120
/NOMESSAGE, 2-120

/L switch, 2-62
LABEL command, 2-125
Labels,
DECtape, 2-125
/LC,
LOGIN switch, 2-137
LEFTMA command to DUMP,
2-67
/LIB,
LOGIN switch, 2-138
/LIBRARY,
LOAD switch, 2-129
Library file, 2-106
Library search mode, 2-108,
2-109
/LIBRARY switch, 2-78

Index-5

INDEX (CONT.)

/LIMIT,
LOGIN switch, 2-138
Line,
delete a, 1-4
LINED, 2-74
LINED editor, 2-28
LINEPA command to DUMP,
2-67
/LINK,
LOAD switch, 2-129
/LINK switch, 2-78
Linking loader,
switches, 1-24
List,
erroneous symbols, 2-108
global symbols, 2-108
/LIST,
LOAD switch, 2-129
List,
nonre1ocatab1e symbols,
2-109
re1ocatab1e symbols,
2-109
LIST command, 2-126
/LIST switch, 2-20, 2-50,
2-78
/LMAP,
LOAD switch, 2-130
/LMAP switch, 2-78
Load,
core image file, 2-107
• RE L f i 1 e, 2 - 7 6
.REL files, 2-127
LOAD command, 2-127
LOAD switch,
/ALGOL, 2-127
/BIN, 2-127
LOAD switches, 2-127
/LOADER,
LOAD switch, 2-130
/LOADER switch, 2-78
LOCATE command, 2-133
Logical,
device name, 1-8, 2-11
LOGIN command, 2-134
?LOGIN please, 1-4
LPT,
spooled, 2-126
LPT:, 1-8
.LSP, 2-17

.MAC, 2-17
/MACRO,
LOAD switch, 2-130
/MACRO switch, 2-20, 2-78
/MACY11,
LOAD switch, 2-130

/MACY11 switch, 2-20, 2-79
Magtape,
backspace, 2-15, 2-151
copy, 2-151
density, 2-151
rewind, 2-151
save files on, 2-82
verify, 2-151
MAKE command, 2-143
/MANTIS,
LOAD switch, 2-130
/MANTIS switch, 2-20, 2-79
/MAP,
LOAD switch, 2-130
/MAP switch, 2-79
/MARKS switch, 2-50
Mask,
password, 1-7
Messages,
operator, 2-111
send, 2-7
Mode,
input spooler, 1-3
library search, 2-108, 2-109
monitor, 1-2
user, 1-2
MODES command to DUMP, 2-67
Modify,
core allocation, 2-25
Monitor mode, 1-2
MOUNT command, 2-144
Move,
disk files, 2-16
files, 2-82
MTCOPY program, 2-151
MTx:, 1-8
/MULTI,
MOUNT switch, 2-146
Multiply defined symbol, 2-110
Multiply specified symbol,
2-110

/N switch, 2-62
/NAME,
LOGIN switch, 2-138
Names,
command, 1-6
device, 1-8
directory, 1-10
file, 1-10
file structure, 1-10
generic, 1-8
~ogica1, 1-8, 2-11
node, 1-8
/NEW,
LOAD switch, 2-130
LOGIN switch, 2-138
Index-6

INDEX (CONT.)

/NEW switch, 2-20, 2-79
nnnDAE.TMP file, 2-64
?NO core assigned, 1-4
/NOALTMODE,
LOGIN switch, 2-134
/NOBIN,
LOAD switch, 2-130
/NOBIN switch, 2-20
/NOBLANK,
LOGIN switch, 2-135
/NOCOMPILE,
LOAD switch, 2-130
/NOCOMPILE switch, 2-21
NODE command, 2-152
Node name, 1-8
Nodes, 2-133
specifying, 2-1
/NOECHO,
LOGIN switch, 2-136
/NOLIST,
LOAD switch, 2-130
/NOLIST switch, 2-21
/NOMANTIS v
LOAD switch, 2-131
/NOMANTIS switch, 2-21
/NOMESSAGE,
KJOB switch, 2-120
Nonrelocatable symbols,
list, 2--109
/NORMAL switch, 2-51
/NOSEARCH,
LOAD switch, 2-131
/NOTE,
LOGIN s\Ali tch, 2-138
NSAVE command, 2-153
NSSAVE command, 2-154
Number sign (#), 1-12
Numbers,
project-programmer, 1-7
NUMPAGE command to DUMP,
2-68

/OLD,
LOAD switch, 2-131
/OLD switch, 2-21, 2-80
OPR:, 1-8
OPSER program, 2-155
Option,
files, 1-14
OPTION command to DUMP,
2-68
Option files, 1-14
/OPTION switch, 2-51
ORADIX command to DUMP,
2-69
OSAVE command, 2-160
OSSAVE command, 2-162

Output,
global symbols, 2-108
suppress, 1-4
terminate, 2-105
OUTPUT command to DUMP,
2-69
Override,
system defaults, 1-14

.Pll, 2-17
/PAGE,
LOGIN switch, 2-139
/PARITY switch, 2-51
PARTIAL ALLOCATION ONLY,
2-9
/PASSIVE,
MOUNT switch, 2-145
Passwords, 1-7
/PAUSE,
MOUNT switch, 2-146
/PAUSE switch, 2-57
Percent sign (%), 1-24
Period (.), 1-3
Permanent,
switches, 1-18
/PHYSICAL,
LOGIN switch, 2-139
/PHYSICAL switch, 2-51
PJOB command, 2-163
PLEASE command, 2-164
PLOT command, 2-166
PLT:, 1-8
/PRDEVICE switch, 2-51
/PRDIR switch, 2-52
PRESERVE command, 2-168
Prime (') character, 2-110
Print,
status information, 1-5
PRINT command, 2-169
Processing specifiers,
2-102
Processor,
extension, 1-19
standard, 1-19
switches, 1-20
Program,
ALCFIL, 2-9
BACKUP, 2-16
continue, 2-23
CREDIR, 2-29
DTCOPY, 2-62
DUMP, 2-65
execute, 2-76
FAILSA, 2-82
FILCOM, 2-87
FILEX, 2-102
GLOB, 2-108
Index-7

INDEX (CONT . )

Program (Cont.),
GRIPE, 2-111
interrupt, 1-4
MTCOPY, 2-151
OPSER, 2-155
QUOLST, 2-186
SETSRC, 2-214
stop, 1-2, 2-112
Project-programmer numbers,
1-7
PROTECT command, 2-171
/PROTECT switch, 2-52
Protection code,
access, 1-10
standard, 1-11
PTP:, 1-8
PTR:, 1-8
PTY:, 1-8
Public,
file structures, 1-10
Punch,
cards, 2-26

Question mark,
as wildcard, 1-12
QUEUE command, 2-173
QUEUE switches, 2-175
QUIKDM.CCL, 2-64
QUOLST program, 2-186
/QUOTA,
LOGIN switch, 2-139

R command, 2-187
/RCVSPEED,
LOGIN switch, 2-139
Read,
blocks, 2-61
DEC tape directory, 2-98
Reassign,
device, 2-56
REASSIGN command, 2-188
/REASSIGN swtich, 2-57
REATTA command, 2-189
Records,
backspace, 2-15
/REELID,
MOUNT switch, 2-146
REENTER command, 2-190
/REL,
LOAD switch, 2-131
.REL file,
load, 2-76
produce, 2-17
.REL files,
load, 2-127

/REL switch, 2-80
Relative,
argument, 1-13
/RELEASE switch, 2-57
Re1ocatab1e symbols,
list, 2-109
/REMOVE switch, 2-57
RENAME command, 2-191
R&SOURCE command, 2-192
Restore,
files, 2-82
Restricted,
devices, 2-2
Restricted devices,
assign, 2-11
Return,
devices, 2-39, 2-56
Rewind,
magtape, 2-151
REWIND command, 2-193
/REWIND switch, 2-52, 2-57
RIGHTMAR command to DUMP,
2-69
/RONLY,
MOUNT switch, 2-146
/RUN,
LOGIN switch, 2-139
RUN command, 2-194
RUN command to DUMP, 2-69
/RUN switch, 2-52
/RUNOFFSET switch, 2-52

.SAI, 2-17
Sample,
card deck, 1-3
Save,
disk files, 2-82
SAVE command, 2-196
/SCAN,
LOGIN switch, i-139
SCHED command, 2-197
/SEARCH,
LOAD switch, 2-131
/SEARCH switch, 2-80
/SELF,
LOAD switch, 2-131
/SELF switch, 2-21, 2-80
Semicolon, 1-6
Send,
messages, 2-7
SEND command, 2-198
SET BLOCKSIZE command,
2-200
SET BREAK command, 2-201
SET CDR command, 2-204
SET CPU command, 2-205
SET DEFAULT command, 2-207
Index-8

INDEX (CONT.)

SET DENSITY command, 2-208
SET DSKFUL command, 2-209
SET DSKPRI command, 2-210,
2-211
SET PHYSICAL command, 2-212
SET SPOOL command, 2-213
SET TIME command, 2-218
SET TTY command, 2-220
SET WATCH command, 2-227
SETSRC program, 2-214
/SETTTY,
LOGIN switch, 2-140
SFD, 1-10
/SHOVE,
MOUNT switch, 2-146
/SINCE switch, 2-52
/SINGLE,
MOUNT switch, 2-146
Sbfltch,
/KI10, 2-78
Si:~e,

cluster, 2-9
SKIP command, 2-228
/SLOW switch, 2-52
/SNOBOL,
LOAD switch, 2-131
/SNOBOL switch, 2-21, 2-80
/SORT switch, 2-52
Source compare switches,
2-88
Source file,
translate, 2-76, 2-127
Source files,
list, 2-126
Space,
allocate, 2-9
Sp(~c ifying ,
nodes, 2-1
/SPEED,
LOGIN switch, 2-140
/SJE>OOL,
LOGIN switch, 2-140
Spooled LPT, 2-126
SPRINT-10, 1-3
Standard,
processor, 1-19
protection code, 1-11
translator, 2-17
START command, 2-231
Station numbers, 1-8
Status information,
print, 1-5
/STAY switch, 2-57
Stop,
I/O, 2-120
job, 2-120
job/program, 2-112
program, 1-2

/STR,
LOGIN switch, 2-140
Sub-file directory, 1-10
SUBMIT command, 2-232
Substituting,
devices, 1-8, 2-11
/SUMMARY switch, 2-52
SUPERSEDE command to DUMP,
2-69
Suppress,
output, 1-4
Switch,
/6, 2-62
/ALGOL, 2-18, 2-76
/BIN, 2-18, 2-76
/BLISS, 2-18, 2-76
/C, 2-62
/CHECK, 2-57
/COBOL, 2-18, 2-76
/COMPILE, 2-18, 2-77
/CREF, 2-19, 2-77
/F10, 2-78
/F1IO, 2-19
/F40, 2-78
/F40, 2-20
/FDTA, 2-50
/FILES, 2-50
/FOROTS, 2-77
/FORTRAN, 2-19, 2-77
/FUDGE, 2-19, 2-77
/G, 2-62
/H, 2-62
/HELP, 2-50, 2-57
/INDIRECT, 2-50
/K?10, 2-20
/KA10, 2-78
/KEEP, 2-57
/L, 2-62
/LIBRARY, 2-78
/LINK, 2-78
/LIST, 2-20, 2-50, 2-78
/LMAP, 2-78
/LOADER, 2-78
/MACRO, 2-20, 2-78
/MACY11, 2-20, 2-79
/MANTIS, 2-20, 2-79
/MAP, 2-79
/MARKS, 2-50
/N, 2-62
/NEW, 2-20, 2-79
/NOBIN, 2-20
/NOCOMPILE, 2-21
/NOLIST, 2-21
/NOMANTIS, 2-21
/NORMAL, 2-51
/OLD, 2-21, 2-80
/OPTION, 2-51
/PARITY, 2-51

Index-9

INDEX (CONT . )

Swi tch (Cont.)
/PAUSE, 2-57
/PHYSICAL, 2-51
/PRDEVICE, 2-51
/PRDIR, 2-52
/PROTECT, 2-52
/REL, 2-80
/RELEASE, 2-57
/REMOVE, 2-57
/REWIND, 2-52, 2-57
/RUN, 2-52
/RUNOFFSET, 2-52
/SEARCH, 2-80
/SELF, 2-21, 2-80
/SINCE, 2-52
/SLOW, 2-52
/SNOBOL, 2-21, 2-80
/SORT, 2-52
/STAY, 2-57
/SUMMARY, 2-52
/SYS, 2-80
/T, 2-62
/TITLES, 2-52
/UNITS, 2-52
/UNLOAD, 2-58
/v, 2-62
/VID, 2-58
/WAIT, 2-58
/WIDTH, 2-52
/WORDS, 2-53
/WRITTEN, 2-53
/z, 2-62
SWITCH.INI, 1-14
Switches,
binary compare, 2-87
compile, 1-18
FAILSA, 2-82
for LOAD command, 2-127
linking loader, 1-24
permanent, 1-18
processor, 1-20
QUEUE, 2-175
source compare, 2-87
temporary, 1-18
Swtich,
/REASSIGN, 2-57
SYFILE command to DUMP,
2-69
Symbol,
multiply defined, 2-110
multiply specified, 2-110
undefined, 2-110
Symbol table,
internal, 2-108
Symbols list,
global, 2-108
/SYS,
LOAD switch, 2-131
LOGIN switch, 2-140

/SYS switch, 2-80
SYS:, 1-8
SYSTAT command, 2-234
System,
access, 2-134
access to, 1-7
functions, 1-1
initialization, 2-117
System defaults,
override, 1-14

/T switch, 2-62
/TABS,
LOGIN switch, 2-141
/TAPE,
LOGIN switch, 2-141
TDUMP command to DUMP, 2-70
TECO command, 2-238
Temporary,
files, 1-15
switches, 1-18
Terminal,
disconnect, 2-47
Terminate,
commands, 1-6
input/output, 2-105
job, 2-7
Time,
arguments, 1-13
/TIME,
LOGIN switch, 2-141
TIME command, 2-239
TITLE command to DUMP, 2-70
/TITLES switch, 2-52
.TMP extension, 1-16
?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS, 1-7
TPUNCH command, 2-241
Transfer,
files, 2-24, 2-82, 2-98,
2-102
Translate,
source file, 2-76, 2-127
Translator,
standard, 2-17
Translators, 2-17
Transport,
disl-: files, 2-16
TTY command,
SET, 2-220
TTY.INI, 2-117
TTY:, 1-8
TYPE command, 2-243
TYPE command to DUMP, 2-70
Type-ahead technique, 1-3
Typing errors,
correct, 1-4

Index-10

INDEX (CONT.)

UF'D, 1-10
Undefined symbol, 2-110
/UNITS switch, 2-52
UNLOAD command, 2-245
/UNLOAD switch, 2-58
Unrestricted,
devices, 2-2
Unrestricted devices,
assign, 2-11
Useage,
disk, 2-61
User file directory, 1-10
User mode, 1-2
USESTAT command, 2-246

/V switch, 2-62
Verify,
magtape, 2-151
VERSION command, 2-247
/VID,
MOUNT switch, 2-147
/VID switch, 2-58
/VIRTUAL,
LOGIN switch, 2-141

/W,1\IT,
MOUNT switch, 2-147
/W,~IT swi tch, 2-58

/WATCH,
LOGIN switch, 2-141
/WENABL,
MOUNT switch, 2-147
WHERE command, 2-249
/WIDTH,
LOGIN switch, 2-142
WIDTH command to DUMP, 2-70
/WIDTH switch, 2-52
Wildcards, 1-11
/WLOCK,
MOUNT switch, 2-148
/WORDS switch, 2-53
/WRITE,
MOUNT switch, 2-148
Written,
blocks, 2-61
/WRITTEN switch, 2-53

/XMTSPEED,
LOGIN switch, 2-142
XTRACT command to DUMP,
2-70

/Z switch, 2-62
Zero,
DECtape directory, 2-98
ZERO command, 2-250
"c, 1-2

Index-II

DECsystem-lQ
Operating System
Commands Manual
AA-09l6C-TB

READER'S COMMENTS

NOTE:

This form is for document comments only. DIGITAL will
use comments submitted on this form at the company's
discretion. Problems with software should be reported
on a Software Performance Report (SPR) form.
If you
require a written reply and are eligible to receive
one under SPR service, submit your comments on an SPR
form.

Did you find errors in this manual?

If so, specify by page.

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized?
Please make suggestions for improvement.

Is there sufficient documentation on associated system programs
required for use of the software described in this manual? If not,
what material is missing and where should it be placed?

Please indicate the type of user/reader that you most nearly represent.
[] Assembly language programmer
[] Higher-level language programmer
[] Occasional programmer (experienced)
[] User with little programming experience

[JI

Student programmer
[] Non-programmer interested in computer concepts and capabilities
Name

Date _____________

Organization _________________________________
Street
City

_____________ Sta te _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Zip Code _ _ _ _ _ _ __
or
Country

-------------------------------------------------------------Fold Ilere------------------------------------------------------------

.---------------------------------------------~- Do Not Tear· Fold Here and Staple -----------------------------------------------

FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 152
MAR LBORO, MASS

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES

Postage will be paid by:

Software Documentation
200 Forest Avenue MRl·2/E37
Marlboro, Massachusetts 01752